《沙门果经》的注释巴利
2. Sāmaññaphalasuttavaṇṇanā
《王臣论》的注释巴利
Rājāmaccakathāvaṇṇanā
150 150. 如是我闻……乃至……在王舍城,这就是《沙门果经》。其中,对尚未解释过的词作如下注释——“在王舍城”:在这样命名的城市中。因为这座城曾被曼陀特大王、大典尊等人占据,所以称为“王舍城”。也有人用其他方式解释,但那些有什么用呢?那只是这座城的名称而已。不过,这座城在佛陀时代和转轮王时代是城市,在其他时候则是空无一人的,被夜叉占据,成为他们的住处。“住”:笼统地说,这是说明具备威仪住、天住、梵住、圣住等任何一种住。但在这里,是说明与行、住、坐、卧等威仪中的某一种威仪相应。因此,世尊无论是站着、走着、坐着还是躺着,都应知道是“住”。因为他以一种威仪中断前一种威仪带来的不适,使身体不致败坏而持续运作,所以称为“住”。巴利
150.Evaṃme sutaṃ…pe… rājagaheti sāmaññaphalasuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ apubbapadavaṇṇanā – rājagaheti evaṃnāmake nagare. Tañhi mandhātumahāgovindādīhi pariggahitattā rājagahanti vuccati. Aññepi ettha pakāre vaṇṇayanti, kiṃ tehi? Nāmamattametaṃ tassa nagarassa. Taṃ panetaṃ buddhakāle ca cakkavattikāle ca nagaraṃ hoti, sesakāle suññaṃ hoti yakkhapariggahitaṃ, tesaṃ vasanavanaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati. Viharatīti avisesena iriyāpathadibbabrahmaariyavihāresu aññataravihārasamaṅgiparidīpanametaṃ. Idha pana ṭhānagamananisajjasayanappabhedesu iriyāpathesu aññatarairiyāpathasamāyogaparidīpanaṃ. Tena ṭhitopi gacchantopi nisinnopi sayānopi bhagavā viharati ceva veditabbo. So hi ekaṃ iriyāpathabādhanaṃ aññena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā aparipatantaṃ attabhāvaṃ harati pavatteti, tasmā viharatīti vuccati.
在吉瓦咖童子医的芒果园——这是为了指明世尊依止哪个行境村而住,并说明他附近的住所。因此,这里的意思应理解为:“住在王舍城,在吉瓦咖童子医的芒果园”,也就是住在王舍城附近吉瓦咖童子医的芒果园中。这里用的是依格,表示“附近”的意思。其中,“吉瓦咖”是因为活下来而得名;“童子医”是因为由王子抚养而得名。正如经中说:“‘喂,那被乌鸦围着的是什么?’‘王子,是个孩子。’‘喂,他活着吗?’‘活着,王子。’‘那么,喂,把那孩子带到我们的后宫,交给乳母们抚养吧。’因为活下来,就给他取名叫‘吉瓦咖’;因为由王子抚养,就给他取名叫‘童子医’。”(《大品》328)这是此处的简要说明。详细内容则见于《吉瓦咖事犍度》。关于他的裁决解说,则载于律藏注《一切善见》中。巴利
Jīvakassa komārabhaccassa ambavaneti idamassa yaṃ gocaragāmaṃ upanissāya viharati, tassa samīpanivāsanaṭṭhānaparidīpanaṃ. Tasmā – rājagahe viharati jīvakassa komārabhaccassa ambavaneti rājagahasamīpe jīvakassa komārabhaccassa ambavane viharatīti evamettha attho veditabbo. Samīpatthe hetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ. Tattha jīvatīti jīvako, kumārena bhatoti komārabhacco. Yathāha – ‘‘kiṃ bhaṇe, etaṃ kākehi samparikiṇṇanti? Dārako devāti. Jīvati bhaṇeti? Jīvati, devāti. Tena hi, bhaṇe taṃ dārakaṃ amhākaṃ antepuraṃ netvā dhātīnaṃ detha posetunti. Tassa jīvatīti jīvakoti nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Kumārena posāpitoti komārabhaccoti nāmaṃ akaṃsū’’ti (mahāva. 328) ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārena pana jīvakavatthukhandhake āgatameva. Vinicchayakathāpissa samantapāsādikāya vinayaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttā.
这位吉瓦咖有一次清泻了世尊体液偏盛的身体,然后供养了一套细布双衣。在随喜衣供养的说法结束时,他证得了入流果,心里想:“我每天得去拜见佛陀两三次,可竹林精舍太远了,而我的芒果园比较近,不如我就在那里为世尊建一座住所。”于是他在那座芒果园里建好了夜间住处、白天住处、洞窟、小屋、厅堂等,又为世尊造了一座相称的香室,并用高十八肘、颜色像铜板的围墙把芒果园围了起来。然后他以带衣的饭食使以佛陀为首的比丘僧团满足,又行了施水礼,把这座精舍献了出去。就是针对这件事,才说“在吉瓦咖童子医的芒果园”。巴利
Ayaṃ pana jīvako ekasmiṃ samaye bhagavato dosābhisannaṃ kāyaṃ virecetvā siveyyakaṃ dussayugaṃ datvā vatthānumodanāpariyosāne sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāya cintesi – ‘‘mayā divasassa dvattikkhattuṃ buddhupaṭṭhānaṃ gantabbaṃ, idañca veḷuvanaṃ atidūre, mayhaṃ pana ambavanaṃ uyyānaṃ āsannataraṃ, yaṃnūnāhaṃ ettha bhagavato vihāraṃ kāreyya’’nti. So tasmiṃ ambavane rattiṭṭhānadivāṭhānaleṇakuṭimaṇḍapādīni sampādetvā bhagavato anucchavikaṃ gandhakuṭiṃ kārāpetvā ambavanaṃ aṭṭhārasahatthubbedhena tambapaṭṭavaṇṇena pākārena parikkhipāpetvā buddhappamukhaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ sacīvarabhattena santappetvā dakkhiṇodakaṃ pātetvā vihāraṃ niyyātesi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘jīvakassa komārabhaccassa ambavane’’ti.
“一千二百五十位比丘”,就是比一千三百位比丘少五十位,也就是一千二百五十位比丘。在“王”等词中,他凭着自己的自在成就,用四种摄受之法让大众欢喜、增长,所以叫“王”。他是摩揭陀人的主宰,所以叫“摩揭陀王”。他尚未出生,就被占相师预言“将会成为父亲的仇敌”,因此叫阿阇世。巴利
Aḍḍhateḷasehi bhikkhusatehīti aḍḍhasatena ūnehi terasahi bhikkhusatehi. Rājātiādīsu rājati attano issariyasampattiyā catūhi saṅgahavatthūhi mahājanaṃ rañjeti vaḍḍhetīti rājā. Magadhānaṃ issaroti māgadho. Ajātoyeva rañño sattu bhavissatīti nemittakehi niddiṭṭhoti ajātasattu.
据说,当胎儿还在她腹中时,王后生起了这样一种渴求:“啊,我真想喝国王右臂的血!”她想:“这么重的渴求生起来了,没法跟任何人说。”她没法把这事说出来,于是变得消瘦、难看。国王问她:“夫人,你的身体不像平常的气色,是什么原因?”她说:“大王,请别问。”国王再三追问:“夫人,你连心里的想法都不告诉我,还能告诉谁呢?”这样那样地逼问,终于让她说了出来。国王听后说:“傻瓜,这有什么好觉得为难的?”于是叫来医生,用金刀割开手臂,用金碟接血,掺上水让她喝下。占相师们听说这件事后预言:“这个胎儿会成为国王的仇敌,国王会被他杀死。”王后听了心想:“据说从我肚子里生出来的孩子会杀死国王。”她想堕胎,就去花园让人按压腹部,但胎儿没有掉下来。她一次又一次地去,照样让人这么做。国王琢磨她为什么老是去花园,得知原因后说:“夫人,你肚子里是男是女还不知道,你竟然这样对待自己将要出生的孩子。要是这事在赡部洲传开,会显出极大的缺德。你别再这样做了。”于是制止了她,并派人守护。到了临产的时候,她又想:“我要杀了他。”那时守护的人把婴儿抱走了。后来,人们把已经长大的王子带到王后面前。她一见他就生起了对儿子的疼爱,因此再也下不了手杀他。国王也渐渐把副王的位子给了这个儿子。巴利
Tasmiṃ kira kucchigate deviyā evarūpo dohaḷo uppajji – ‘‘aho vatāhaṃ rañño dakkhiṇabāhulohitaṃ piveyya’’nti, sā ‘‘bhāriye ṭhāne dohaḷo uppanno, na sakkā kassaci ārocetu’’nti taṃ kathetuṃ asakkontī kisā dubbaṇṇā ahosi. Taṃ rājā pucchi – ‘‘bhadde, tuyhaṃ attabhāvo na pakativaṇṇo, kiṃ kāraṇa’’nti? ‘‘Mā puccha, mahārājāti’’. ‘‘Bhadde, tvaṃ attano ajjhāsayaṃ mayhaṃ akathentī kassa kathessasī’’ti tathā tathā nibandhitvā kathāpesi. Sutvā ca – ‘‘bāle, kiṃ ettha tuyhaṃ bhāriyasaññā ahosī’’ti vejjaṃ pakkosāpetvā suvaṇṇasatthakena bāhuṃ phālāpetvā suvaṇṇasarakena lohitaṃ gahetvā udakena sambhinditvā pāyesi. Nemittakā taṃ sutvā – ‘‘esa gabbho rañño sattu bhavissati, iminā rājā haññissatī’’ti byākariṃsu. Devī sutvā – ‘‘mayhaṃ kira kucchito nikkhanto rājānaṃ māressatī’’ti gabbhaṃ pātetukāmā uyyānaṃ gantvā kucchiṃ maddāpesi, gabbho na patati. Sā punappunaṃ gantvā tatheva kāresi. Rājā kimatthaṃ ayaṃ abhiṇhaṃ uyyānaṃ gacchatīti parivīmaṃsanto taṃ kāraṇaṃ sutvā – ‘‘bhadde, tava kucchiyaṃ puttoti vā dhītāti vā na paññāyati, attano nibbattadārakaṃ evamakāsīti mahā aguṇarāsipi no jambudīpatale āvibhavissati, mā tvaṃ evaṃ karohī’’ti nivāretvā ārakkhaṃ adāsi. Sā gabbhavuṭṭhānakāle ‘‘māressāmī’’ti cintesi. Tadāpi ārakkhamanussā dārakaṃ apanayiṃsu. Athāparena samayena vuḍḍhippattaṃ kumāraṃ deviyā dassesuṃ. Sā taṃ disvāva puttasinehaṃ uppādesi, tena naṃ māretuṃ nāsakkhi. Rājāpi anukkamena puttassa oparajjamadāsi.
有一次,提婆达多独自在僻静处想:“舍利弗有自己的徒众,大目犍连有自己的徒众,大迦叶也有自己的徒众,他们各自各管一摊,我也应该带一摊人。”他又想:“没有利养,就没办法拉拢徒众。来吧,让我去弄到利养。”于是,他按照《犍度》里记载的方法,用神通变化让阿阇世王子生起信心。他得知王子每天早晚都亲自带着五百辆车前来侍奉,对自己极为信赖,有一天便去见他,说道:“王子,从前的人寿命长,现在的人寿命短。所以,王子,你杀掉父亲,自己做国王;我杀掉世尊,自己做佛陀。”他就这样鼓动王子去弑父。巴利
Athekasmiṃ samaye devadatto rahogato cintesi – ‘‘sāriputtassa parisā mahāmoggallānassa parisā mahākassapassa parisāti, evamime visuṃ visuṃ dhurā, ahampi ekaṃ dhuraṃ nīharāmī’’ti. So ‘‘na sakkā vinā lābhena parisaṃ uppādetuṃ, handāhaṃ lābhaṃ nibbattemī’’ti cintetvā khandhake āgatanayena ajātasattuṃ kumāraṃ iddhipāṭihāriyena pasādetvā sāyaṃ pātaṃ pañcahi rathasatehi upaṭṭhānaṃ āgacchantaṃ ativissatthaṃ ñatvā ekadivasaṃ upasaṅkamitvā etadavoca – ‘‘pubbe kho, kumāra, manussā dīghāyukā, etarahi appāyukā, tena hi tvaṃ kumāra, pitaraṃ hantvā rājā hohi, ahaṃ bhagavantaṃ hantvā buddho bhavissāmī’’ti kumāraṃ pituvadhe uyyojeti.
他心想:“提婆达多尊者有大神通,没有他不知道的事。”于是把匕首绑在大腿上,大白天就心怀恐惧、惊慌、疑虑、害怕,进入后宫,做出了前面说的那种暴行。然后大臣们把他抓住,审问之后商议说:“王子该杀,提婆达多也该杀,所有比丘都该杀。”他们打算按国王的命令来处置,就把这件事禀报了国王。巴利
So – ‘‘ayyo devadatto mahānubhāvo, etassa aviditaṃ nāma natthī’’ti ūruyā potthaniyaṃ bandhitvā divā divassa bhīto ubbiggo ussaṅkī utrasto antepuraṃ pavisitvā vuttappakāraṃ vippakāraṃ akāsi. Atha naṃ amaccā gahetvā anuyuñjitvā – ‘‘kumāro ca hantabbo, devadatto ca, sabbe ca bhikkhū hantabbā’’ti sammantayitvā rañño āṇāvasena karissāmāti rañño ārocesuṃ.
国王把那些想杀他的大臣全都撤了职,又把那些不想杀他的大臣安排到高位上,然后问王子:“王子,你为什么想杀我?”王子回答:“大王,我是为了王位。”国王就把王位给了他。巴利
Rājā ye amaccā māretukāmā ahesuṃ, tesaṃ ṭhānantarāni acchinditvā, ye na māretukāmā, te uccesu ṭhānesu ṭhapetvā kumāraṃ pucchi – ‘‘kissa pana tvaṃ, kumāra, maṃ māretukāmosī’’ti? ‘‘Rajjenamhi, deva, atthiko’’ti. Rājā tassa rajjaṃ adāsi.
他心想“我的心愿已经实现了”,就去告诉了提婆达多。提婆达多听了对他说:“你以为把豺关在里面,自己就像那个被鼓皮裹住的人一样,做的事就天衣无缝了吗?过不了几天,你父亲想起你对他做的那些侮辱,他自己就会重新当上国王。”他就问:“尊者,那我该怎么办?”提婆达多说:“斩草除根,杀了他。”他说:“尊者,我父亲不是不能用刀兵杀害的吗?”提婆达多说:“那就断了他的饮食,让他死。”于是他把父亲关进了炙热房。所谓炙热房,就是用来执行刑罚的熏烟房。他还下令:“除了我母亲,不许任何人去看他。”王后把食物盛在金碗里,藏在怀中带进去。国王吃了,才得以活命。他问:“我父亲是怎么活下来的?”听说这件事后,就下令:“不许我母亲把食物藏在怀里带进去。”从此以后,王后就把食物藏在发髻里带进去。他听说后,又说:“不许盘着发髻进去。”于是王后把食物放在金鞋里,盖好,穿上鞋走进去。国王靠这个活命。他又问:“是怎么活下来的?”听说了这件事后,又说:“也不许穿着鞋进去。”从此以后,王后就用香水沐浴,在身上涂上四种甜味的东西,再披上衣服进去。国王舔她的身体来活命。他又问起,听说了这件事后,就说:“从今以后,不许我母亲再进去。”王后站在门口,哭着说:“大王,频婆娑罗,你小时候不肯让人杀他,你亲手养大了自己的敌人,如今这是你最后一次见我了,从今以后我再也见不到你了。如果我有什么过错,请大王宽恕。”她哭着哭着,转身离开了。巴利
So mayhaṃ manoratho nipphannoti devadattassa ārocesi. Tato naṃ so āha – ‘‘tvaṃ siṅgālaṃ antokatvā bheripariyonaddhapuriso viya sukiccakārimhīti maññasi, katipāheneva te pitā tayā kataṃ avamānaṃ cintetvā sayameva rājā bhavissatī’’ti. Atha, bhante, kiṃ karomīti? Mūlaghaccaṃ ghātehīti. Nanu, bhante, mayhaṃ pitā na satthavajjhoti? Āhārupacchedena naṃ mārehīti. So pitaraṃ tāpanagehe pakkhipāpesi, tāpanagehaṃ nāma kammakaraṇatthāya kataṃ dhūmagharaṃ. ‘‘Mama mātaraṃ ṭhapetvā aññassa daṭṭhuṃ mā dethā’’ti āha. Devī suvaṇṇasarake bhattaṃ pakkhipitvā ucchaṅgenādāya pavisati. Rājā taṃ bhuñjitvā yāpeti. So – ‘‘mayhaṃ pitā kathaṃ yāpetī’’ti pucchitvā taṃ pavattiṃ sutvā – ‘‘mayhaṃ mātu ucchaṅgaṃ katvā pavisituṃ mā dethā’’ti āha. Tato paṭṭhāya devī moḷiyaṃ pakkhipitvā pavisati. Tampi sutvā ‘‘moḷiṃ bandhitvā pavisituṃ mā dethā’’ti. Tato suvaṇṇapādukāsu bhattaṃ ṭhapetvā pidahitvā pādukā āruyha pavisati. Rājā tena yāpeti. Puna ‘‘kathaṃ yāpetī’’ti pucchitvā tamatthaṃ sutvā ‘‘pādukā āruyha pavisitumpi mā dethā’’ti āha. Tato paṭṭhāya devī gandhodakena nhāyitvā sarīraṃ catumadhurena makkhetvā pārupitvā pavisati. Rājā tassā sarīraṃ lehitvā yāpeti. Puna pucchitvā taṃ pavattiṃ sutvā ‘‘ito paṭṭhāya mayhaṃ mātu pavesanaṃ nivārethā’’ti āha. Devī dvāramūle ṭhatvā ‘‘sāmi, bimbisāra, etaṃ daharakāle māretuṃ na adāsi, attano sattuṃ attanāva posesi, idaṃ pana dāni te pacchimadassanaṃ, nāhaṃ ito paṭṭhāya tumhe passituṃ labhāmi, sace mayhaṃ doso atthi, khamatha devā’’ti roditvā kanditvā nivatti.
从那时起,国王就没有食物了。国王靠着道果之乐和经行维持生命,他的身体变得极其光洁。他问:“喂,我父王是怎么维持生命的?”听说“大王,他靠经行维持生命,身体变得极其光洁”之后,他心想“我要断了他的经行”,于是派了理发师去,吩咐道:“把我父王的脚掌用剃刀割开,涂上盐和油,用烧得通红的相思木炭烤。”国王看见他们,心想:“一定是我儿子受了谁的教唆,这些人是来给我剃须的。”他们走上前,顶礼后站在一旁。被问“你们来做什么”时,他们就把那道命令报告了。国王说:“你们就照你们国王的意思做吧。”他们说了声“大王,请坐好”,顶礼国王后说:“大王,我们是在执行国王的命令,请不要对我们生气,这种事对您这样的法王来说实在不相称。”说完,他们用左手抓住国王的脚踝,右手拿起剃刀,割开脚底,涂上盐和油,用烧得通红的相思木炭烤。据说,这是因为国王以前穿着鞋走进塔庙的庭院,又用没洗的脚踩了为坐而铺的华贵坐垫,这就是那件事的果报。国王生起了强烈的苦受。他一边忆念“啊,佛陀!啊,法!啊,僧伽!”一边就像被丢弃在塔庙庭院里的花环一样枯萎了,然后投生到四大王天,成为多闻天王的侍从,名叫迦那瓦萨跋的夜叉。巴利
Tato paṭṭhāya rañño āhāro natthi. Rājā maggaphalasukhena caṅkamena yāpeti. Ativiya assa attabhāvo virocati. So – ‘‘kathaṃ, me bhaṇe, pitā yāpetī’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘caṅkamena, deva, yāpeti; ativiya cassa attabhāvo virocatī’’ti sutvā ‘caṅkamaṃ dānissa hāressāmī’ti cintetvā – ‘‘mayhaṃ pitu pāde khurena phāletvā loṇatelena makkhetvā khadiraṅgārehi vītaccitehi pacathā’’ti nhāpite pesesi. Rājā te disvā – ‘‘nūna mayhaṃ putto kenaci saññatto bhavissati, ime mama massukaraṇatthāyāgatā’’ti cintesi. Te gantvā vanditvā aṭṭhaṃsu. ‘Kasmā āgatatthā’ti ca puṭṭhā taṃ sāsanaṃ ārocesuṃ. ‘‘Tumhākaṃ rañño manaṃ karothā’’ti ca vuttā ‘nisīda, devā’ti vatvā ca rājānaṃ vanditvā – ‘‘deva, mayaṃ rañño āṇaṃ karoma, mā amhākaṃ kujjhittha, nayidaṃ tumhādisānaṃ dhammarājūnaṃ anucchavika’’nti vatvā vāmahatthena gopphake gahetvā dakkhiṇahatthena khuraṃ gahetvā pādatalāni phāletvā loṇatelena makkhetvā khadiraṅgārehi vītaccitehi paciṃsu. Rājā kira pubbe cetiyaṅgaṇe saupāhano agamāsi, nisajjanatthāya paññattakaṭasārakañca adhotehi pādehi akkami, tassāyaṃ nissandoti vadanti. Rañño balavavedanā uppannā. So – ‘‘aho buddho, aho dhammo, aho saṅgho’’ti anussarantoyeva cetiyaṅgaṇe khittamālā viya milāyitvā cātumahārājikadevaloke vessavaṇassa paricārako janavasabho nāma yakkho hutvā nibbatti.
就在同一天,阿阇世的儿子出生了。报告儿子出生和父王去世的两封信,在同一时刻送到。大臣们心想:“我们先禀报儿子出生的事吧。”就把那封信放到国王手里。国王就在那一瞬间生起了对儿子的爱,这爱搅动全身,一直透到骨髓。就在那一刻,他明白了父王的恩情:“我出生的时候,我父王一定也是这样生起了爱。”他就说:“去吧,你们去把我的父王放了。”大臣们问:“大王,要放什么?”说着把另一封信放到他手里。巴利
Taṃ divasameva ajātasattussa putto jāto, puttassa jātabhāvañca pitumatabhāvañca nivedetuṃ dve lekhā ekakkhaṇeyeva āgatā. Amaccā – ‘‘paṭhamaṃ puttassa jātabhāvaṃ ārocessāmā’’ti taṃ lekhaṃ rañño hatthe ṭhapesuṃ. Rañño taṅkhaṇeyeva puttasineho uppajjitvā sakalasarīraṃ khobhetvā aṭṭhimiñjaṃ āhacca aṭṭhāsi. Tasmiṃ khaṇe pituguṇamaññāsi – ‘‘mayi jātepi mayhaṃ pitu evameva sineho uppanno’’ti. So – ‘‘gacchatha, bhaṇe, mayhaṃ pitaraṃ vissajjethā’’ti āha. ‘‘Kiṃ vissajjāpetha, devā’’ti itaraṃ lekhaṃ hatthe ṭhapayiṃsu.
他听到这个消息后,哭着走到母亲跟前,问:“妈妈,我出生的时候,父亲对我有过这样的爱吗?”母亲说:“傻孩子,你在说什么?你很小的时候,手指上长了一个疖子。那时你哭个不停,大家怎么哄都哄不住,就抱着你来到正坐在审判堂上的你父亲面前。父亲把你的手指放进自己嘴里,那个疖子就在嘴里破了。那时,父亲因为对你的爱,没把混着血的脓吐出来,直接咽了下去。你父亲对你的爱就是这样。”他痛哭哀伤之后,为父亲办了后事。巴利
So taṃ pavattiṃ sutvā rodamāno mātusamīpaṃ gantvā – ‘‘ahosi nu, kho, amma, mayhaṃ pitu mayi jāte sineho’’ti? Sā āha – ‘‘bālaputta, kiṃ vadesi, tava daharakāle aṅguliyā pīḷakā uṭṭhahi. Atha taṃ rodamānaṃ saññāpetuṃ asakkontā taṃ gahetvā vinicchayaṭṭhāne nisinnassa tava pitu santikaṃ agamaṃsu. Pitā te aṅguliṃ mukhe ṭhapesi. Pīḷakā mukheyeva bhijji. Atha kho pitā tava sinehena taṃ lohitamissakaṃ pubbaṃ aniṭṭhubhitvāva ajjhohari. Evarūpo te pitu sineho’’ti. So roditvā paridevitvā pitu sarīrakiccaṃ akāsi.
提婆达多也来到阿阇世面前,说:“大王,请下令派人去夺沙门乔达摩的性命。”阿阇世派出了人手,提婆达多自己登上灵鹫山,用机关推下石头,又放出那喇吉利象,但用尽各种办法都杀不了世尊。他失去了利养和恭敬,又去求五事而得不到,心想:“我要用这些来煽动大众。”于是他就破了僧团。等到舍利弗和目犍连带着僧众离开后,提婆达多口吐热血,卧病在床九个月,心生悔恨。他问:“导师现在住在哪里?”有人告诉他“在祇园”,他便说:“用床把我抬去,让我见导师。”在被抬去的路上,因为他没有修成能亲见世尊的业,就在祇园莲花池旁边,大地裂开,他堕入其中,落进了大地狱。这里只是简略说说,详细的事缘记载在《犍度》里,因为那里已经讲过,所以这里不再细说。他在还没出生时,就被占相师预言会成为国王的怨敌,因此名叫阿阇世。巴利
Devadattopi ajātasattuṃ upasaṅkamitvā – ‘‘purise, mahārāja, āṇāpehi, ye samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ jīvitā voropessantī’’ti vatvā tena dinne purise pesetvā sayaṃ gijjhakūṭaṃ āruyha yantena silaṃ pavijjhitvā nāḷāgirihatthiṃ muñcāpetvāpi kenaci upāyena bhagavantaṃ māretuṃ asakkonto parihīnalābhasakkāro pañca vatthūni yācitvā tāni alabhamāno tehi janaṃ saññāpessāmīti saṅghabhedaṃ katvā sāriputtamoggallānesu parisaṃ ādāya pakkantesu uṇhalohitaṃ mukhena chaḍḍetvā navamāse gilānamañce nipajjitvā vippaṭisārajāto – ‘‘kuhiṃ etarahi satthā vasatī’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘jetavane’’ti vutte mañcakena maṃ āharitvā satthāraṃ dassethāti vatvā āhariyamāno bhagavato dassanārahassa kammassa akatattā jetavane pokkharaṇīsamīpeyeva dvedhā bhinnaṃ pathaviṃ pavisitvā mahāniraye patiṭṭhitoti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārakathānayo khandhake āgato. Āgatattā pana sabbaṃ na vuttanti. Evaṃ ajātoyeva rañño sattu bhavissatīti nemittakehi niddiṭṭhoti ajātasattu.
“韦提希子”是指憍萨罗国国王女儿的儿子,不是毗提诃国王的儿子。不过,“韦提希”这个词其实是“智者”的另一种说法。就像经文里说的:“韦提希女居士”“尊者阿难,韦提希牟尼”。这里的词义是这样:能靠它来了知,所以叫“吠陀”,这是“智慧”的同义词;依靠智慧去行动、去努力、去精勤的人,就叫“韦提希”。韦提希的儿子,就是“韦提希子”。巴利
Vedehiputtoti ayaṃ kosalarañño dhītāya putto, na videharañño. Vedehīti pana paṇḍitādhivacanametaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘vedehikā gahapatānī (ma. ni. 1.226), ayyo ānando vedehamunī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.154). Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – vidanti etenāti vedo, ñāṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vedena īhati ghaṭati vāyamatīti vedehī. Vedehiyā putto vedehiputto.
“那天”是指在那一天、在那个日子里。“伍波萨他”的意思是“在这里近住”,也就是以戒或禁食而安住下来。这里再归纳一下它的含义:在“来吧,贤友咖毕那,我们去伍波萨他吧”这类说法里,伍波萨他指诵巴帝摩卡;在“毗舍佉,像这样具足八支的伍波萨他,就是已受持的伍波萨他”这类说法里,指戒;在“清净者永远春和,清净者永远伍波萨他”这类说法里,指禁食斋戒;在“名叫伍波萨他的龙王”这类说法里,是施设的名称;在“比丘们,不应在伍波萨他日……”这类说法里,指应当行伍波萨他的日子。这里取的正是最后这一种含义。而这个伍波萨他日又分初八、十四、十五三种。为了排除前两种,所以只说“十五”。也正因如此才说:“在这里近住,所以叫伍波萨他。”巴利
Tadahūti tasmiṃ ahu, tasmiṃ divaseti attho. Upavasanti etthāti uposatho, upavasantīti sīlena vā anasanena vā upetā hutvā vasantīti attho. Ayaṃ panettha atthuddhāro – ‘‘āyāmāvuso, kappina, uposathaṃ gamissāmā’’tiādīsu pātimokkhuddeso uposatho. ‘‘Evaṃ aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgato kho, visākhe, uposatho upavuttho’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.43) sīlaṃ. ‘‘Suddhassa ve sadā phaggu, suddhassuposatho sadā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.79) upavāso. ‘‘Uposatho nāma nāgarājā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.246) paññatti . ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, tadahuposathe sabhikkhukā āvāsā’’tiādīsu (mahāva. 181) upavasitabbadivaso. Idhāpi soyeva adhippeto. So panesa aṭṭhamī cātuddasī pannarasībhedena tividho. Tasmā sesadvayanivāraṇatthaṃ pannaraseti vuttaṃ. Teneva vuttaṃ – ‘‘upavasanti etthāti uposatho’’ti.
所谓“拘牟地”,就是白莲盛开的地方。据说那时候白莲开得正盛,因为这里有这些花,所以叫拘牟地。“四月满月”就是四个月的满月,因为它是四个月的终点,所以叫四月满。这里说的就是四月满月这一天。月圆满、季圆满、年圆满,圆圆满满,所以叫“满”。月亮叫做“摩”,它在这个时候圆满了,所以叫“满月”。这样,“在圆满的、在满月的”这两个词的意思,应当按这个来理解。巴利
Komudiyāti kumudavatiyā. Tadā kira kumudāni supupphitāni honti, tāni ettha santīti komudī. Cātumāsiniyāti cātumāsiyā, sā hi catunnaṃ māsānaṃ pariyosānabhūtāti cātumāsī. Idha pana cātumāsinīti vuccati. Māsapuṇṇatāya utupuṇṇatāya saṃvaccharapuṇṇatāya puṇṇā sampuṇṇāti puṇṇā. Mā iti cando vuccati, so ettha puṇṇoti puṇṇamā. Evaṃ puṇṇāya puṇṇamāyāti imasmiṃ padadvaye ca attho veditabbo.
国王被群臣围绕着,意思是:在这个夜晚,四面八方就像被银壶里流出的奶汁冲洗过一样,又像撒满了从银宫殿上飘落的珍珠串、素馨花环、白布和白莲花,还被摆脱了四种污染的满月之光所照亮。国王就在这样的夜晚被大臣们簇拥着。登上最胜高楼,就是登上了那座高楼的上层,坐在一把撑起白色伞盖的贵重金座上。他为什么坐着?为了驱散睡意。原来这位国王自从对父王下手那天起,只要一闭上眼睛想睡,就会像被几百支矛刺中一样,哭喊着惊醒过来。别人问他怎么了,他什么也不说。因此他不喜欢睡觉,就是为了驱散睡意才坐着。另外,那天正好是星宿节。整座城市洒扫干净,撒满细沙,家家门口用五色鲜花、炒米和装满水的罐子装饰起来,到处挂着幢幡彩旗,明亮的灯串把每个方向都照得灿烂辉煌。大街小巷里挤满了欢度星宿节的百姓。所以也有人说,他是因为节日才坐着的。不过,注疏里下了结论说:王家本来天天都像过节一样,但他其实只是为了驱散睡意才坐在那里。巴利
Rājāmaccaparivutoti evarūpāya rajataghaṭaviniggatāhi khīradhārāhi dhoviyamānadisābhāgāya viya, rajatavimānaviccutehi muttāvaḷisumanakusumadāmasetadukūlakumudavisarehi samparikiṇṇāya viya ca, caturupakkilesavimuttapuṇṇacandappabhāsamudayobhāsitāya rattiyā rājāmaccehi parivutoti attho. Uparipāsādavaragatoti pāsādavarassa uparigato. Mahārahe samussitasetacchatte kañcanāsane nisinno hoti. Kasmā nisinno? Niddāvinodanatthaṃ. Ayañhi rājā pitari upakkantadivasato paṭṭhāya – ‘‘niddaṃ okkamissāmī’’ti nimīlitamattesuyeva akkhīsu sattisataabbhāhato viya kandamānoyeva pabujjhi. Kimetanti ca vutte, na kiñcīti vadati. Tenassa amanāpā niddā, iti niddāvinodanatthaṃ nisinno. Api ca tasmiṃ divase nakkhattaṃ saṅghuṭṭhaṃ hoti. Sabbaṃ nagaraṃ sittasammaṭṭhaṃ vippakiṇṇavālukaṃ pañcavaṇṇakusumalājapuṇṇaghaṭapaṭimaṇḍitagharadvāraṃ samussitadhajapaṭākavicitrasamujjalitadīpamālālaṅkatasabbadisābhāgaṃ vīthisabhāgena racchāsabhāgena nakkhattakīḷaṃ anubhavamānena mahājanena samākiṇṇaṃ hoti. Iti nakkhattadivasatāyapi nisinnoti vadanti. Evaṃ pana vatvāpi – ‘‘rājakulassa nāma sadāpi nakkhattameva, niddāvinodanatthaṃyeva panesa nisinno’’ti sanniṭṭhānaṃ kataṃ.
“发出感兴语”意思是:他说出了感慨之语。就像油多到装不进容器里,就会溢流出来,这叫作“溢出”;水多到湖池容纳不下,就会漫溢而出,这叫作“暴流”;同样,当喜悦之语多到心脏承受不住,在内部无法安住,便向外迸发出来,这就叫作“感兴语”。这里的意思是:他说出了这种由喜悦所成的话语。巴利
Udānaṃudānesīti udāhāraṃ udāhari, yathā hi yaṃ telaṃ mānaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, vissanditvā gacchati, taṃ avasekoti vuccati. Yañca jalaṃ taḷākaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, ajjhottharitvā gacchati, taṃ oghoti vuccati; evameva yaṃ pītivacanaṃ hadayaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, adhikaṃ hutvā anto asaṇṭhahitvā bahinikkhamati, taṃ udānanti vuccati. Evarūpaṃ pītimayaṃ vacanaṃ nicchāresīti attho.
所谓“离垢”,是指离开了过失,也就是说远离了云、雾、烟、尘、罗睺这五种染污。因此,“可爱”等五个词是赞叹之语。那月夜确实令大众心生欢喜,所以是“可爱”。因为被远离了上述过失的月光所照耀,所以极其美丽,因此是“美丽”。适合观看,所以是“悦目”。能让心清净生信,所以是“令人净信”。适合作为白昼等时段的特征,所以是“具相”。巴利
Dosināti dosāpagatā, abbhā, mahikā, dhūmo, rajo, rāhūti imehi pañcahi upakkilesehi virahitāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tasmā ramaṇīyātiādīni pañca thomanavacanāni. Sā hi mahājanassa manaṃ ramayatīti ramaṇīyā. Vuttadosavimuttāya candappabhāya obhāsitattā ativiya surūpāti abhirūpā. Dassituṃ yuttāti dassanīyā. Cittaṃ pasādetīti pāsādikā. Divasamāsādīnaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ bhavituṃ yuttāti lakkhaññā.
今天到底该亲近谁呢?该亲近哪位沙门或婆罗门呢?所谓沙门,是因为已经平息了罪恶;所谓婆罗门,是因为已经摒弃了罪恶。我们所亲近者——这句话是在换一种说法表达:我们以向他请教问题的方式去亲近,听了那甘美的法之后,心就会生起净信。就这样,国王用这整句话做了一个暗示性的示意。是对谁做的呢?是对吉瓦咖。是为了什么目的?是为了见到世尊。难道国王不能亲自去拜见世尊吗?是的,不能。为什么?因为他犯有大过。巴利
Kaṃ nu khvajjāti kaṃ nu kho ajja. Samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vāti samitapāpatāya samaṇaṃ. Bāhitapāpatāya brāhmaṇaṃ. Yaṃ no payirupāsatoti vacanabyattayo esa, yaṃ amhākaṃ pañhapucchanavasena payirupāsantānaṃ madhuraṃ dhammaṃ sutvā cittaṃ pasīdeyyāti attho. Iti rājā iminā sabbenapi vacanena obhāsanimittakammaṃ akāsi. Kassa akāsīti? Jīvakassa. Kimatthaṃ? Bhagavato dassanatthaṃ. Kiṃ bhagavantaṃ sayaṃ dassanāya upagantuṃ na sakkotīti? Āma, na sakkoti. Kasmā? Mahāparādhatāya.
所以,世尊的侍者是一位圣弟子,他的父亲被杀了;提婆达多又仗着这一点,对世尊做了很多不利的事。这就是大过错。因为犯了这个大过错,他没法亲自去僧伽大会。可是吉瓦咖是世尊的侍者,国王心想:“我要借着跟在吉瓦咖身后的机会见到世尊。”于是就做了这个光明相的准备。那么,吉瓦咖知不知道“这是对我做的光明相准备”呢?知道。那他为什么沉默不语?为了截断散乱。巴利
Tena hi bhagavato upaṭṭhāko ariyasāvako attano pitā mārito, devadatto ca tameva nissāya bhagavato bahuṃ anatthamakāsi, iti mahāparādho esa, tāya mahāparādhatāya sayaṃ gantuṃ na sakkoti. Jīvako pana bhagavato upaṭṭhāko, tassa piṭṭhichāyāya bhagavantaṃ passissāmīti obhāsanimittakammaṃ akāsi. Kiṃ jīvako pana – ‘‘mayhaṃ idaṃ obhāsanimittakamma’’nti jānātīti? Āma jānāti. Atha kasmā tuṇhī ahosīti? Vikkhepapacchedanatthaṃ.
在那场集会里,六位外道导师的侍从来了很多,他们因为亲近那些没有受过善教的人,自己也没受过善教。一旦我开始讲世尊的功德,他们就会时不时站起来,各自讲自己导师的功德。这样一来,我讲世尊功德就没办法讲到底。而国王如果去接近这些外道师在家的施主们,了解到实情后,就会对他们讲的功德不满意,反过来问我。到那时,我就能毫无干扰地讲世尊的功德,然后把国王带到世尊面前去。耆婆正是因为清楚这一点,为了制止旁人插话打乱,才保持沉默的。巴利
Tassañhi parisati channaṃ satthārānaṃ upaṭṭhākā bahū sannipatitā, te asikkhitānaṃ payirupāsanena sayampi asikkhitāva. Te mayi bhagavato guṇakathaṃ āraddhe antarantarā uṭṭhāyuṭṭhāya attano satthārānaṃ guṇaṃ kathessanti, evaṃ me satthu guṇakathā pariyosānaṃ na gamissati. Rājā pana imesaṃ kulūpake upasaṅkamitvā gahitāsāratāya tesaṃ guṇakathāya anattamano hutvā maṃ paṭipucchissati, athāhaṃ nibbikkhepaṃ satthu guṇaṃ kathetvā rājānaṃ satthu santikaṃ gahetvā gamissāmīti jānantova vikkhepapacchedanatthaṃ tuṇhī ahosīti.
那些大臣也这样想:今天国王用五个词句来赞美夜晚,一定是想去拜访某位沙门或婆罗门,向他提问、听法。他听了法之后,对谁生起信心,就会对那个人做大供养。而谁家有一位常来走动的沙门,这位沙门又成了王室的常客,那对那户人家来说,就是好事。巴利
Tepi amaccā evaṃ cintesuṃ – ‘‘ajja rājā pañcahi padehi rattiṃ thometi, addhā kiñci samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vā upasaṅkamitvā pañhaṃ pucchitvā dhammaṃ sotukāmo, yassa cesa dhammaṃ sutvā pasīdissati, tassa ca mahantaṃ sakkāraṃ karissati, yassa pana kulūpako samaṇo rājakulūpako hoti, bhaddaṃ tassā’’ti.
151-152 他们这样商量后,就开始各自夸赞自己族的沙门,说:“我要先说出我那族亲沙门的功德,然后带着国王一起去,我要去。”因此经文说“这样说时,某位国王的大臣”等等。其中,“布拉纳”是那位自称是导师者的名字,“迦叶”是他的姓。据说,他出生时,正好让某一户人家的奴隶数补满到九十九,所以人们给他取名叫“布拉纳”(补满)。又因为他自称是吉祥者,所以没有人说“这是恶作”,也没有人说他没做过的事。他心想:“我待在这里做什么?”就逃走了。那时,盗贼抢走了他的衣服,他连用树叶或草来遮身都不会,就光着身子进了一个村子。人们看见他,心想:“这位沙门是阿拉汉,少欲知足,没人比得上他。”于是拿着糕饼、饭食等来亲近他。他心想:“我是因为没有衣服穿,才得到这些。”从那时起,即使得到了衣服也不穿,就以这样受持了出家。在他那里,另有五百人也一个接一个地出家了。针对这件事,经文说“布拉纳·咖萨巴”。巴利
151-152. Te evaṃ cintetvā – ‘‘ahaṃ attano kulūpakasamaṇassa vaṇṇaṃ vatvā rājānaṃ gahetvā gamissāmi, ahaṃ gamissāmī’’ti attano attano kulūpakānaṃ vaṇṇaṃ kathetuṃ āraddhā. Tenāha – ‘‘evaṃ vutte aññataro rājāmacco’’tiādi. Tattha pūraṇoti tassa satthupaṭiññassa nāmaṃ. Kassapoti gottaṃ. So kira aññatarassa kulassa ekūnadāsasataṃ pūrayamāno jāto, tenassa pūraṇoti nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Maṅgaladāsattā cassa ‘‘dukkaṭa’’nti vattā natthi, akataṃ vā na katanti. So ‘‘kimahaṃ ettha vasāmī’’ti palāyi. Athassa corā vatthāni acchindiṃsu, so paṇṇena vā tiṇena vā paṭicchādetumpi ajānanto jātarūpeneva ekaṃ gāmaṃ pāvisi. Manussā taṃ disvā ‘‘ayaṃ samaṇo arahā appiccho, natthi iminā sadiso’’ti pūvabhattādīni gahetvā upasaṅkamanti. So – ‘‘mayhaṃ sāṭakaṃ anivatthabhāvena idaṃ uppanna’’nti tato paṭṭhāya sāṭakaṃ labhitvāpi na nivāsesi, tadeva pabbajjaṃ aggahesi, tassa santike aññepi aññepīti pañcasatamanussā pabbajiṃsu. Taṃ sandhāyāha – ‘‘pūraṇo kassapo’’ti.
拥有僧团,所以叫有僧团——这里的“僧团”指出家众组成的团体。拥有那个团体,所以叫有众。因为要教导那个团体的行为规范,所以成为那个团体的导师,叫众导师。Ñāta 就是出名、广为人知。拥有这样的名声——人们传扬说“他少欲、知足,因为少欲,连衣服都不穿”——所以叫有名声。Titthakara 就是创立宗派的人。Sādhusammata 就是被大家公认为“此人是善好的、贤善的、正人君子”。Bahujana 指的是没有听闻正法的愚痴凡夫。从出家那天起,能知道自己已经度过了许多个夜晚,所以叫知夜。出家很久了,所以叫久出家;因为刚出家不久的人,说的话不值得信受,所以说久出家。Addhagata 就是已经走过了很长的路程,意思是已经经历了两位三位国王的更替。Vayoanuppatta 就是已经到达了人生的后期。这两项——久出家与到达晚年——都是针对“年轻人的话不值得信受”这一点而说的。巴利
Pabbajitasamūhasaṅkhāto saṅgho assa atthīti saṅghī. Sveva gaṇo assa atthīti gaṇī. Ācārasikkhāpanavasena tassa gaṇassa ācariyoti gaṇācariyo. Ñātoti paññāto pākaṭo. ‘‘Appiccho santuṭṭho. Appicchatāya vatthampi na nivāsetī’’ti evaṃ samuggato yaso assa atthīti yasassī. Titthakaroti laddhikaro. Sādhusammatoti ayaṃ sādhu, sundaro, sappurisoti evaṃ sammato. Bahujanassāti assutavato andhabālaputhujjanassa. Pabbajitato paṭṭhāya atikkantā bahū rattiyo jānātīti rattaññū. Ciraṃ pabbajitassa assāti cirapabbajito, acirapabbajitassa hi kathā okappanīyā na hoti, tenāha ‘‘cirapabbajito’’ti. Addhagatoti addhānaṃ gato, dve tayo rājaparivaṭṭe atītoti adhippāyo. Vayoanuppattoti pacchimavayaṃ anuppatto. Idaṃ ubhayampi – ‘‘daharassa kathā okappanīyā na hotī’’ti etaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.
他沉默不语。就像一个想吃金黄颜色、味道甘甜如熟芒果的人,却看到放在手里的是又苦又涩的果子一样。国王本来想听与禅那、神通等功德相应、又能印证无常苦无我三相的甘美法谈,可是先前一见到布拉纳就已经不高兴了,现在听到赞叹他的功德,更加不高兴,于是沉默不语。虽然心里不痛快,但他又想:“要是我呵斥他,揪住他的脖子把他赶出去,别人就会害怕,心想‘不管谁说话,国王都会这样处置’,那以后就再也没人敢说什么了。”所以他虽然不喜欢那番话,也只好忍着,一直沉默。接着另一个人心想:“我要来称赞我家亲族的功德。”就开始说了。因此说“又有一位”等等。这之后的一切,都应当按同样的方式理解。巴利
Tuṇhīahosīti suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ madhurarasaṃ ambapakkaṃ khāditukāmo puriso āharitvā hatthe ṭhapitaṃ kājarapakkaṃ disvā viya jhānābhiññādiguṇayuttaṃ tilakkhaṇabbhāhataṃ madhuraṃ dhammakathaṃ sotukāmo pubbe pūraṇassa dassanenāpi anattamano idāni guṇakathāya suṭṭhutaraṃ anattamano hutvā tuṇhī ahosi. Anattamano samānopi pana ‘‘sacāhaṃ etaṃ tajjetvā gīvāyaṃ gahetvā nīharāpessāmi, ‘yo yo kathesi, taṃ taṃ rājā evaṃ karotī’ti bhīto aññopi koci kiñci na kathessatī’’ti amanāpampi taṃ kathaṃ adhivāsetvā tuṇhī eva ahosi. Athañño – ‘‘ahaṃ attano kulūpakassa vaṇṇaṃ kathessāmī’’ti cintetvā vattuṃ ārabhi. Tena vuttaṃ – aññataropi khotiādi. Taṃ sabbaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
这里,玛卡离是他的名字。因为他出生在牛棚里,所以第二个名字叫牛棚生。据说,他曾经在泥泞的地上拿着油罐走路,主人对他说:“孩子,别滑倒!”他因为疏忽滑倒摔了一跤,害怕主人就拔腿逃跑。主人追上去抓住了他的衣角。他扔掉外衣,裸身逃走,成了裸行外道。其余情形和富楼那一样。巴利
Ettha pana makkhalīti tassa nāmaṃ. Gosālāya jātattā gosāloti dutiyaṃ nāmaṃ. Taṃ kira sakaddamāya bhūmiyā telaghaṭaṃ gahetvā gacchantaṃ – ‘‘tāta, mā khalī’’ti sāmiko āha. So pamādena khalitvā patitvā sāmikassa bhayena palāyituṃ āraddho. Sāmiko upadhāvitvā dussakaṇṇe aggahesi. So sāṭakaṃ chaḍḍetvā acelako hutvā palāyi. Sesaṃ pūraṇasadisameva.
153 阿吉达是他的名字。因为披着人发织成的毯子,所以叫“发毯者”。把这两个名字合起来,就称为阿吉达·发毯者。这里说的“发毯”,就是用人的头发编成的毯子。再没有比这更下劣的衣服了。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,譬如一切编织的衣服中,发毯被说为最下劣的。诸比丘,发毯在冷时冰冷,在热时灼热,颜色丑陋,气味恶臭,触之令人痛苦。”(《增支部》3.138)巴利
153.Ajitoti tassa nāmaṃ. Kesakambalaṃ dhāretīti kesakambalo. Iti nāmadvayaṃ saṃsanditvā ajito kesakambaloti vuccati . Tattha kesakambalo nāma manussakesehi katakambalo. Tato paṭikiṭṭhataraṃ vatthaṃ nāma natthi. Yathāha – ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, yāni kānici tantāvutānaṃ vatthānaṃ, kesakambalo tesaṃ paṭikiṭṭho akkhāyati. Kesakambalo, bhikkhave, sīte sīto, uṇhe uṇho, dubbaṇṇo duggandho dukkhasamphasso’’ti (a. ni. 3.138).
154 巴咕特是他的名字,Kaccāyana是他的姓。把名和姓合在一起,就称为巴咕特 Kaccāyana。这个人拒绝用冷水,就算大便之后也不用水清洗,只有找到热水或米汤时才清洗。渡过河或路上的积水之后——心想“我的戒破了”——他堆一个沙堆,重新决意受持戒律,然后继续走。他就是这样一个持有无福报之见解的人。巴利
154.Pakudhoti tassa nāmaṃ. Kaccāyanoti gottaṃ. Iti nāmagottaṃ saṃsanditvā pakudho kaccāyanoti vuccati. Sītudakapaṭikkhittako esa, vaccaṃ katvāpi udakakiccaṃ na karoti, uṇhodakaṃ vā kañjiyaṃ vā labhitvā karoti, nadiṃ vā maggodakaṃ vā atikkamma – ‘‘sīlaṃ me bhinna’’nti vālikathūpaṃ katvā sīlaṃ adhiṭṭhāya gacchati. Evarūpo nissirīkaladdhiko esa.
155 Sañcayo 是他的名字。他是 Belaṭṭha 的儿子,所以叫 Belaṭṭhaputta(贝拉塔之子之子)。巴利
155.Sañcayoti tassa nāmaṃ. Belaṭṭhassa puttoti belaṭṭhaputto.
156 “尼乾陀”这个名称,是因为他们这样宣称而得到的:我们没有结缚烦恼,没有缠缚烦恼,我们是远离烦恼结缚的人。他是那塔的儿子,所以叫那塔子。巴利
156. Amhākaṃ gaṇṭhanakileso palibandhanakileso natthi, kilesagaṇṭharahitā mayanti evaṃvāditāya laddhanāmavasena nigaṇṭho. Nāṭassa putto nāṭaputto.
吉瓦咖童子医故事注释巴利
Komārabhaccajīvakakathāvaṇṇanā
157 那时,国王听了他们的话,心里想:“我不想听谁说话,谁就偏偏说个不停;而我想听谁说话,那个人却像喝了龙毒后呆立着的金翅鸟一样,沉默不语。这对我来说可真是不妙。”接着他又想:“吉瓦咖是已经寂静的佛陀世尊的侍者,他自己也很寂静,所以就像一位具足行仪的比丘那样,只是默然坐着。如果我不先开口,他是不会说的。可是大象踩踏的时候,能抓住的只有大象自己的脚啊。”于是他就主动跟吉瓦咖交谈起来,所以说“那时,国王……”。这里问“为什么沉默?”是在问:因为什么缘故而沉默?这些大臣各自称赞自己家里的僧人,说得滔滔不绝。难道你是因为不像他们那样有自己家里的僧人,所以无话可说吗?难道你是个穷人吗?难道我父王没有赐给你财富和地位吗?还是说,你是个没有信心的人呢?他这样问道。巴利
157.Athakho rājāti rājā kira tesaṃ vacanaṃ sutvā cintesi – ‘‘ahaṃ yassa yassa vacanaṃ na sotukāmo, so so eva kathesi. Yassa panamhi vacanaṃ sotukāmo, esa nāgavasaṃ pivitvā ṭhito supaṇṇo viya tuṇhībhūto, anattho vata me’’ti. Athassa etadahosi – ‘‘jīvako upasantassa buddhassa bhagavato upaṭṭhāko, sayampi upasanto, tasmā vattasampanno bhikkhu viya tuṇhībhūtova nisinno, na esa mayi akathente kathessati, hatthimhi kho pana maddante hatthisseva pādo gahetabbo’’ti tena saddhiṃ sayaṃ mantetumāraddho. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho rājā’’ti. Tattha kiṃ tuṇhīti kena kāraṇena tuṇhī. Imesaṃ amaccānaṃ attano attano kulūpakasamaṇassa vaṇṇaṃ kathentānaṃ mukhaṃ nappahoti . Kiṃ yathā etesaṃ, evaṃ tava kulūpakasamaṇo natthi, kiṃ tvaṃ daliddo, na te mama pitarā issariyaṃ dinnaṃ, udāhu assaddhoti pucchati.
于是吉瓦咖心里想:这位国王是想让我说出我家僧人的功德,现在可不是我保持沉默的时候了。不过,这些大臣都是先礼敬国王,然后坐下来称赞各自家僧的功德。我要是也那样来说导师的功德,那是不合适的。于是他从座位上起身,面向世尊的精舍方向,以五体投地的方式礼拜,然后把十指合拢、闪闪发光的合掌举到头顶,说道:大王,请您不要这样想——这人是随便去亲近某个沙门的。我的导师在入母胎时、从母胎出生时、伟大的出家时、成就正觉时,以及初转法轮时,一万个世界都震动了。他展现了这样的双神变,这样的从天宫下降。大王,我要宣说导师的功德,请您一心专注地听。说完之后,他便说道:大王,这位世尊是阿拉汉、正自觉者……等等。这里的“彼世尊”,是用于表达“如此这般地讲述”的受格,意思是“那个世尊”。“善妙”是指具足善妙的功德,这里说的是最上的意思。“称誉之声”就是指称誉本身,或者指赞叹的声誉。“已高扬”是指已经遍满包括天神的世间而高扬。如何高扬呢?就是通过“彼世尊是阿拉汉、正自觉者……中略……世尊”。巴利
Tato jīvakassa etadahosi – ‘‘ayaṃ rājā maṃ kulūpakasamaṇassa guṇaṃ kathāpeti, na dāni me tuṇhībhāvassa kālo, yathā kho panime rājānaṃ vanditvā nisinnāva attano kulūpakasamaṇānaṃ guṇaṃ kathayiṃsu, na mayhaṃ evaṃ satthuguṇe kathetuṃ yutta’’nti uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavato vihārābhimukho pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā dasanakhasamodhānasamujjalaṃ añjaliṃ sirasi paggahetvā – ‘‘mahārāja, mā maṃ evaṃ cintayittha, ‘ayaṃ yaṃ vā taṃ vā samaṇaṃ upasaṅkamatī’ti, mama satthuno hi mātukucchiokkamane, mātukucchito nikkhamane, mahābhinikkhamane, sambodhiyaṃ, dhammacakkappavattane ca, dasasahassilokadhātu kampittha, evaṃ yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ akāsi, evaṃ devorohaṇaṃ, ahaṃ satthuno guṇe kathayissāmi, ekaggacitto suṇa, mahārājā’’ti vatvā – ‘‘ayaṃ deva, bhagavā arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’tiādimāha. Tattha taṃ kho pana bhagavantanti itthambhūtākhyānatthe upayogavacanaṃ, tassa kho pana bhagavatoti attho. Kalyāṇoti kalyāṇaguṇasamannāgato, seṭṭhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kittisaddoti kittiyeva. Thutighoso vā. Abbhuggatoti sadevakaṃ lokaṃ ajjhottharitvā uggato. Kinti? ‘‘Itipi so bhagavā arahaṃ sammāsambuddho…pe… bhagavā’’ti.
这里句子的连接是这样的:那位世尊,因为这样的原因称为阿拉汉,因为这样的原因称为正自觉者……中略……因为这样的原因称为世尊。也就是说,是由于这些原因。其中,因为远离了烦恼敌,因为摧毁了烦恼辐,因为值得领受资具等供养,因为在造作恶行时没有任何隐匿,基于这些原因,那位世尊应被了知为阿拉汉。像这样先把纲目列出来,而所有这些词句的详细解释,在《清净道论》的佛随念解说中已经详细说明了,所以应当从那里了解它们的详细内容。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ padasambandho – so bhagavā itipi arahaṃ itipi sammāsambuddho…pe… itipi bhagavāti. Iminā ca iminā ca kāraṇenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha ārakattā arīnaṃ, arānañca hatattā, paccayādīnaṃ arahattā, pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvāti, imehi tāva kāraṇehi so bhagavā arahanti veditabbotiādinā nayena mātikaṃ nikkhipitvā sabbāneva cetāni padāni visuddhimagge buddhānussatiniddese vitthāritānīti tato nesaṃ vitthāro gahetabbo.
吉瓦咖把每个词的含义逐一解释清楚后,说道:“大王,我的导师就是这样一位阿拉汉,就是这样一位正自觉者……乃至……就是这样一位世尊。”接着他又说:“大王,请您去亲近世尊吧。也许大王在亲近世尊时,心会变得清净信乐。”在这里,他说“请大王去亲近他”的时候,也是在表达这个意思:“大王,像您这样的人,就算由一百人、一千人、十万人围着来提问,我的导师也有力量和本事把握所有人的心为他们说法。大王您就放心地去亲近、去提问吧。”巴利
Jīvako pana ekamekassa padassa atthaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā – ‘‘evaṃ, mahārāja, arahaṃ mayhaṃ satthā, evaṃ sammāsambuddho…pe… evaṃ bhagavā’’ti vatvā – ‘‘taṃ, devo, bhagavantaṃ payirupāsatu, appeva nāma devassa taṃ bhagavantaṃ payirupāsato cittaṃ pasīdeyyā’’ti āha. Ettha ca taṃ devo payirupāsatūti vadanto ‘‘mahārāja, tumhādisānañhi satenapi sahassenapi satasahassenapi puṭṭhassa mayhaṃ satthuno sabbesaṃ cittaṃ gahetvā kathetuṃ thāmo ca balañca atthi, vissattho upasaṅkamitvā puccheyyāsi mahārājā’’ti āha.
国王听着世尊功德的讲述,全身被五色喜悦不间断地充满。他当下就想前去,心里盘算:这个时候我要去十力尊那里,除了吉瓦咖,恐怕没有别人能这么快把车乘准备好。于是他说:那么,亲爱的吉瓦咖,去把象车准备好吧。巴利
Raññopi bhagavato guṇakathaṃ suṇantassa sakalasarīraṃ pañcavaṇṇāya pītiyā nirantaraṃ phuṭaṃ ahosi. So taṅkhaṇaññeva gantukāmo hutvā – ‘‘imāya kho pana velāya mayhaṃ dasabalassa santikaṃ gacchato na añño koci khippaṃ yānāni yojetuṃ sakkhissati aññatra jīvakā’’ti cintetvā – ‘‘tena hi, samma jīvaka, hatthiyānāni kappāpehī’’ti āha.
158 这里,“那么”是一个表示催促的语气词。意思就是:“去吧,亲爱的吉瓦咖。”所谓“象车”,是说虽然当时有马、车等各种车乘,但象车最为上等;要去最上等的人那里,就应该乘坐最上等的车乘前往。而且马、车等车乘会发出声响,很远就能听到它们的声音,而即使紧随象车足迹而行的人也听不到象车的声音。他又想到,要去已彻底寂灭的世尊那里,也应该乘坐同样寂静无喧哗的车乘。这样思惟之后,他说了“象车”。巴利
158. Tattha tena hīti uyyojanatthe nipāto. Gaccha, samma jīvakāti vuttaṃ hoti. Hatthiyānānīti anekesu assarathādīsu yānesu vijjamānesupi hatthiyānaṃ uttamaṃ; uttamassa santikaṃ uttamayāneneva gantabbanti ca, assayānarathayānāni sasaddāni, dūratova tesaṃ saddo suyyati, hatthiyānassa padānupadaṃ gacchantāpi saddaṃ na suṇanti. Nibbutassa pana kho bhagavato santike nibbuteheva yānehi gantabbanti ca cintayitvā hatthiyānānīti āha.
五百头母象,就是五百头雌象。让人备办,就是让人把它们准备成适合骑乘的样子。适合骑乘,就是能够骑上去,意思是可以跨坐上去。那么,这件事是国王吩咐他做的,还是没吩咐他就做的呢?国王没有吩咐。为什么?因为他有智慧。据说他心里这样想:国王说“我现在就出发”,可是国王向来有很多敌人。万一路上出了什么意外,人们也会责备我:“吉瓦咖心想‘国王采纳我的话’,即使不是时候也带着国王出发。”他们也会责备世尊:“沙门乔达摩,只因为有人谈到自己,就不看时机是否合适而说法。”所以,我要做到既不让我和世尊受到责备,又能把对国王的守护安排妥当。巴利
Pañcamattāni hatthinikāsatānīti pañca kareṇusatāni. Kappāpetvāti ārohaṇasajjāni kāretvā. Ārohaṇīyanti ārohaṇayoggaṃ, opaguyhanti attho. Kiṃ panesa raññā vuttaṃ akāsi avuttanti? Avuttaṃ. Kasmā? Paṇḍitatāya. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – rājā imāya velāya gacchāmīti vadati, rājāno ca nāma bahupaccatthikā. Sace antarāmagge koci antarāyo hoti, mampi garahissanti – ‘‘jīvako rājā me kathaṃ gaṇhātīti akālepi rājānaṃ gahetvā nikkhamatī’’ti. Bhagavantampi garahissanti ‘‘samaṇo gotamo, ‘mayhaṃ kathā vattatī’ti kālaṃ asallakkhetvāva dhammaṃ kathetī’’ti. Tasmā yathā neva mayhaṃ, na bhagavato, garahā uppajjati; rañño ca rakkhā susaṃvihitā hoti, tathā karissāmī’’ti.
从此,依靠女人,男子就没有什么可害怕的。他想:“我可以安稳地被女人围绕着前去。”于是让人备好五百头母象,又让五百个女人换上男装,对她们说:“你们手持刀剑和长矛,围在国王身边护卫。”说完,他又想:“这位国王在这一生这个身体里,并没有证得道果的因缘,而诸佛总是看到因缘成熟才说法。不如我来召集大众,这样一来,导师一定会因为其中某人的因缘而说法,那就能利益大众了。”于是他派人到各处传达命令,击鼓宣告:“今天国王要前往世尊那里,所有人都应各随自己的能力,来担任国王的护卫。”巴利
Tato itthiyo nissāya purisānaṃ bhayaṃ nāma natthi, ‘sukhaṃ itthiparivuto gamissāmī’ti pañca hatthinikāsatāni kappāpetvā pañca itthisatāni purisavesaṃ gāhāpetvā – ‘‘asitomarahatthā rājānaṃ parivāreyyāthā’’ti vatvā puna cintesi – ‘‘imassa rañño imasmiṃ attabhāve maggaphalānaṃ upanissayo natthi, buddhā ca nāma upanissayaṃ disvāva dhammaṃ kathenti. Handāhaṃ, mahājanaṃ sannipātāpemi, evañhi sati satthā kassacideva upanissayena dhammaṃ desessati, sā mahājanassa upakārāya bhavissatī’’ti. So tattha tattha sāsanaṃ pesesi, bheriṃ carāpesi – ‘‘ajja rājā bhagavato santikaṃ gacchati, sabbe attano vibhavānurūpena rañño ārakkhaṃ gaṇhantū’’ti.
听到这话,大众心想:“听说国王是要去拜见导师,那会是一场多么殊胜的说法啊!我们还参加什么星宿节庆典呢?我们也去那里吧。”于是所有人都带着香、花环等物品,站在路上,盼着国王到来。吉瓦咖也向国王禀报说:“大王,象车已经准备好了,现在您看什么时候合适就出发吧。”这里“现在您看什么时候合适”是一句客气话。实际意思是:“您吩咐的事,我已经办好了,现在去还是不去,您就按自己的心意决定吧。”巴利
Tato mahājano cintesi – ‘‘rājā kira satthudassanatthaṃ gacchati, kīdisī vata bho dhammadesanā bhavissati, kiṃ no nakkhattakīḷāya, tattheva gamissāmā’’ti. Sabbe gandhamālādīni gahetvā rañño āgamanaṃ ākaṅkhamānā magge aṭṭhaṃsu. Jīvakopi rañño paṭivedesi – ‘‘kappitāni kho te, deva, hatthiyānāni, yassa dāni kālaṃ maññasī’’ti. Tattha yassa dāni kālaṃ maññasīti upacāravacanametaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘yaṃ tayā āṇattaṃ, taṃ mayā kataṃ, idāni tvaṃ yassa gamanassa vā agamanassa vā kālaṃ maññasi, tadeva attano ruciyā karohī’’ti.
159 “各别的妇女”,就是各自分开的妇女,意思是每一头母象配一位妇女。“当火炬被举着的时候”,是说手持的火炬正被举着的时候。“以广大的王威”,就是以极大的国王威势。巴利文也写作 mahaccā,意思是“广大”,这只是语法上性别的变化。所谓“王威”,说的就是国王的威德势力。那么他的王威是什么呢?就是统辖三百由旬、两个大国的自在与荣光。因为即使没有事先安排说“某天国王要去拜见如来”,就在那一刻,五百名妇女当即换上男装,系好头巾,肩上挂着剑,手持镶宝的长矛,就出发了。针对这个情景才说:“让各别的妇女乘上……”巴利
159.Paccekā itthiyoti pāṭiyekkā itthiyo, ekekissā hatthiniyā ekekaṃ itthinti vuttaṃ hoti. Ukkāsu dhāriyamānāsūti daṇḍadīpikāsu dhāriyamānāsu. Mahacca rājānubhāvenāti mahatā rājānubhāvena. Mahaccātipi pāḷi, mahatiyāti attho, liṅgavipariyāyo esa. Rājānubhāvo vuccati rājiddhi. Kā panassa rājiddhi? Tiyojanasatānaṃ dvinnaṃ mahāraṭṭhānaṃ issariyasirī. Tassa hi asukadivasaṃ rājā tathāgataṃ upasaṅkamissatīti paṭhamataraṃ saṃvidahane asatipi taṅkhaṇaññeva pañca itthisatāni purisavesaṃ gahetvā paṭimukkaveṭhanāni aṃse āsattakhaggāni maṇidaṇḍatomare gahetvā nikkhamiṃsu. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘paccekā itthiyo āropetvā’’ti.
另外,还有一万六千名刹帝利舞女和歌女围绕在国王身边。在她们的外围,是侏儒、矮个子和山林土著等人。在他们外围,是后宫那些值得信赖的守卫。在他们外围,是大约六万名穿着华丽、姿态优雅的大臣。在他们外围,是大约九万名王族子弟,佩戴着各种装饰,手持种种武器,看起来像年轻的持明者一样。在他们外围,是大约一万名婆罗门,穿着价值百金的衣服,把价值五百金的衣料搭在一侧肩上,沐浴干净,涂好香料,佩戴着金项链等各种饰物,举起右手,高声欢呼着胜利,一路前行。在他们外围,是五种乐器组成的乐队。在他们外围,是弓箭手排成的防卫圈。在弓箭手外围,是一群群大象。在大象外围,是马匹互相脖颈相碰地并行。在马匹外围,是车辆彼此碰撞。在车辆外围,是战士们挥臂互相击打。在他们外围,是十八种军队,各自凭借与自身相称的装饰显得光彩夺目。就像这样,即使有人站在最外围射箭,箭也射不到国王;吉瓦咖童子也是这样安排好国王的随行队伍后,自己走在离国王不远的地方——心想:“万一有什么危险,我要第一个献出生命来保护国王。”至于那些火炬,到底有几百支还是几千支,并没有明确的数目。正是针对这样的国王威势,才说:“以广大的王威,前往吉瓦咖童子的芒果园。”巴利
Aparāpi soḷasasahassakhattiyanāṭakitthiyo rājānaṃ parivāresuṃ. Tāsaṃ pariyante khujjavāmanakakirātādayo. Tāsaṃ pariyante antepurapālakā vissāsikapurisā. Tesaṃ pariyante vicitravesavilāsino saṭṭhisahassamattā mahāmattā. Tesaṃ pariyante vividhālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍitā nānappakāraāvudhahatthā vijjādharataruṇā viya navutisahassamattā raṭṭhiyaputtā. Tesaṃ pariyante satagghanikāni nivāsetvā pañcasatagghanikāni ekaṃsaṃ katvā sunhātā suvilittā kañcanamālādinānābharaṇasobhitā dasasahassamattā brāhmaṇā dakkhiṇahatthaṃ ussāpetvā jayasaddaṃ ghosantā gacchanti. Tesaṃ pariyante pañcaṅgikāni tūriyāni. Tesaṃ pariyante dhanupantiparikkhepo. Tassa pariyante hatthighaṭā. Hatthīnaṃ pariyante gīvāya gīvaṃ paharamānā assapanti. Assapariyante aññamaññaṃ saṅghaṭṭanarathā. Rathapariyante bāhāya bāhaṃ paharayamānā yodhā. Tesaṃ pariyante attano attano anurūpāya ābharaṇasampattiyā virocamānā aṭṭhārasa seniyo. Iti yathā pariyante ṭhatvā khitto saro rājānaṃ na pāpuṇāti, evaṃ jīvako komārabhacco rañño parisaṃ saṃvidahitvā attanā rañño avidūreneva gacchati – ‘‘sace koci upaddavo hoti, paṭhamatara rañño jīvitadānaṃ dassāmī’’ti. Ukkānaṃ pana ettakāni satāni vā sahassāni vāti paricchedo natthīti evarūpiṃ rājiddhiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘mahaccarājānubhāvena yena jīvakassa komārabhaccassa ambavanaṃ, tena pāyāsī’’ti.
“曾有这样的怖畏”这句话里,怖畏有四种:心的惊悚怖畏、智怖畏、所缘怖畏、愧怖畏。其中,像“缘于生而有恐怖恐惧”这类说法所讲的,就是心的惊悚怖畏;像“那些众生听闻如来说法之后,大多数生起怖畏、悚惧与惊怖”这段经文所讲的,就是智怖畏;像“这想必就是那种怖畏恐惧降临了”这里所说的,就是所缘怖畏。巴利
Ahudeva bhayanti ettha cittutrāsabhayaṃ, ñāṇabhayaṃ, ārammaṇabhayaṃ, ottappabhayanti catubbidhaṃ bhayaṃ, tattha ‘‘jātiṃ paṭicca bhayaṃ bhayānaka’’ntiādinā nayena vuttaṃ cittutrāsabhayaṃ nāma. ‘‘Tepi tathāgatassa dhammadesanaṃ sutvā yebhuyyena bhayaṃ saṃvegaṃ santāsaṃ āpajjantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.78) evamāgataṃ ñāṇabhayaṃ nāma. ‘‘Etaṃ nūna taṃ bhayabheravaṃ āgacchatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.49) ettha vuttaṃ ārammaṇabhayaṃ nāma.
“ 怯者受称赞,于此无勇者;
善人因怖畏,故不造诸恶。”巴利
‘‘Bhīruṃ pasaṃsanti, na hi tattha sūraṃ; Bhayā hi santo, na karonti pāpa’’nti . (saṃ. ni. 1.33);
这叫做“愧怖畏”。在这些怖畏当中,这里说的是“心惊怖畏”,意思是“有了、曾有了”。惊悚就是惊悚的状态,意思是全身颤抖。毛发竖立就是令毛发竖立,意思是毛发向上竖起。不过这种毛发竖立,在听闻正法等生起喜悦的时候,也会因为喜悦而出现;对于生性胆怯的人,在遭到殴打、见到夜叉等时候,也会因为怖畏而出现。这里应当理解为由怖畏所引起的毛发竖立。巴利
Idaṃ ottappabhayaṃ nāma. Tesu idha cittutrāsabhayaṃ, ahu ahosīti attho. Chambhitattanti chambhitassa bhāvo. Sakalasarīracalananti attho. Lomahaṃsoti lomahaṃsanaṃ, uddhaṃ ṭhitalomatāti attho. So panāyaṃ lomahaṃso dhammassavanādīsu pītiuppattikāle pītiyāpi hoti . Bhīrukajātikānaṃ sampahārapisācādidassanesu bhayenāpi. Idha bhayalomahaṃsoti veditabbo.
那为什么他会害怕呢?有人说是由于黑暗。据说王舍城有三十二座大城门、六十四座小城门,吉瓦咖的芒果园位于城墙和灵鹫山之间。他从东门出去,进入了山的阴影中。在那里,山顶遮住了月亮,山影和树影交叠,于是一片漆黑。但这种说法也站不住脚,因为当时有成千上万的火炬,根本数不清,哪里有什么黑暗。巴利
Kasmā panesa bhītoti? Andhakārenāti eke vadanti. Rājagahe kira dvattiṃsa mahādvārāni, catusaṭṭhi khuddakadvārāni. Jīvakassa ambavanaṃ pākārassa ca gijjhakūṭassa ca antarā hoti. So pācīnadvārena nikkhamitvā pabbatacchāyāya pāvisi, tattha pabbatakūṭena cando chādito, pabbatacchāyāya ca rukkhacchāyāya ca andhakāraṃ ahosīti, tampi akāraṇaṃ. Tadā hi ukkānaṃ satasahassānampi paricchedo natthi.
这位国王却因为周围太安静,对吉瓦咖起了疑心,害怕起来。据说吉瓦咖曾在高楼上对他说过:“大王,世尊喜欢安静,应该安安静静地去见他。”所以国王就禁止了乐器声。那些乐器只是拿在手里而已,侍从们也不高声说话,只用手势示意,静悄悄地走。芒果园里连一声喷嚏的声音都听不到。国王们天生就喜欢热闹声响,他因为这片寂静而感到不安,对吉瓦咖也起了疑心,心想:“这个吉瓦咖在我的芒果园里安排了一千二百五十位比丘,可这里连一声喷嚏声都听不到,恐怕不是真的吧。这家伙想骗我出城,在前面埋伏军队,把我抓住,然后自己撑起伞盖当国王。他可是有相当于五头大象的力气,又紧挨着我走,而我身边连一个拿武器的士兵都没有。哎呀,我这下可要遭殃了。”他这样害怕之后,却又没法装作不害怕,就把自己害怕的样子暴露了出来。因此经文说:“那时,国王……没有声响。”其中,“sammā”是朋友之间的称呼,意思是:“朋友,你不会骗我吧?”“不欺骗”是说:“你不会把没有的事说成有,来骗我吧?”“人声”是指交谈的声音。巴利
Ayaṃ pana appasaddataṃ nissāya jīvake āsaṅkāya bhīto. Jīvako kirassa uparipāsādeyeva ārocesi – ‘‘mahārāja appasaddakāmo bhagavā, appasaddeneva upasaṅkamitabbo’’ti. Tasmā rājā tūriyasaddaṃ nivāresi. Tūriyāni kevalaṃ gahitamattāneva honti, vācampi uccaṃ anicchārayamānā accharāsaññāya gacchanti. Ambavanepi kassaci khipitasaddopi na suyyati. Rājāno ca nāma saddābhiratā honti. So taṃ appasaddataṃ nissāya ukkaṇṭhito jīvakepi āsaṅkaṃ uppādesi. ‘‘Ayaṃ jīvako mayhaṃ ambavane aḍḍhateḷasāni bhikkhusatānī’’ti āha. Ettha ca khipitasaddamattampi na suyyati, abhūtaṃ maññe, esa vañcetvā maṃ nagarato nīharitvā purato balakāyaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā maṃ gaṇhitvā attanā chattaṃ ussāpetukāmo. Ayañhi pañcannaṃ hatthīnaṃ balaṃ dhāreti. Mama ca avidūreneva gacchati, santike ca me āvudhahattho ekapurisopi natthi. Aho vata me anattho’’ti. Evaṃ bhāyitvā ca pana abhīto viya sandhāretumpi nāsakkhi. Attano bhītabhāvaṃ tassa āvi akāsi. Tena vuttaṃ. ‘‘Atha kho rājā…pe… na nigghoso’’ti. Tattha sammāti vayassābhilāpo esa, kacci maṃ vayassāti vuttaṃ hoti. Na palambhesīti yaṃ natthi taṃ atthīti vatvā kacci maṃ na vippalambhayasi. Nigghosoti kathāsallāpanigghoso.
“别怕,大王!”吉瓦咖心想:“这位国王不了解我,不知道‘这个人不会夺人性命’。可是,如果我不安慰他,他可能会垮掉。”于是先让自己镇定下来,安慰他说:“别怕,大王!”接着又说:“陛下,不会的……”等等。“往前走”意思是朝前面走,也就是进去。因为只说一遍还不够让他安心,所以他又急忙说了两遍。“这些圆亭里的灯在燃烧”——大王,贼众是不会点着灯待在那里的,而这些圆亭里的灯却亮着。他就是凭着这灯火的迹象,对大王说“请往前走”。巴利
Mā bhāyi, mahārājāti jīvako – ‘‘ayaṃ rājā maṃ na jānāti ‘nāyaṃ paraṃ jīvitā voropetī’ti; sace kho pana naṃ na assāsessāmi, vinasseyyā’’ti cintayitvā daḷhaṃ katvā samassāsento ‘‘mā bhāyi mahārājā’’ti vatvā ‘‘na taṃ devā’’tiādimāha. Abhikkamāti abhimukho kama gaccha, pavisāti attho. Sakiṃ vutte pana daḷhaṃ na hotīti taramānova dvikkhattuṃ āha. Ete maṇḍalamāḷe dīpā jhāyantīti mahārāja, corabalaṃ nāma na dīpe jāletvā tiṭṭhati, ete ca maṇḍalamāḷe dīpā jalanti. Etāya dīpasaññāya yāhi mahārājāti vadati.
沙门果问的注释巴利
Sāmaññaphalapucchāvaṇṇanā
160 “象地”是指可以骑着大象走过去的地方,这就叫象地。“大象下来”是指在精舍外门的门楼那里从象背上下来。可就在双脚站到地面的同一时刻,世尊的威光就遍及了国王的身体。他顿时全身冒汗,衣服变得像是需要拧干并脱掉一样。他想起自己的罪过,生起了极大的恐惧。他没法径直走到世尊面前,就抓住吉瓦咖的手,像在园林里游览一样,一边夸赞精舍说:“吉瓦咖朋友,这做得真好,这做得真好!”就这样一步一步地来到了圆亭门口。巴利
160.Nāgassa bhūmīti yattha sakkā hatthiṃ abhirūḷhena gantuṃ, ayaṃ nāgassa bhūmi nāma. Nāgā paccorohitvāti vihārassa bahidvārakoṭṭhake hatthito orohitvā. Bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhitasamakālameva pana bhagavato tejo rañño sarīraṃ phari. Athassa tāvadeva sakalasarīrato sedā mucciṃsu, sāṭakā pīḷetvā apanetabbā viya ahesuṃ. Attano aparādhaṃ saritvā mahābhayaṃ uppajji. So ujukaṃ bhagavato santikaṃ gantuṃ asakkonto jīvakaṃ hatthe gahetvā ārāmacārikaṃ caramāno viya ‘‘idaṃ te samma jīvaka suṭṭhu kāritaṃ idaṃ suṭṭhu kārita’’nti vihārassa vaṇṇaṃ bhaṇamāno anukkamena yena maṇḍalamāḷassa dvāraṃ tenupasaṅkami, sampattoti attho.
“那么,在哪里呢?”他为什么这样问?有些人说:“因为不认识。”据说,他小时候曾跟着父亲来见过世尊,但后来因为结交恶友,杀了父亲,又派刺客行刺,还放出了财护象象,犯下大罪,从此再没到过世尊面前,所以现在认不出来,才有此一问。这种说法并不合理。世尊具足种种殊胜相,又有随形好庄严,放出六色光明,照亮整个园林;他就像被群星围绕的满月那样,被比丘僧团环绕着坐在圆亭中央——这样的人,谁会认不出来呢?其实国王只是依着自己的威势在发问。王族本来就有这种习惯,明明知道却装作不知道来问。吉瓦咖听了之后想:“这位国王站在大地上问‘大地在哪里’,抬头看天问‘日月在哪里’,站在须弥山脚下问‘须弥山在哪里’,同样,他站在十力尊者面前却问‘世尊在哪里’。好吧,我来给他指出世尊。”于是朝世尊合掌致敬,说:“大王,那位就是。”等等。“在前”是指:坐在僧团围绕的世尊跟前。巴利
Kahaṃ pana sammāti kasmā pucchīti. Eke tāva ‘‘ajānanto’’ti vadanti. Iminā kira daharakāle pitarā saddhiṃ āgamma bhagavā diṭṭhapubbo, pacchā pana pāpamittasaṃsaggena pitughātaṃ katvā abhimāre pesetvā dhanapālaṃ muñcāpetvā mahāparādho hutvā bhagavato sammukhībhāvaṃ na upagatapubboti asañjānanto pucchatīti. Taṃ akāraṇaṃ, bhagavā hi ākiṇṇavaralakkhaṇo anubyañjanapaṭimaṇḍito chabbaṇṇāhi rasmīhi sakalaṃ ārāmaṃ obhāsetvā tārāgaṇaparivuto viya puṇṇacando bhikkhugaṇaparivuto maṇḍalamāḷamajjhe nisinno, taṃ ko na jāneyya. Ayaṃ pana attano issariyalīlāya pucchati. Pakati hesā rājakulānaṃ, yaṃ jānantāpi ajānantā viya pucchanti. Jīvako pana taṃ sutvā – ‘ayaṃ rājā pathaviyaṃ ṭhatvā kuhiṃ pathavīti, nabhaṃ ulloketvā kuhiṃ candimasūriyāti, sinerumūle ṭhatvā kuhiṃ sinerūti vadamāno viya dasabalassa purato ṭhatvā kuhiṃ bhagavā’ti pucchati. ‘‘Handassa bhagavantaṃ dassessāmī’’ti cintetvā yena bhagavā tenañjaliṃ paṇāmetvā ‘‘eso mahārājā’’tiādimāha. Purakkhatoti parivāretvā nisinnassa purato nisinno.
161 “前往世尊那里”意思是:世尊在哪里,他就去到那里,也就是来到世尊跟前。“站在一边”意思是:不碰到世尊或比丘僧团,在一个适合自己站立的地方,顶礼世尊之后,独自站着。“默然,默然”意思是:他往哪里看,哪里都是一片默然。因为在那里,连一位比丘动手动脚或发出声响都没有,对那位饰以一切庄严、有舞女眷属陪伴、站在世尊面前的国王或国王的随从,连一位比丘也没有去看。所有比丘都只是注视着世尊而坐。巴利
161.Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti yattha bhagavā tattha gato, bhagavato santikaṃ upagatoti attho. Ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsīti bhagavantaṃ vā bhikkhusaṃghaṃ vā asaṅghaṭṭayamāno attano ṭhātuṃ anucchavike ekasmiṃ padese bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā ekova aṭṭhāsi. Tuṇhībhūtaṃ tuṇhībhūtanti yato yato anuviloketi, tato tato tuṇhībhūtamevāti attho. Tattha hi ekabhikkhussapi hatthakukkuccaṃ vā pādakukkuccaṃ vā khipitasaddo vā natthi, sabbālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ nāṭakaparivāraṃ bhagavato abhimukhe ṭhitaṃ rājānaṃ vā rājaparisaṃ vā ekabhikkhupi na olokesi. Sabbe bhagavantaṃyeva olokayamānā nisīdiṃsu.
国王对僧团的寂静生起净信,看着这诸根寂静的比丘僧团,就像看着一片没有污泥、清澈明净的湖水,便一次又一次地注视,发出感叹。这里说的“以此”,是指僧团通过身、语、意三方面的戒行寂静而得以寂静,就是以此寂静之义。他并不是因为想着“啊,但愿我儿子出家后也能像这些比丘一样寂静”才这样说。他是见到僧团后生起净信,因而忆念起自己的儿子。世间人得到难得之物,或者见到稀奇之事时,自然会忆念起亲爱的亲人、朋友等人。所以他是见到僧团后,在忆念儿子时这样说的。巴利
Rājā tesaṃ upasame pasīditvā vigatapaṅkatāya vippasannarahadamiva upasantindriyaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ punappunaṃ anuviloketvā udānaṃ udānesi. Tattha imināti yena kāyikena ca vācasikena ca mānasikena ca sīlūpasamena bhikkhusaṅgho upasanto, iminā upasamenāti dīpeti. Tattha ‘‘aho vata me putto pabbajitvā ime bhikkhū viya upasanto bhaveyyā’’ti nayidaṃ sandhāya esa evamāha. Ayaṃ pana bhikkhusaṅghaṃ disvā pasanno puttaṃ anussari. Dullabhañhi laddhā acchariyaṃ vā disvā piyānaṃ ñātimittādīnaṃ anussaraṇaṃ nāma lokassa pakatiyeva. Iti bhikkhusaṅghaṃ disvā puttaṃ anussaramāno esa evamāha.
不过,他是因为对儿子心存疑虑,又希望儿子能得到这种寂静,才这样说的。据说他心里想:我儿子会问:“我父亲还年轻,我祖父在哪里?”等他听说“你父亲把他杀了”,就会想:“我也要杀了父亲,自己来当国王。”正是出于对儿子的疑虑,又希望他能得到这种寂静,他才这样说。可是,尽管他这样说,儿子终究还是会杀他。因为在这个王族里,杀父的事已经连续发生了五代:阿阇世杀了频婆娑罗,伍达亚杀了阿阇世;伍达亚的儿子大矛杀了伍达亚;大矛的儿子阿那律杀了大矛;阿那律的儿子龙奴杀了阿那律。而国人对龙奴很愤怒,说:“这些都是断绝王统的国王,留着他们有什么用?”就把他杀了。巴利
Api ca putte āsaṅkāya tassa upasamaṃ icchamāno pesa evamāha. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi, putto me pucchissati – ‘‘mayhaṃ pitā daharo. Ayyako me kuhi’’nti. So ‘‘pitarā te ghātito’’ti sutvā ‘‘ahampi pitaraṃ ghātetvā rajjaṃ kāressāmī’’ti maññissati. Iti putte āsaṅkāya tassa upasamaṃ icchamāno pesa evamāha. Kiñcāpi hi esa evamāha. Atha kho naṃ putto ghātessatiyeva. Tasmiñhi vaṃse pituvadho pañcaparivaṭṭe gato. Ajātasattu bimbisāraṃ ghātesi, udayo ajātasattuṃ . Tassa putto mahāmuṇḍiko nāma udayaṃ. Tassa putto anuruddho nāma mahāmuṇḍikaṃ. Tassa putto nāgadāso nāma anuruddhaṃ. Nāgadāsaṃ pana – ‘‘vaṃsacchedakarājāno ime, kiṃ imehī’’ti raṭṭhavāsino kupitā ghātesuṃ.
世尊为什么这样说:“你确实去了”呢?据说,世尊在国王还没开口之前就这样想:“这位国王来了以后,默默无言地站着,他到底在想什么呢?”然后世尊知道了他的心念:“他没办法跟我交谈,就环视比丘僧团,想起了儿子。如果我不先开口,他什么话也说不出来。那我就跟他交谈吧。”所以,在国王说完话之后,世尊接着说:“大王,你确实随着心中的爱念去了。”这句话的意思是:大王,就像落在高处的雨水往低处流一样,你也是这样,环视比丘僧团之后,就随着心中的爱念去了。巴利
Agamā kho tvanti kasmā evamāha? Bhagavā kira rañño vacībhede akateyeva cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ rājā āgantvā tuṇhī niravo ṭhito, kiṃ nu kho cintesī’’ti. Athassa cittaṃ ñatvā – ‘‘ayaṃ mayā saddhiṃ sallapituṃ asakkonto bhikkhusaṅghaṃ anuviloketvā puttaṃ anussari, na kho panāyaṃ mayi anālapante kiñci kathetuṃ sakkhissati, karomi tena saddhiṃ kathāsallāpa’’nti. Tasmā rañño vacanānantaraṃ ‘‘agamā kho tvaṃ, mahārāja, yathāpema’’nti āha. Tassattho – mahārāja, yathā nāma unname vuṭṭhaṃ udakaṃ yena ninnaṃ tena gacchati, evameva tvaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ anuviloketvā yena pemaṃ tena gatoti.
这时国王心里想:“真是稀有啊,佛陀的功德!像我这样对世尊犯下重罪的人,恐怕再也找不出第二个了。我害死了世尊最得力的侍者,又听信提婆达多的话派刺客去行刺,还放出了那喇吉利象,正是因为我的缘故,提婆达多才扔下滚石。我犯了这么大的罪过,十力者面对我开口说话时,竟然毫无嫌恶。啊,世尊以五种方式安住在无恼害的境界中,真是善巧安立。我怎么能舍弃这样的导师,到外面去寻求依靠呢?”他这样想着,心中生起欢喜,便开口对世尊说:“尊者,我所亲爱的……”等等。巴利
Atha rañño etadahosi – ‘‘aho acchariyā buddhaguṇā, mayā sadiso bhagavato aparādhakārako nāma natthi, mayā hissa aggupaṭṭhāko ghātito, devadattassa ca kathaṃ gahetvā abhimārā pesitā, nāḷāgiri mutto, maṃ nissāya devadattena silā paviddhā, evaṃ mahāparādhaṃ nāma maṃ ālapato dasabalassa mukhaṃ nappahoti; aho bhagavā pañcahākārehi tādilakkhaṇe suppatiṭṭhito. Evarūpaṃ nāma satthāraṃ pahāya bahiddhā na pariyesissāmā’’ti so somanassajāto bhagavantaṃ ālapanto ‘‘piyo me, bhante’’tiādimāha.
162 他向比丘僧团合掌,意思是:据说他当时这样想:“如果我先礼敬世尊,然后又走到这边那边去礼敬比丘僧团,那世尊就被留在身后了,这样做也不恭敬。就好比先礼敬了国王,再去礼敬副王,那就等于对国王不敬了。”所以,他礼敬世尊之后,就站在原地向比丘僧团合掌,然后坐到一边。某个地方,就是某个角落。巴利
162.Bhikkhusaṅghassaañjaliṃ paṇāmetvāti evaṃ kirassa ahosi bhagavantaṃ vanditvā itocito ca gantvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ vandantena ca bhagavā piṭṭhito kātabbo hoti, garukāropi cesa na hoti. Rājānaṃ vanditvā uparājānaṃ vandantenapi hi rañño agāravo kato hoti. Tasmā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā ṭhitaṭṭhāneyeva bhikkhusaṅghassa añjaliṃ paṇāmetvā ekamantaṃ nisīdi. Kañcideva desanti kañci okāsaṃ.
这时,世尊为了激发他提问的意愿,说道:“大王,你想问什么就问吧。”这句话的意思是:“如果你想问,就问吧,对我来说,回答你的问题并不是负担。”或者也可以理解为:“问吧,你想问什么,我都会为你全部解答。”这就是佛陀以一切知者的身份发出的邀请提问,这种殊胜是独觉佛、上首弟子和大声闻弟子们所没有的。因为他们不会说“你想问什么就问吧”,而是说“我们听了之后就会明白”。但诸佛则会说:“贤友,你想问什么就问吧”,或者说:“大王,你想问什么就问吧。”巴利
Athassa bhagavā pañhapucchane ussāhaṃ janento āha – ‘‘puccha, mahārāja, yadākaṅkhasī’’ti. Tassattho – ‘‘puccha yadi ākaṅkhasi, na me pañhavissajjane bhāro atthi’’. Atha vā ‘‘puccha, yaṃ ākaṅkhasi, sabbaṃ te vissajjessāmī’’ti sabbaññupavāraṇaṃ pavāresi, asādhāraṇaṃ paccekabuddhaaggasāvakamahāsāvakehi. Te hi yadākaṅkhasīti na vadanti, sutvā vedissāmāti vadanti. Buddhā pana – ‘‘puccha, āvuso, yadākaṅkhasī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.237), vā ‘‘puccha, mahārāja, yadākaṅkhasī’’ti vā,
帝释天神,你心里想问什么,就尽管问我吧。
我会把你问的任何一个问题都彻底解决。巴利
‘‘Puccha, vāsava, maṃ pañhaṃ, yaṃ kiñci manasicchasi; Tassa tasseva pañhassa, ahaṃ antaṃ karomi te’’ti. (dī. ni. 2.356) vā;
那么,比丘,你就坐在自己的座位上,想问什么就问吧。巴利
Tena hi tvaṃ, bhikkhu, sake āsane nisīditvā puccha, yadākaṅkhasīti vā,
巴瓦利的和你的,或者一切人的所有疑惑,
我已经给你们机会了,你们心里想问什么,就问吧。
萨比亚,你心里想问什么,就问我吧。
我要为你把每一个问题的究竟边际都弄清楚。巴利
‘‘Bāvarissa ca tuyhaṃ vā, sabbesaṃ sabbasaṃsayaṃ; Katāvakāsā pucchavho, yaṃ kiñci manasicchathā’’ti. (su. ni. 1036) vā; ‘‘Puccha maṃ, sabhiya, pañhaṃ, yaṃ kiñci manasicchasi; Tassa tasseva pañhassa, ahaṃ antaṃ karomi te’’ti. (su. ni. 517) vā;
他们向那些夜叉、人王、天神、沙门、婆罗门和游方者发出一切智者的邀请。世尊到达佛地之后发出这样的邀请,这并不奇怪。当他在菩萨地时,安住于部分智——巴利
Tesaṃ tesaṃ yakkhanarindadevasamaṇabrāhmaṇaparibbājakānaṃ sabbaññupavāraṇaṃ pavārenti. Anacchariyañcetaṃ, yaṃ bhagavā buddhabhūmiṃ patvā etaṃ pavāraṇaṃ pavāreyya. Yo bodhisattabhūmiyaṃ padesañāṇe ṭhito –
“ 孔丹尼亚,请为解答此诸问;
端正诸仙人,皆来向你祈请。
孔丹尼亚,这就是人间的法。
这个重担会落到已经长大的人身上。”巴利
‘‘Koṇḍañña , pañhāni viyākarohi; Yācanti taṃ isayo sādhurūpā. Koṇḍañña, eso manujesu dhammo; Yaṃ vuddhamāgacchati esa bhāro’’ti. (jā. 2.17.60);
就这样,为了帝释天神等人的利益,被仙人们请求——巴利
Evaṃ sakkādīnaṃ atthāya isīhi yācito –
“ 尊敬的诸位,你们已经得到机会,请问吧。
无论心里想要问什么问题,
我会亲自为你们一一解答。
我已经亲自了解了这个世间和另一个世间。”巴利
‘‘Katāvakāsā pucchantu bhonto, Yaṃ kiñci pañhaṃ manasābhipatthitaṃ; Ahañhi taṃ taṃ vo viyākarissaṃ, Ñatvā sayaṃ lokamimaṃ parañcā’’ti. (jā. 2.17.61);
事情发生在萨拉邦伽(Sarabhaṅga)那个时候。另外,在《桑跋瓦本生》里说到:那位婆罗门花了很长时间,走遍整个赡部洲三遍,也没能找到问题的答案。等到获准提问的时候,一个才七岁、正在路边玩沙土的小孩,在路中间盘起腿来坐着——巴利
Evaṃ sarabhaṅgakāle. Sambhavajātake ca sakalajambudīpaṃ tikkhattuṃ vicaritvā pañhānaṃ antakaraṃ adisvā suciratena brāhmaṇena, pañhaṃ puṭṭhuṃ okāse kārite jātiyā sattavassiko rathikāya paṃsuṃ kīḷanto pallaṅkamābhujitvā antaravīthiyaṃ nisinnova –
“ 我确实要告诉你,就像善巧之人那样;
国王确实知道那件事,他是否会做。”巴利
‘‘Taggha te ahamakkhissaṃ, yathāpi kusalo tathā; Rājā ca kho taṃ jānāti, yadi kāhati vā na vā’’ti. (jā. 1.16.172);
163 世尊这样作了关于一切知的自恣之后,国王心里欢喜,就提出问题,说了“尊者,正如这些……”等话。这里,“技艺”就是技艺处。“种种技艺处”是指许多种技艺。“哪种呢?”意思是:究竟是哪些呢?他用“象师”等说法,指出那些依靠各种技艺谋生的人。他的用意是:“就像这些靠技艺谋生的人,依靠各自的技艺,能让人看到现世可见的技艺成果。那么,是否也能同样指出一种现世可见的沙门果呢?”因此,他举出各种技艺处,并指出那些靠技艺谋生的人。巴利
163. Evaṃ bhagavatā sabbaññupavāraṇāya pavāritāya attamano rājā pañhaṃ pucchanto – ‘‘yathā nu kho imāni, bhante’’tiādimāha. Tattha sippameva sippāyatanaṃ. Puthusippāyatanānīti bahūni sippāni. Seyyathidanti katame pana te. Hatthārohātiādīhi ye taṃ taṃ sippaṃ nissāya jīvanti, te dasseti. Ayañhi assādhippāyo – ‘‘yathā imesaṃ sippūpajīvīnaṃ taṃ taṃ sippaṃ nissāya sandiṭṭhikaṃ sippaphalaṃ paññāyati. Sakkā nu kho evaṃ sandiṭṭhikaṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ paññāpetu’’nti. Tasmā sippāyatanāni āharitvā sippūpajīvino dasseti.
在这里,象兵指所有驯象师、象医、象贩等;马兵指所有驯马师、马医、马贩等;车兵指所有造车师、车战武士、车卫等;弓箭手指弓箭教师和射手;旗手是在战斗中举着胜利之旗走在阵前的人;布阵者是安排军阵的人,他们会说“这里是国王的位置,这里是某位大臣的位置”。团食施者,指勇猛的大战士。据说他们冲入敌阵,像切饭团一样把敌人的头一个个砍下来,跳起来又跳起来地杀出,意思就是这样。或者,在战场中间拿着饭钵给战士们分发食物的人,这也是他们的名称。高种王子,指出身高贵、常临战阵的王子们。突击者,指那些说“我们取谁的头或武器来呢?”说了“取某某的”之后,冲入战场而确实取来那物的人,这些人冲入,所以是突击者。大龙象,指像大龙象一样的大龙象,也是对迎面而来的象等不退转的战士的称呼。勇士,指绝对勇敢者,他们即使穿着网甲、带着皮甲也能渡海。皮甲战士,指穿上皮甲或拿了挡箭的皮盾而作战的人。女奴之子,指对主人有强固亲爱之情的家奴战士。糕点师,指做饼的人。理发师,指为人理发的人。沐浴师,指那些使人沐浴的人。厨师,指做饭的人。花环师等则显而易见。算师,指不间断诵读的人。印算师,指依靠手印计算而生活的人。或者其它种种,如铁匠、牙雕匠、画师等。如是者,指如此发生的。他们于现法,指那些象兵等展示那些种种技艺处,从王族获得大财富,依现见的技艺果而生活。令乐,指使安乐。令满足,指使之饱满、具足气力。在向上者等中,因为果向上产生,所以有向上的最高,因此是向上者。值得天界,所以是应天界者。其果报是乐,所以是乐果报。于最高,即被称为色、声、香、味、触、寿命、容貌、乐、誉、自在的十法中,善巧地令发生、产生,是导至天界者。意思是,他们建立那样类型的布施。沙门果,在此,从胜义上说,道是沙门。圣果是沙门果。如说:“诸比丘,什么是沙门?这就是八支圣道,即正见……乃至正定。诸比丘,这称为沙门。诸比丘,什么是沙门果?入流果……乃至阿拉汉果。”那位国王不知道这个。他针对上面来的奴仆与农夫譬喻而提问。巴利
Tattha hatthārohāti sabbepi hatthācariyahatthivejjahatthimeṇḍādayo dasseti. Assārohāti sabbepi assācariyaassavejjaassameṇḍādayo. Rathikāti sabbepi rathācariyarathayodharatharakkhādayo. Dhanuggahāti dhanuācariyā issāsā. Celakāti ye yuddhe jayadhajaṃ gahetvā purato gacchanti. Calakāti idha rañño ṭhānaṃ hotu, idha asukamahāmattassāti evaṃ senābyūhakārakā. Piṇḍadāyakāti sāhasikamahāyodhā. Te kira parasenaṃ pavisitvā parasīsaṃ piṇḍamiva chetvā chetvā dayanti, uppatitvā uppatitvā niggacchantīti attho. Ye vā saṅgāmamajjhe yodhānaṃ bhattapātiṃ gahetvā parivisanti, tesampetaṃ nāmaṃ. Uggārājaputtāti uggatuggatā saṅgāmāvacarā rājaputtā. Pakkhandinoti ye ‘‘kassa sīsaṃ vā āvudhaṃ vā āharāmā’’ti ‘‘vatvā asukassā’’ti vuttā saṅgāmaṃ pakkhanditvā tadeva āharanti, ime pakkhandantīti pakkhandino. Mahānāgāti mahānāgā viya mahānāgā, hatthiādīsupi abhimukhaṃ āgacchantesu anivattitayodhānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sūrāti ekantasūrā, ye sajālikāpi sacammikāpi samuddaṃ tarituṃ sakkonti. Cammayodhinoti ye cammakañcukaṃ vā pavisitvā saraparittāṇacammaṃ vā gahetvā yujjhanti. Dāsikaputtāti balavasinehā gharadāsayodhā. Āḷārikāti pūvikā. Kappakāti nhāpikā. Nhāpakāti ye nhāpenti. Sūdāti bhattakārakā. Mālākārādayo pākaṭāyeva. Gaṇakāti acchiddakapāṭhakā. Muddikāti hatthamuddāya gaṇanaṃ nissāya jīvino. Yāni vā panaññānipīti ayakāradantakāracittakārādīni. Evaṃgatānīti evaṃ pavattāni. Te diṭṭheva dhammeti te hatthārohādayo tāni puthusippāyatanāni dassetvā rājakulato mahāsampattiṃ labhamānā sandiṭṭhikameva sippaphalaṃ upajīvanti. Sukhentīti sukhitaṃ karonti. Pīṇentīti pīṇitaṃ thāmabalūpetaṃ karonti. Uddhaggikādīsu upari phalanibbattanato uddhaṃ aggamassā atthīti uddhaggikā. Saggaṃ arahatīti sovaggikā. Sukho vipāko assāti sukhavipākā. Suṭṭhu agge rūpasaddagandharasaphoṭṭhabbaāyuvaṇṇasukhayasaādhipateyyasaṅkhāte dasa dhamme saṃvatteti nibbattetīti saggasaṃvattanikā. Taṃ evarūpaṃ dakkhiṇaṃ dānaṃ patiṭṭhapentīti attho. Sāmaññaphalanti ettha paramatthato maggo sāmaññaṃ. Ariyaphalaṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘katamañca, bhikkhave, sāmaññaṃ? Ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo. Seyyathidaṃ, sammādiṭṭhi…pe… sammāsamādhi. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, sāmaññaṃ. Katamāni ca, bhikkhave, sāmaññaphalāni? Sotāpattiphalaṃ…pe… arahattaphala’’nti (saṃ. ni. 5.35). Taṃ esa rājā na jānāti. Upari āgataṃ pana dāsakassakopamaṃ sandhāya pucchati.
这时,世尊没有直接回答那个问题,而是心里想:“这里来了这么多外道弟子和大臣。如果我在讲法时揭示黑分与白分(不善与善),他们会抱怨说:‘我们的国王满怀热忱来到这里,可自从他来了以后,沙门乔达摩就只会讲沙门之间的喧闹和争吵。’这样他们就不会认真听法。但如果由国王自己来讲,他们就无法抱怨,只会跟着国王走。因为世间确实会追随有权势的人。来吧,我把这个担子交给国王。”于是世尊把担子交给国王,说道:“你是否记得……”等等。巴利
Atha bhagavā pañhaṃ avissajjetvāva cintesi – ‘‘ime bahū aññatitthiyasāvakā rājāmaccā idhāgatā, te kaṇhapakkhañca sukkapakkhañca dīpetvā kathīyamāne amhākaṃ rājā mahantena ussāhena idhāgato, tassāgatakālato paṭṭhāya samaṇo gotamo samaṇakolāhalaṃ samaṇabhaṇḍanameva kathetīti ujjhāyissanti, na sakkaccaṃ dhammaṃ sossanti, raññā pana kathīyamāne ujjhāyituṃ na sakkhissanti, rājānameva anuvattissanti. Issarānuvattako hi loko. ‘Handāhaṃ raññova bhāraṃ karomī’ti rañño bhāraṃ karonto ‘‘abhijānāsi no tva’’ntiādimāha.
164 164. 这里“你是否记得”的意思是:你还记得吗?而这个“否”字要和后面的“问”字连起来理解。这里说的是:“大王,你曾向其他沙门、婆罗门问过这个问题吗?你还记得自己问过吗?没有忘记吧?” “如果你不介意”的意思是:如果对你来说,把他们当时怎么回答的在这里说出来并不算负担,如果你没有什么不舒服,那就说吧。“尊者,对我来说不麻烦”——他这话是针对什么说的呢?因为在那些假装贤者的人面前说话很难,他们逐字逐音地挑毛病。而真正贤者听了之后,会称赞说得好的地方;对于说得不好的地方,比如经文、含义、词句有不妥之处,他们会一一改正后再讲。而像世尊这样真正的贤者,再也没有第二个了。所以他说:“尊者,对我来说不麻烦;只要有世尊坐在那里,或者有像世尊一样的人在场。”巴利
164. Tattha abhijānāsi no tvanti abhijānāsi nu tvaṃ. Ayañca no-saddo parato pucchitāti padena yojetabbo. Idañhi vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘mahārāja, tvaṃ imaṃ pañhaṃ aññe samaṇabrāhmaṇe pucchitā nu, abhijānāsi ca naṃ puṭṭhabhāvaṃ, na te sammuṭṭha’’nti. Sace te agarūti sace tuyhaṃ yathā te byākariṃsu, tathā idha bhāsituṃ bhāriyaṃ na hoti, yadi na koci aphāsukabhāvo atthi, bhāsassūti attho. Na kho me bhanteti kiṃ sandhāyāha? Paṇḍitapatirūpakānañhi santike kathetuṃ dukkhaṃ hoti, te pade pade akkhare akkhare dosameva vadanti. Ekantapaṇḍitā pana kathaṃ sutvā sukathitaṃ pasaṃsanti, dukkathitesu pāḷipadaatthabyañjanesu yaṃ yaṃ virujjhati, taṃ taṃ ujukaṃ katvā denti. Bhagavatā ca sadiso ekantapaṇḍito nāma natthi. Tenāha – ‘‘na kho me, bhante, garu; yatthassa bhagavā nisinno bhagavantarūpo vā’’ti.
布拉纳·咖萨巴的主张注释巴利
Pūraṇakassapavādavaṇṇanā
165 “Ekamidāha”的意思是“有一次,我在此(这样说)”。在结束了能让人欢喜、值得铭记的交谈,完成了能令人生起欢喜、适合记在心里的谈话之后。巴利
165.Ekamidāhanti ekaṃ idha ahaṃ. Sammodanīyaṃ kathaṃ sāraṇīyaṃ vītisāretvāti sammodajanakaṃ saritabbayuttakaṃ kathaṃ pariyosāpetvā.
166 大王,在“对作者、对令作者”等说法里,“作者”是指亲手去做的人。“令作者”是指下命令让别人去做的人。“砍者”是指砍断别人手脚等的人。“煮者”是指用棍棒等折磨别人的人。“令忧者”是指通过抢夺别人财物等方式让别人忧愁的人。“令生忧者”是指自己制造忧愁,或者让别人制造忧愁的人。“令疲者”是指通过断绝饮食、捆绑、关进暗室等方式,自己疲劳,或者让别人疲劳的人。“令夺命者”是指自己杀生或令他人杀生的人。“悸动者、令悸动者”是指别人悸动时自己也跟着悸动,也令他人悸动。如是在一切处皆应依作与令作之义而了知。巴利
166.‘‘Karoto kho, mahārāja, kārayato’’tiādīsu karototi sahatthā karontassa. Kārayatoti āṇattiyā kārentassa. Chindatoti paresaṃ hatthādīni chindantassa. Pacatoti pare daṇḍena pīḷentassa. Socayatoti parassa bhaṇḍaharaṇādīhi socayato. Socāpayatoti sokaṃ sayaṃ karontassapi parehi kārāpentassapi . Kilamatoti āhārupacchedabandhanāgārappavesanādīhi sayaṃ kilamantassapi parehi kilamāpentassapi. Phandato phandāpayatoti paraṃ phandantaṃ phandanakāle sayampi phandato parampi phandāpayato. Pāṇamatipātāpayatoti pāṇaṃ hanantassapi hanāpentassapi. Evaṃ sabbattha karaṇakāraṇavaseneva attho veditabbo.
“Sandhi”是指屋子的接缝。“Nillopa”是指大规模抢劫。“Ekāgārika”是指围住单独一户人家进行掠夺。“Paripanthe”是指站在路上,为了截夺来往行人的财物。“作恶者,恶不被作”:即使做了,恶也不被作;即使怀着“我在作某种恶”的想法去做,恶也不被作,也就是没有恶;但众生却持有“我们在作恶”这样的想法。这里是在说明这一点。“Khurapariyanta”是指刀轮的边缘,或者像刀刃一样锋利的边缘。“Ekaṃ maṃsakhala”是指一堆肉。“Puñja”是它的同义词。“Tatonidāna”是指成为一堆肉的原因。巴利
Sandhinti gharasandhiṃ. Nillopanti mahāvilopaṃ. Ekāgārikanti ekameva gharaṃ parivāretvā viluppanaṃ. Paripantheti āgatāgatānaṃ acchindanatthaṃ magge tiṭṭhato. Karoto na karīyati pāpanti yaṃ kiñci pāpaṃ karomīti saññāya karotopi pāpaṃ na karīyati, natthi pāpaṃ. Sattā pana pāpaṃ karomāti evaṃsaññino hontīti dīpeti. Khurapariyantenāti khuraneminā, khuradhārasadisapariyantena vā. Ekaṃ maṃsakhalanti ekaṃ maṃsarāsiṃ. Puñjanti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Tatonidānanti ekamaṃsakhalakaraṇanidānaṃ.
“南岸”是指南岸的人凶暴残忍,针对他们才说了“杀害”等那些话。北岸的众生则有信心、有净信,是归属于佛、归属于法、归属于僧的弟子,针对他们才说了“布施”等那些话。其中,“祭祀”是指举行大祭。“调伏”是通过调伏诸根,或者通过持守伍波萨他戒来调御自己。“防护”是通过持戒来防护。“实语”是说真实的话。“阿含”意思是到来,也就是发生、现起的意思。这段话从各个方面彻底否定了善恶业的造作。巴利
Dakkhiṇanti dakkhiṇatīre manussā kakkhaḷā dāruṇā, te sandhāya ‘‘hananto’’tiādimāha. Uttaratīre sattā saddhā honti pasannā buddhamāmakā dhammamāmakā saṅghamāmakā, te sandhāya dadantotiādimāha. Tattha yajantoti mahāyāgaṃ karonto. Damenāti indriyadamena uposathakammena vā. Saṃyamenāti sīlasaṃyamena. Saccavajjenāti saccavacanena. Āgamoti āgamanaṃ, pavattīti attho. Sabbathāpi pāpapuññānaṃ kiriyameva paṭikkhipati.
有人被问到芒果,却回答菠萝蜜,这就像什么呢?当别人问“芒果是什么样的?芒果的树干、叶子、花、果实是什么样的?”他却回答说“菠萝蜜是这样的,菠萝蜜的树干、叶子、花、果实是这样的”。
“于已征服之境”:指在自己命令所及的范围内。“应受呵斥”:指应当被责备。“不欢喜”:指没有发出“萨度,萨度”这样的赞叹。“不斥责”:指没有用“你说了愚人的恶语”这样的话去驳斥他。“不执取”:指不把它当作核心要义来受持。“不记持”:指不依其核心要义,把“这是出离,这是胜义”放在心里牢牢记住。不过,对于这些词句本身,他倒是已经学习过、也记住了。巴利
Ambaṃ puṭṭho labujaṃ byākaroti nāma, yo kīdiso ambo kīdisāni vā ambassa khandhapaṇṇapupphaphalānīti vutte ediso labujo edisāni vā labujassa khandhapaṇṇapupphaphalānīti byākaroti. Vijiteti āṇāpavattidese. Apasādetabbanti viheṭhetabbaṃ. Anabhinanditvāti ‘‘sādhu sādhū’’ti evaṃ pasaṃsaṃ akatvā. Appaṭikkositvāti bāladubbhāsitaṃ tayā bhāsitanti evaṃ appaṭibāhitvā. Anuggaṇhantoti sārato aggaṇhanto. Anikkujjantoti sāravaseneva idaṃ nissaraṇaṃ, ayaṃ paramatthoti hadaye aṭṭhapento. Byañjanaṃ pana tena uggahitañceva nikkujjitañca.
玛卡离·果萨拉观点的注释巴利
Makkhaligosālavādavaṇṇanā
167-169 在玛卡离·果萨拉的观点里,“缘”只是“因”的另一种说法。他用这两个词,把实际存在的情况都否定了:身恶行等是杂染的缘,身善行等是清净的缘,这些他都否认。“自作”:就是自己所作。众生靠自己所造的业,能到达天界、魔界、梵天界,能证得声闻菩提、独觉菩提、一切知智——这些他也都否定。第二个词“他作”,是说除了大菩萨以外,其余众生依靠他人的教导和教诫,从人天福乐开始,一直到证得阿拉汉果,这种由他人所作的力量,他也否定。这样一来,这个愚人就等于是在打击胜利者的法轮。“无有士夫所作”:众生靠士夫的作为而获得前面说的那些成就,这种士夫的作用他也否定。“无有力量”:众生依靠自己的力量,精进努力而获得那些成就,这种力量他也否定。“无有精进”等词,全都是“士夫所作”的同义词。之所以把这些词分开来说,是为了反驳“这是靠我们的精进,这是靠士夫的力量,这是靠士夫的奋发才发生的”这类说法。巴利
167-169. Makkhalivāde paccayoti hetuvevacanameva, ubhayenāpi vijjamānameva kāyaduccaritādīnaṃ saṃkilesapaccayaṃ, kāyasucaritādīnañca visuddhipaccayaṃ paṭikkhipati. Attakāreti attakāro. Yena attanā katakammena ime sattā devattampi mārattampi brahmattampi sāvakabodhimpi paccekabodhimpi sabbaññutampi pāpuṇanti, tampi paṭikkhipati. Dutiyapadena yaṃ parakāraṃ parassa ovādānusāsaniṃ nissāya ṭhapetvā mahāsattaṃ avaseso jano manussasobhagyataṃ ādiṃ katvā yāva arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, taṃ parakāraṃ paṭikkhipati. Evamayaṃ bālo jinacakke pahāraṃ deti nāma. Natthi purisakāreti yena purisakārena sattā vuttappakārā sampattiyo pāpuṇanti , tampi paṭikkhipati. Natthi balanti yamhi attano bale patiṭṭhitā sattā vīriyaṃ katvā tā sampattiyo pāpuṇanti, taṃ balaṃ paṭikkhipati. Natthi vīriyantiādīni sabbāni purisakāravevacanāneva. ‘‘Idaṃ no vīriyena idaṃ purisathāmena, idaṃ purisaparakkamena pavatta’’nti evaṃ pavattavacanapaṭikkhepakaraṇavasena panetāni visuṃ ādiyanti.
一切有情:把骆驼、牛、驴等全都包括进来,一个也不遗漏。一切生类:是说单根的生类、双根的生类等等。一切有:是针对卵壳、胎膜中的众生说的。一切命:是针对稻、大麦、小麦等说的,他把它们能生长的状态当作有命。它们没有自主力、没有力量、没有精进:是说它们没有自己的支配力,没有力量,也没有精进。被命运、聚分、本性所转变:这里的“命运”就是决定;“聚分”就是六种生类各各投生之处;“本性”就是自性本身。这样,它们被命运、聚分和本性所转变,变成种种不同的样子。这是说明:注定该怎样的,就那样存在;注定不该怎样的,就不存在。唯在六种生类中:是说只在六种生类中感受苦和乐,说明并没有别的感受苦乐的地方。巴利
Sabbe sattāti oṭṭhagoṇagadrabhādayo anavasese pariggaṇhāti. Sabbe pāṇāti ekindriyo pāṇo, dvindriyo pāṇotiādivasena vadati. Sabbe bhūtāti aṇḍakosavatthikosesu bhūte sandhāya vadati. Sabbe jīvāti sāliyavagodhumādayo sandhāya vadati. Tesu hi so virūhanabhāvena jīvasaññī. Avasā abalā avīriyāti tesaṃ attano vaso vā balaṃ vā vīriyaṃ vā natthi. Niyatisaṅgatibhāvapariṇatāti ettha niyatīti niyatā. Saṅgatīti channaṃ abhijātīnaṃ tattha tattha gamanaṃ. Bhāvoti sabhāvoyeva. Evaṃ niyatiyā ca saṅgatiyā ca bhāvena ca pariṇatā nānappakārataṃ pattā. Yena hi yathā bhavitabbaṃ, so tatheva bhavati. Yena na bhavitabbaṃ, so na bhavatīti dasseti. Chasvevābhijātīsūti chasu eva abhijātīsu ṭhatvā sukhañca dukkhañca paṭisaṃvedenti. Aññā sukhadukkhabhūmi natthīti dasseti.
“一百四十万种首要的出生”:最殊胜的出生有一百四十万种,另外还有六千种,另外还有六百种。“五百业”:就是五种百业。这纯粹是用诡辩来显示毫无意义的见解。在“五业、三业”等说法里,道理也是一样。不过也有人这样说:“‘五业’是就五根来说;‘三业’是就身业等来说。”而在“业与半业”里,他的见解是:身业和语业算“业”,意业算“半业”。“六十二道”:就是六十二种修行之道。“六十二中劫”:在一个大劫里,本来有六十四个中劫,但这个人不知道另外两个中劫,所以才这么说。巴利
Yonipamukhasatasahassānīti pamukhayonīnaṃ uttamayonīnaṃ cuddasasatasahassāni aññāni ca saṭṭhisatāni aññāni ca chasatāni. Pañca ca kammunosatānīti pañcakammasatāni ca. Kevalaṃ takkamattakena niratthakaṃ diṭṭhiṃ dīpeti. Pañca ca kammāni tīṇi ca kammānītiādīsupi eseva nayo. Keci panāhu – ‘‘pañca ca kammānīti pañcindriyavasena bhaṇati. Tīṇīti kāyakammādivasenā’’ti. Kamme ca upaḍḍhakamme cāti ettha panassa kāyakammañca vacīkammañca kammanti laddhi, manokammaṃ upaḍḍhakammanti. Dvaṭṭhipaṭipadāti dvāsaṭṭhi paṭipadāti vadati. Dvaṭṭhantarakappāti ekasmiṃ kappe catusaṭṭhi antarakappā nāma honti. Ayaṃ pana aññe dve ajānanto evamāha.
关于“六类出身”,他说的是这六种出身:黑色出身、蓝色出身、红色出身、黄色出身、白色出身、最胜白色出身。其中,屠羊者、捕鸟者、捕鹿者、屠猪者、猎人、杀鱼者、盗贼、刽子手、狱卒,以及其他任何从事残忍行业的人,他说这就是“黑色出身”。他说比丘是“蓝色出身”,据说是因为他们在四种资具中插入刺而受用。而“比丘是棘刺活命者”这句话,本来就是他自己经典里的原文。或者也可以说,他认为有一类出家人就叫“棘刺活命者”。他说尼乾陀和只穿一件衣服的耆那教徒是“红色出身”,据说这些人比前面两种更白净。他说穿白衣的在家人、裸形派的弟子是“黄色出身”。这样一来,他就把自己的施主抬得甚至比尼乾陀还高。他说邪命外道的男女修行者是“白色出身”,据说这些人比前面四种更白净。他说难陀、瓦恰、基舍、僧基车、玛卡离·果萨拉是“最胜白色出身”,据说这些人比所有人都更白净。巴利
Chaḷābhijātiyoti kaṇhābhijāti, nīlābhijāti, lohitābhijāti, haliddābhijāti, sukkābhijāti, paramasukkābhijātīti imā cha abhijātiyo vadati. Tattha orabbhikā, sākuṇikā, māgavikā, sūkarikā, luddā, macchaghātakā corā, coraghātakā, bandhanāgārikā, ye vā panaññepi keci kurūrakammantā, ayaṃ kaṇhābhijātīti (a. ni. 6.57) vadati. Bhikkhū nīlābhijātīti vadati, te kira catūsu paccayesu kaṇṭake pakkhipitvā khādanti. ‘‘Bhikkhū kaṇṭakavuttikā’’ti (a. ni. 6.57) ayañhissa pāḷiyeva. Atha vā kaṇṭakavuttikā eva nāma eke pabbajitāti vadati. Lohitābhijāti nāma nigaṇṭhā ekasāṭakāti vadati. Ime kira purimehi dvīhi paṇḍaratarā. Gihī odātavasanā acelakasāvakā haliddābhijātīti vadati. Evaṃ attano paccayadāyake nigaṇṭhehipi jeṭṭhakatare karoti. Ājīvakā ājīvakiniyo sukkābhijātīti vadati. Te kira purimehi catūhi paṇḍaratarā. Nando, vaccho, kiso, saṅkiccho, makkhaligosālo, paramasukkābhijātīti (a. ni. 6.57) vadati. Te kira sabbehi paṇḍaratarā.
他说有八种男子地:迟钝地、游戏地、试步地、直行地、有学地、沙门地、胜者地、堕落地。其中,从出生那天算起,七天之内因为刚从狭窄的胎处出来,所以众生迟钝、昏昧,这个阶段叫迟钝地。那些从恶道转生来的,就不断哭喊叫嚷;从善道转生来的,回忆起过去就笑,这个阶段叫游戏地。抓住父母的手或脚,或者扶着床、椅子,把脚放到地上试探着迈步,这叫试步地。能够自己用脚走路的时候,叫直行地。学习各种技艺的时候,叫有学地。离开家出家的时候,叫沙门地。亲近老师、有所了知的时候,叫胜者地。如果有个比丘是堕落的,又是无所得的胜者,他就把这种无所得的沙门叫做堕落地。巴利
Aṭṭha purisabhūmiyoti mandabhūmi, khiḍḍābhūmi, padavīmaṃsabhūmi, ujugatabhūmi, sekkhabhūmi, samaṇabhūmi , jinabhūmi, pannabhūmīti imā aṭṭha purisabhūmiyoti vadati. Tattha jātadivasato paṭṭhāya sattadivase sambādhaṭṭhānato nikkhantattā sattā mandā honti momūhā, ayaṃ mandabhūmīti vadati. Ye pana duggatito āgatā honti, te abhiṇhaṃ rodanti ceva viravanti ca, sugatito āgatā taṃ anussaritvā hasanti, ayaṃ khiḍḍābhūmi nāma. Mātāpitūnaṃ hatthaṃ vā pādaṃ vā mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā gahetvā bhūmiyaṃ padanikkhipanaṃ padavīmaṃsabhūmi nāma. Padasā gantuṃ samatthakāle ujugatabhūmi nāma. Sippāni sikkhitakāle sekkhabhūmi nāma. Gharā nikkhamma pabbajitakāle samaṇabhūmi nāma. Ācariyaṃ sevitvā jānanakāle jinabhūmi nāma. Bhikkhu ca pannako jino na kiñci āhāti evaṃ alābhiṃ samaṇaṃ pannabhūmīti vadati.
“四十九百种邪命外道的生活”是指四十九百种邪命外道的谋生方式。“一百种游方者”是指一百种游方者的出家方式。“一百个龙居处”是指一百个龙所居住的区域。“二十种根的一百”是指二十种根各有一百。“三十种地狱的一百”是指三十种地狱各有一百。“尘界”是指撒灰尘的地方,这是就手背、脚背等部位说的。“七种有想胎”是针对骆驼、牛、驴、羊、家畜、野兽、水牛等说的。“七种无想胎”是针对稻、米、大麦、小麦、稗、黍、稊稗等说的。“结节胎”是指在结节处生出的胎,这是针对甘蔗、竹子、芦苇等说的。“七种天”其实有很多天,他却说只有七种。人也是无量的,他却说只有七种。“七种毗舍遮”是说毗舍遮有各种大小不同的形体,他却说有七种大毗舍遮。“池”是指大池,他是针对耳环池、车匠池、阿耨达池、狮子崖池、六牙池、曼陀基尼池、咕纳拉池等说的。巴利
Ekūnapaññāsa ājīvakasateti ekūnapaññāsaājīvakavuttisatāni. Paribbājakasateti paribbājakapabbajjāsatāni. Nāgāvāsasateti nāgamaṇḍalasatāni. Vīse indriyasateti vīsatindriyasatāni. Tiṃse nirayasateti tiṃsa nirayasatāni. Rajodhātuyoti rajaokiraṇaṭṭhānāni, hatthapiṭṭhipādapiṭṭhādīni sandhāya vadati. Satta saññīgabbhāti oṭṭhagoṇagadrabhaajapasumigamahiṃse sandhāya vadati. Satta asaññīgabbhāti sālivīhiyavagodhūmakaṅguvarakakudrūsake sandhāya vadati. Nigaṇṭhigabbhāti gaṇṭhimhi jātagabbhā, ucchuveḷunaḷādayo sandhāya vadati. Satta devāti bahū devā. So pana sattāti vadati. Manussāpi anantā, so sattāti vadati. Sattapisācāti pisācā mahantamahantā sattāti vadati. Sarāti mahāsarā, kaṇṇamuṇḍarathakāraanotattasīhappapātachaddantamandākinīkuṇāladahe gahetvā vadati.
结是指结节。大悬崖是指巨大的断崖。数百座悬崖是指数百座小悬崖。大梦是指大梦,也就是重大的梦境。数百个梦是指数百个小梦,也就是数百个小梦境。大劫是指大劫。对此,他是这样说的:从一个大湖里,每过一百年用草尖取出一滴水,这样取七次,直到那个大湖完全干涸,这整个过程的时间,才叫做一个大劫。他的主张是:愚者和智者都要经历这样的大劫,在耗尽八百四十万大劫之后,才能结束痛苦。据说,智者不能在中途就清净解脱,愚者也不能越过那个界限而前进。巴利
Pavuṭāti gaṇṭhikā. Papātāti mahāpapātā. Papātasatānīti khuddakapapātasatāni. Supināti mahāsupinā. Supinasatānīti khuddakasupinasatāni. Mahākappinoti mahākappānaṃ. Tattha ekamhā mahāsarā vassasate vassasate kusaggena ekaṃ udakabinduṃ nīharitvā sattakkhattuṃ tamhi sare nirudake kate eko mahākappoti vadati. Evarūpānaṃ mahākappānaṃ caturāsītisatasahassāni khepetvā bāle ca paṇḍite ca dukkhassantaṃ karontīti ayamassa laddhi. Paṇḍitopi kira antarā visujjhituṃ na sakkoti. Bālopi tato uddhaṃ na gacchati.
“以戒”:是指裸形外道的戒,或者其他任何一种戒。“以誓愿”:是指同类的誓愿。“以苦行”:是指苦行这种行为。所谓“让未成熟的成熟”,是说有人想“我是智者”,中途就自认为清净了。所谓“已成熟,一次次接触后令其消尽”,是说有人想“我是愚者”,超过所说的时限才死去。“hevaṃ natthi”就是“这样不存在”,这是在说明这两者都不可能做到。“如斗量”:就像用斗来量。“于乐与苦”:在乐与苦上。“界限已定”:由所说的时限所划定的界限已定。“无减损与增长”:没有减损,也没有增长。意思是:对智者,轮回不会缩短;对愚者,轮回也不会延长。“增上与减下”:就是增上与减下,这是对减损与增长的另一种说法。巴利
Sīlenāti acelakasīlena vā aññena vā yena kenaci. Vatenāti tādiseneva vatena. Tapenāti tapokammena. Aparipakkaṃ paripāceti nāma, yo ‘‘ahaṃ paṇḍito’’ti antarā visujjhati. Paripakkaṃ phussa phussa byantiṃ karoti nāma yo ‘‘ahaṃ bālo’’ti vuttaparimāṇaṃ kālaṃ atikkamitvā yāti. Hevaṃ natthīti evaṃ natthi. Tañhi ubhayampi na sakkā kātunti dīpeti. Doṇamiteti doṇena mitaṃ viya. Sukhadukkheti sukhadukkhaṃ. Pariyantakateti vuttaparimāṇena kālena katapariyante. Natthihāyanavaḍḍhaneti natthi hāyanavaḍḍhanāni. Na saṃsāro paṇḍitassa hāyati, na bālassa vaḍḍhatīti attho. Ukkaṃsāvakaṃseti ukkaṃsāvakaṃsā. Hāyanavaḍḍhanānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
现在,为了用譬喻说明这个道理,说了“譬如线团”等话。其中,“线团”是指缠绕而成的线球。“当它被解开时便随之而去”:比如有人站在山上或树顶,把线团抛出去,线就随着自身长度一边被解开一边前进;线用完了,它就停在那里,不再前进。同样地,这是要说明:超过所说的那个时限之后,就不再往前走了。巴利
Idāni tamatthaṃ upamāya sādhento ‘‘seyyathāpi nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha suttaguḷeti veṭhetvā katasuttaguḷe. Nibbeṭhiyamānameva paletīti pabbate vā rukkhagge vā ṭhatvā khittaṃ suttappamāṇena nibbeṭhiyamānameva gacchati, sutte khīṇe tattheva tiṭṭhati, na gacchati. Evameva vuttakālato uddhaṃ na gacchatīti dasseti.
阿吉达·给萨坎巴拉派的注释巴利
Ajitakesakambalavādavaṇṇanā
170-172 在阿吉达的主张里,说“没有布施”,是就布施没有果报这一点说的。“已供”指的是大祭祀。“已献”指的是赠礼性的供养。这两者他也都是就它们没有果报这一点加以否定。说“善行恶行”,就是善行和恶行,意思是善业和不善业。所谓“果、果报”,凡是被称为果或果报的,他说这些都不存在。说“没有此世”,是指站在他世角度的有情没有此世;说“没有他世”,是指站在此世角度的有情也没有他世;说“没有母亲、没有父亲”,是就对父母行正行与邪行没有果报而言说的。说“没有化生有情”,是指死后转生于他处的有情不存在,以此表明一切众生就在各自所在之处断灭巴利
170-172. Ajitavāde natthi dinnanti dinnaphalābhāvaṃ sandhāya vadati. Yiṭṭhaṃ vuccati mahāyāgo. Hutanti paheṇakasakkāro adhippeto. Tampi ubhayaṃ phalābhāvameva sandhāya paṭikkhipati. Sukatadukkaṭānanti sukatadukkaṭānaṃ, kusalākusalānanti attho. Phalaṃ vipākoti yaṃ phalanti vā vipākoti vā vuccati, taṃ natthīti vadati. Natthi ayaṃ lokoti paraloke ṭhitassa ayaṃ loko natthi, natthi paro lokoti idha loke ṭhitassāpi paro loko natthi, sabbe tattha tattheva ucchijjantīti dasseti. Natthi mātā natthi pitāti tesu sammāpaṭipattimicchāpaṭipattīnaṃ phalābhāvavasena vadati. Natthi sattā opapātikāti cavitvā upapajjanakā sattā nāma natthīti vadati.
四大种所成就是指由四大种构成。地归于地身是指内地界归于外地界。随往就是追随;随至是同一个意思的另一种说法,也有跟随而去的意思。这两种说法都表明前往、到达。水等其余几界也是同样的道理。诸根是指以意为第六的六根奔入虚空。以床为第五是指以卧床为第五,意思是床,加上抓住床脚站着的四个人。直到火葬场就是直到墓地。句迹是指“这个人这样持戒,这样破戒”等等功德和过失的陈述,或者此处以身体本身为句迹,这是所意想的。鸽色是指鸽子的颜色、斑鸠羽翼的颜色。成灰是指成为灰末,此即原文。诸献祭是指任何分为赠送、礼品、供养等的布施,这一切最终都只成为灰烬,不会在此后成为给予果报之物。施被愚人施设是指布施由愚人所设立。这里所说的是:这种布施是愚人、无智慧者所设立的,并非智者所设立。表明愚人布施,智者接受。巴利
Cātumahābhūtikoti catumahābhūtamayo. Pathavī pathavikāyanti ajjhattikapathavīdhātu bāhirapathavīdhātuṃ. Anupetīti anuyāyati. Anupagacchatīti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Anugacchatītipi attho. Ubhayenāpi upeti, upagacchatīti dasseti. Āpādīsupi eseva nayo. Indriyānīti manacchaṭṭhāni indriyāni ākāsaṃ pakkhandanti. Āsandipañcamāti nipannamañcena pañcamā, mañco ceva cattāro mañcapāde gahetvā ṭhitā cattāro purisā cāti attho. Yāvāḷāhanāti yāva susānā. Padānīti ‘ayaṃ evaṃ sīlavā ahosi, evaṃ dussīlo’tiādinā nayena pavattāni guṇāguṇapadāni, sarīrameva vā ettha padānīti adhippetaṃ. Kāpotakānīti kapotavaṇṇāni, pārāvatapakkhavaṇṇānīti attho. Bhassantāti bhasmantā, ayameva vā pāḷi. Āhutiyoti yaṃ paheṇakasakkārādibhedaṃ dinnadānaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ chārikāvasānameva hoti, na tato paraṃ phaladāyakaṃ hutvā gacchatīti attho. Dattupaññattanti dattūhi bālamanussehi paññattaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘bālehi abuddhīhi paññattamidaṃ dānaṃ, na paṇḍitehi. Bālā denti, paṇḍitā gaṇhantī’ti dasseti.
在这里,布拉纳说“做了恶也不算是作恶”,是在否定业。阿吉达说“身体坏灭后就断灭了”,是在否定果报。玛卡离说“没有因”,是在把两者都否定。这样一来,否定业的人也就否定了果报,否定果报的人也就否定了业。所以,这些人从义理上说全都是同时否定业和果报的,也都是无因论者、无业论者和虚无论者。巴利
Tattha pūraṇo ‘‘karoto na karīyati pāpa’’nti vadanto kammaṃ paṭibāhati. Ajito ‘‘kāyassa bhedā ucchijjatī’’ti vadanto vipākaṃ paṭibāhati. Makkhali ‘‘natthi hetū’’ti vadanto ubhayaṃ paṭibāhati. Tattha kammaṃ paṭibāhantenāpi vipāko paṭibāhito hoti, vipākaṃ paṭibāhantenāpi kammaṃ paṭibāhitaṃ hoti. Iti sabbepete atthato ubhayappaṭibāhakā ahetukavādā ceva akiriyavādā ca natthikavādā ca honti.
有些人执取他们的见解,无论白天还是晚上,坐在住处反复念诵、反复思索。当他们心里现起“做了恶事也不算造恶,没有因,没有缘,死了就彻底断灭”这类所缘时,错误的念就停在那里不动,心变得专一集中,速行心一个接一个生起。第一个速行还有救,第二个等速行也一样;但到第七个速行时,就连诸佛也救不了,再也转不回来,就像阿利塔荆棘一样。在这当中,有人陷入一种邪见,有人陷入两种,有人陷入三种。不管陷入一种、两种还是三种,他都成了定型的邪见者;他已经被挡住通往天界和通往解脱的路。这一期生命结束后,他连天界都去不了,更别说解脱了。这种众生就叫“轮回桩”,像大地的看门人一样,绝大多数情况下,都无法从这种生存状态中出离。巴利
Ye vā pana tesaṃ laddhiṃ gahetvā rattiṭṭhāne divāṭhāne nisinnā sajjhāyanti vīmaṃsanti, tesaṃ ‘‘karoto na karīyati pāpaṃ, natthi hetu, natthi paccayo, mato ucchijjatī’’ti tasmiṃ ārammaṇe micchāsati santiṭṭhati, cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, javanāni javanti, paṭhamajavane satekicchā honti, tathā dutiyādīsu, sattame buddhānampi atekicchā anivattino ariṭṭhakaṇṭakasadisā. Tattha koci ekaṃ dassanaṃ okkamati, koci dve, koci tīṇipi, ekasmiṃ okkantepi, dvīsu tīsu okkantesupi, niyatamicchādiṭṭhikova hoti; patto saggamaggāvaraṇañceva mokkhamaggāvaraṇañca, abhabbo tassattabhāvassa anantaraṃ saggampi gantuṃ, pageva mokkhaṃ. Vaṭṭakhāṇu nāmesa satto pathavigopako, yebhuyyena evarūpassa bhavato vuṭṭhānaṃ natthi.
“ 所以应当避开恶人,就像避开毒蛇一样。
想要得到安乐的有智慧的人,应当远远避开它。”巴利
‘‘Tasmā akalyāṇajanaṃ, āsīvisamivoragaṃ; Ārakā parivajjeyya, bhūtikāmo vicakkhaṇo’’ti.
巴咕特·咖佳亚那派的注释巴利
Pakudhakaccāyanavādavaṇṇanā
173-175 173-175. 在巴咕特的学说中,“非所作”就是不是被造作的。“非所作种种”就是不是以种种方式造作的。“你应当这样做”的意思是:它们不会因为任何人的指使而变成那样。“非所化”就是连神通也化现不出来。“非能化”就是不能被制造出来。有些人把这个词说成“不应被制造”,但这个词在经典和注疏里都看不到。“不孕”等三个词的意思和前面说的一样。“不动摇”是因为像门柱一样立着,所以不摇动。“不变异”就是不放弃自己的本性。“不互相恼害”就是不互相伤害。“不能”就是没有能力。在“地身”等说法中,地本身就是“地身”,或者说是地的集合体。“在那里”就是在那些有生命的七身之中。“正是七身”的意思是:就像刀砍在一堆绿豆等东西上时,刀会从绿豆等之间的缝隙穿进去一样,刀也会从七身的缝隙和孔洞中穿进去。在那里,“我断除这个生命”只是纯粹的概念而已,这就是这段话所要显示的。巴利
173-175. Pakudhavāde akaṭāti akatā. Akaṭavidhāti akatavidhānā. Evaṃ karohīti kenaci kārāpitāpi na hontīti attho. Animmitāti iddhiyāpi na nimmitā. Animmātāti animmāpitā, keci animmāpetabbāti padaṃ vadanti, taṃ neva pāḷiyaṃ, na aṭṭhakathāyaṃ dissati. Vañjhādipadattayaṃ vuttatthameva. Na iñjantīti esikatthambho viya ṭhitattā na calanti. Na vipariṇamantīti pakatiṃ na jahanti. Na aññamaññaṃ byābādhentīti na aññamaññaṃ upahananti. Nālanti na samatthā. Pathavikāyotiādīsu pathavīyeva pathavikāyo, pathavisamūho vā. Tatthāti tesu jīvasattamesu kāyesu. Sattannaṃ tveva kāyānanti yathā muggarāsiādīsu pahataṃ satthaṃ muggādīnaṃ antarena pavisati, evaṃ sattannaṃ kāyānaṃ antarena chiddena vivarena satthaṃ pavisati. Tattha ahaṃ imaṃ jīvitā voropemīti kevalaṃ saññāmattameva hotīti dasseti.
尼乾陀·若提子学说的注释巴利
Nigaṇṭhanāṭaputtavādavaṇṇanā
176-178 在尼乾陀·若提子的学说中,“以四分防护而防护”是指用四种防护来守护。“一切水已遮止”是指遮止一切水,拒绝一切冷水。据说他把冷水看作有生命,所以不碰它。“具备一切防护”是指具备一切遮恶的防护。“以一切防护而涤除”是指以一切遮恶的防护涤除罪恶。“为一切防护所触及”是指被一切遮恶的防护所触及。“已达”是指心已达到顶点。“已防护”是指心已得到约束。“已安住”是指心已善加安立。他的学说中虽然有一点随顺于佛法的地方,但因为见解不清净,所以全都变成了邪见。巴利
176-178. Nāṭaputtavāde cātuyāmasaṃvarasaṃvutoti catukoṭṭhāsena saṃvarena saṃvuto. Sabbavārivāritocāti vāritasabbaudako paṭikkhittasabbasītodakoti attho. So kira sītodake sattasaññī hoti, tasmā na taṃ vaḷañjeti. Sabbavāriyuttoti sabbena pāpavāraṇena yutto. Sabbavāridhutoti sabbena pāpavāraṇena dhutapāpo. Sabbavāriphuṭoti sabbena pāpavāraṇena phuṭṭho. Gatattoti koṭippattacitto. Yatattoti saṃyatacitto. Ṭhitattoti suppatiṭṭhitacitto. Etassa vāde kiñci sāsanānulomampi atthi, asuddhaladdhitāya pana sabbā diṭṭhiyeva jātā.
桑恰亚·贝拉塔之子婆罗门之说的注释巴利
Sañcayabelaṭṭhaputtavādavaṇṇanā
179-181 桑恰亚论与不死矫乱中所说的方式完全一样。巴利
179-181. Sañcayavādo amarāvikkhepe vuttanayo eva.
第一,现见沙门果的注释。巴利
Paṭhamasandiṭṭhikasāmaññaphalavaṇṇanā
182 “尊者,我”这句话的意思是:就像挤压沙子却榨不出油一样,我在外道的各种说法里找不到任何精华,所以来请问世尊。巴利
182.Sohaṃ, bhanteti so ahaṃ bhante, vālukaṃ pīḷetvā telaṃ alabhamāno viya titthiyavādesu sāraṃ alabhanto bhagavantaṃ pucchāmīti attho.
183 “只要你觉得合适”就是“只要你喜欢”。奴仆,是指家生奴、买来的奴、俘获的奴、自愿为奴这四种当中的一种。工作者,就是不懈怠、习惯于干活的人。远远看见主人就先起身,所以叫先起者。这样起身之后,给主人铺好座位,做完洗脚等该做的事,然后才躺下或坐下,所以叫后卧者。或者说,主人还没从床上起来,他就先起来了,所以叫先起者;从清晨开始,直到主人夜里入睡之前,他把所有事情都做完,然后才躺下休息,所以叫后卧者。他嘴里总是应着“做什么?做什么?”,一边回应一边做事,所以叫应答“做什么?”者。他只做让主人欢喜的事,所以叫悦意行者。他只说亲切的话,所以叫爱语者。他总是看着主人满意高兴的脸色来行事,所以叫仰面者。巴利
183.Yathā te khameyyāti yathā te rucceyya. Dāsoti antojātadhanakkītakaramarānītasāmaṃdāsabyopagatānaṃ aññataro. Kammakāroti analaso kammakaraṇasīloyeva. Dūrato disvā paṭhamameva uṭṭhahatīti pubbuṭṭhāyī. Evaṃ uṭṭhito sāmino āsanaṃ paññapetvā pādadhovanādikattabbakiccaṃ katvā pacchā nipatati nisīdatīti pacchānipātī. Sāmikamhi vā sayanato avuṭṭhite pubbeyeva vuṭṭhātīti pubbuṭṭhāyī. Paccūsakālato paṭṭhāya yāva sāmino rattiṃ niddokkamanaṃ, tāva sabbakiccāni katvā pacchā nipatati, seyyaṃ kappetīti pacchānipātī. Kiṃ karomi, kiṃ karomīti evaṃ kiṃkārameva paṭisuṇanto vicaratīti kiṃ kārapaṭissāvī. Manāpameva kiriyaṃ karotīti manāpacārī. Piyameva vadatīti piyavādī. Sāmino tuṭṭhapahaṭṭhaṃ mukhaṃ ullokayamāno vicaratīti mukhullokako.
他以为“就像天人一样”。所谓“但愿我修福”,意思是:如果我修福,但愿我能成为那样。也有写成“So vatassa'ssa”的版本,意思相同。“Yaṃnūnāhaṃ”是说:我若行布施,那么国王一天所布施的,我就算一辈子也比不上它的百分之一。他由此对出家生起精勤之心,这里显示的就是他这样思惟的状态。巴利
Devo maññeti devo viya. Sovatassāhaṃ puññāni kareyyanti so vata ahaṃ evarūpo assaṃ, yadi puññāni kareyyanti attho. ‘‘So vatassa’ssa’’ntipi pāṭho, ayamevattho. Yaṃnūnāhanti sace dānaṃ dassāmi, yaṃ rājā ekadivasaṃ deti, tato satabhāgampi yāvajīvaṃ na sakkhissāmi dātunti pabbajjāyaṃ ussāhaṃ katvā evaṃ cintanabhāvaṃ dasseti.
“以身防护”的意思是:以身封闭,堵住不善法进入的门。剩下两句也是同样的道理。“以食衣为最上”的意思是:以食衣为最高、最上,也就是说,舍弃不正当的谋生方式,以最高程度的减损知足而住。“乐于远离”的意思是:乐于经中所说的三种远离——身远离属于住在远离处的人,心远离属于欢喜出离的人,依远离属于无执著、已达行灭的人;也就是说,舍弃人群的聚集,以身独住;舍弃心中烦恼的聚集,依八等至而独住;或者进入果等至或灭等至,证得涅槃而住。“Yagghe”是一个表示责备语气的不变词。巴利
Kāyena saṃvutoti kāyena pihito hutvā akusalassa pavesanadvāraṃ thaketvāti attho. Eseva nayo sesapadadvayepi. Ghāsacchādanaparamatāyāti ghāsacchādanena paramatāya uttamatāya, etadatthampi anesanaṃ pahāya aggasallekhena santuṭṭhoti attho. Abhirato paviveketi ‘‘kāyaviveko ca vivekaṭṭhakāyānaṃ, cittaviveko ca nekkhammābhiratānaṃ, paramavodānappattānaṃ upadhiviveko ca nirupadhīnaṃ puggalānaṃ visaṅkhāragatāna’’nti evaṃ vutte tividhepi viveke rato; gaṇasaṅgaṇikaṃ pahāya kāyena eko viharati, cittakilesasaṅgaṇikaṃ pahāya aṭṭhasamāpattivasena eko viharati, phalasamāpattiṃ vā nirodhasamāpattiṃ vā pavisitvā nibbānaṃ patvā viharatīti attho. Yaggheti codanatthe nipāto.
184 184. “我们也可以用座位来邀请”——就是把坐过的座位拍干净,然后说“请坐在这里”。“也要主动邀请他”——就是主动把东西送上去邀请他。这里面,主动送上去有两种方式:用言语和用身体。如果这样说:“在你们想要的时候,需要我们的衣等物品,就尽管开口。”这样说的时候,就是以言语主动送上去邀请。如果看到衣等物品有短缺,就拿出那些东西说“请收下这些”,这样给出去,就是以身体主动送上去邀请。针对这两种情况,所以说“也要主动邀请他”。在这里,“病缘药具”是指任何适合病人的药物。这个词的含义在《清净道论》中已经说过。“守护、遮挡与保护”:就是名为守护和名为遮挡的保护。不过,这种保护如果是安排手持武器的人站岗,就不叫如法的安排。但如果这样安排:在不合适的时间,捡柴的人、采叶的人等不能进入精舍,猎鹿的人等不能在精舍范围内捕鹿或捕鱼,这样安排就叫如法的保护。针对这个,所以说“如法”。巴利
184.Āsanenapinimanteyyāmāti nisinnāsanaṃ papphoṭetvā idha nisīdathāti vadeyyāma. Abhinimanteyyāmapi nanti abhiharitvāpi naṃ nimanteyyāma. Tattha duvidho abhihāro – vācāya ceva kāyena ca. Tumhākaṃ icchiticchitakkhaṇe amhākaṃ cīvarādīhi vadeyyātha yenatthoti vadanto hi vācāya abhiharitvā nimanteti nāma. Cīvarādivekallaṃ sallakkhetvā idaṃ gaṇhāthāti tāni dento pana kāyena abhiharitvā nimanteti nāma. Tadubhayampi sandhāya abhinimanteyyāmapi nanti āha. Ettha ca gilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhāroti yaṃ kiñci gilānassa sappāyaṃ osadhaṃ. Vacanattho pana visuddhimagge vutto. Rakkhāvaraṇaguttinti rakkhāsaṅkhātañceva āvaraṇasaṅkhātañca guttiṃ. Sā panesā na āvudhahatthe purise ṭhapentena dhammikā nāma saṃvidahitā hoti. Yathā pana avelāya kaṭṭhahārikapaṇṇahārikādayo vihāraṃ na pavisanti, migaluddakādayo vihārasīmāya mige vā macche vā na gaṇhanti, evaṃ saṃvidahantena dhammikā nāma rakkhā saṃvihitā hoti, taṃ sandhāyāha – ‘‘dhammika’’nti.
185 如果这样的话:假如你的奴仆能从你那里得到礼敬等。事情若如此。必定:这是一个表示决定的词。第一:说出这个词时,也暗示还有其他存在。正因如此,国王才说:尊者,那么,还能有别的吗?等等。巴利
185.Yadi evaṃ santeti yadi tava dāso tuyhaṃ santikā abhivādanādīni labheyya. Evaṃ sante. Addhāti ekaṃsavacanametaṃ. Paṭhamanti bhaṇanto aññassāpi atthitaṃ dīpeti. Teneva ca rājā sakkā pana, bhante, aññampītiādimāha.
第二项 现见沙门果的注释巴利
Dutiyasandiṭṭhikasāmaññaphalavaṇṇanā
186-188 耕地的人,就叫耕作者。家里的主人,也就是一户人家里的家长,就叫家主。缴纳名为赋税之税的人,就叫作纳税者。让谷堆和财堆增长的人,就叫增堆者。巴利
186-188. Kasatīti kassako. Gehassa pati, ekagehamatte jeṭṭhakoti gahapatiko. Balisaṅkhātaṃ karaṃ karotīti karakārako. Dhaññarāsiṃ dhanarāsiñca vaḍḍhetīti rāsivaḍḍhako.
“少”是指微少,少到甚至只有一升米的量。“财蕴”是指财富的聚集。“大”是指广大。之所以两者都说,是为了表明:就像舍弃大财富出家很难一样,舍弃少的也同样难。而在讲奴隶的那一段里,因为奴隶连对自己都没有自主权,更何况对财富呢。他所拥有的财物,本来就只属于主人,所以那里没有提“财富”。亲族就只是亲族这一类。巴利
Appaṃvāti parittakaṃ vā antamaso taṇḍulanāḷimattakampi. Bhogakkhandhanti bhogarāsiṃ. Mahantaṃ vāti vipulaṃ vā. Yathā hi mahantaṃ pahāya pabbajituṃ dukkaraṃ, evaṃ appampīti dassanatthaṃ ubhayamāha. Dāsavāre pana yasmā dāso attanopi anissaro, pageva bhogānaṃ. Yañhi tassa dhanaṃ, taṃ sāmikānaññeva hoti, tasmā bhogaggahaṇaṃ na kataṃ. Ñātiyeva ñātiparivaṭṭo.
更殊胜的沙门果注释巴利
Paṇītatarasāmaññaphalavaṇṇanā
189 尊者,是否还有其他现见之法?这里没有说“正是如此”。为什么?因为如果说“正是如此”,世尊就能用这类譬喻,讲上一整个日夜甚至更久,来阐明沙门果。虽然听世尊说法本身并没有限度,但世尊心想:“道理大概也就是这样了”,为了进一步询问更殊胜的差别,所以没有说“正是如此”,而是说:“更超越、更殊胜的。”其中,“更超越”是更令人满意、最为殊胜的意思。“更殊胜”是更上等的意思。“那么”是表示催促的虚词。他催促对方听法时,就这样说。“请听”:他请听那更超越、更殊胜的沙门果。巴利
189.Sakkā pana, bhante, aññampi diṭṭheva dhammeti idha evamevāti na vuttaṃ. Taṃ kasmāti ce, evamevāti hi vuccamāne pahoti bhagavā sakalampi rattindivaṃ tato vā bhiyyopi evarūpāhi upamāhi sāmaññaphalaṃ dīpetuṃ. Tattha kiñcāpi etassa bhagavato vacanasavane pariyantaṃ nāma natthi, tathāpi attho tādisoyeva bhavissatīti cintetvā upari visesaṃ pucchanto evamevāti avatvā – ‘‘abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañcā’’ti āha. Tattha abhikkantataranti abhimanāpataraṃ atiseṭṭhataranti attho. Paṇītataranti uttamataraṃ. Tena hīti uyyojanatthe nipāto. Savane uyyojento hi naṃ evamāha. Suṇohīti abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca sāmaññaphalaṃ suṇāti.
“好好作意”这句话里,“好好”和“萨度”是同一个意思。这个“萨度”一词,出现在请求、接受、赞赏、美好、坚定等场合。比如在“萨度,尊者,愿世尊为我简要说法”这类句子里,是出现在请求的场合。在“‘萨度,尊者’那位比丘对世尊所说的话欢喜、随喜之后”这类句子里,是出现在接受的场合。在“萨度!萨度!舍利弗!”这类句子里,是出现在赞赏的场合。巴利
Sādhukaṃ manasikarohīti ettha pana sādhukaṃ sādhūti ekatthametaṃ. Ayañhi sādhu-saddo āyācanasampaṭicchanasampahaṃsanasundara daḷhīkammādīsu dissati. ‘‘Sādhu me, bhante, bhagavā saṅkhittena dhammaṃ desetū’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.95) hi āyācane dissati. ‘‘Sādhu, bhanteti kho so bhikkhu bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinanditvā anumoditvā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.86) sampaṭicchane. ‘‘Sādhu sādhu, sāriputtā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.349) sampahaṃsane.
“ 乐法之王真好,有智慧的人真好。
不背叛朋友是好事,不作恶就是快乐。”巴利
‘‘Sādhu dhammaruci rājā, sādhu paññāṇavā naro; Sādhu mittānamaddubbho, pāpassākaraṇaṃ sukha’’nti. (jā. 2.17.101);
在“美好”等含义中也是这样。比如“那么,婆罗门,请你好好听,好好作意”这类句子中(《增支部》5.192),“sādhuka”这个词既用于表示“坚定地做”,也用于表示“命令”。在这里,也应该理解为它同时表示“坚定地做”和“命令”。它也可以通于“美好”的意思。以“坚定地做”的含义来说,就是“请坚定地听这个法,好好地掌握”;以“命令”的含义来说,就是“请依照我的命令来听”;以“美好”的含义来说,就是“请听这个美好、殊胜的法”——应当这样来理解它所表达的意思。巴利
Ādīsu sundare. ‘‘Tena hi, brāhmaṇa, suṇohi sādhukaṃ manasi karohī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 5.192) sādhukasaddoyeva daḷhīkamme, āṇattiyantipi vuccati . Idhāpi assa ettheva daḷhīkamme ca āṇattiyañca veditabbo. Sundarepi vaṭṭati. Daḷhīkammatthena hi daḷhamimaṃ dhammaṃ suṇāhi, suggahitaṃ gaṇhanto. Āṇattiatthena mama āṇattiyā suṇāhi, sundaratthena sundaramimaṃ bhaddakaṃ dhammaṃ suṇāhīti evaṃ dīpitaṃ hoti.
“请作意”意思是转向、把心对准;“请善加留意”意思是专心听,不让心散乱;“请放在心上”就是它的用意。这里“请听”是用来防止耳根散乱;“请好好作意”则是通过加强对作意的力度,来防止意根散乱。其中,前者防止执取颠倒的文句,后者防止执取颠倒的义理。前者让人投入听闻正法,后者让人对已听闻的法进行忆持、审察等。前者说明:这法文句圆满,所以应当听闻;后者说明:这法义理深奥,所以应当好好作意。或者,把“好好”这个词同时连到两句上来理解:因为这法在法理上深奥、在开示上也深奥,所以你要好好听;因为它在义理上深奥、在证悟上也深奥,所以你要好好作意。“我将宣说”,意思是“大王,可以”——这样应允之后,我将详细宣说《沙门果》。说“我将开示”是简略表达,说“我将宣说”是详细表达。因此,文耆陀长老说:巴利
Manasi karohīti āvajja, samannāharāti attho, avikkhittacitto hutvā nisāmehi, citte karohīti adhippāyo. Api cettha suṇohīti sotindriyavikkhepanivāraṇametaṃ. Sādhukaṃ manasi karohīti manasikāre daḷhīkammaniyojanena manindriyavikkhepanivāraṇaṃ. Purimañcettha byañjanavipallāsaggāhavāraṇaṃ, pacchimaṃ atthavipallāsaggāhavāraṇaṃ. Purimena ca dhammassavane niyojeti, pacchimena sutānaṃ dhammānaṃ dhāraṇūpaparikkhādīsu. Purimena ca sabyañjano ayaṃ dhammo, tasmā savanīyoti dīpeti . Pacchimena sattho, tasmā sādhukaṃ manasi kātabboti. Sādhukapadaṃ vā ubhayapadehi yojetvā yasmā ayaṃ dhammo dhammagambhīro ceva desanāgambhīro ca, tasmā suṇāhi sādhukaṃ, yasmā atthagambhīro ca paṭivedhagambhīro ca, tasmā sādhukaṃ manasi karohīti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā. Bhāsissāmīti sakkā mahārājāti evaṃ paṭiññātaṃ sāmaññaphaladesanaṃ vitthārato bhāsissāmi. ‘‘Desessāmī’’ti hi saṅkhittadīpanaṃ hoti. Bhāsissāmīti vitthāradīpanaṃ. Tenāha vaṅgīsatthero –
“ 他既能简要地开示,也能详细地宣说;
他的声音像画眉鸟一样,宣说出无碍的辩才。”巴利
‘‘Saṅkhittenapi deseti, vitthārenapi bhāsati; Sāḷikāyiva nigghoso, paṭibhānaṃ udīrayī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.214);
世尊这样说后,阿阇世王——摩揭陀国的国王、韦迭希的儿子——生起了踊跃之心,回应道:“是的,尊者。”他这样回应世尊,赞同并领受了世尊的话。这里的意思是:他赞同并领受了世尊所说的话。巴利
Evaṃ vutte ussāhajāto hutvā – ‘‘evaṃ, bhante’’ti kho rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto bhagavato paccassosi bhagavato vacanaṃ sampaṭicchi, paṭiggahesīti vuttaṃ hoti.
190 190. 于是世尊对他说了这番话,说了这个;意思是,现在要说的“大王,在此……”等整部经,世尊都说了。其中,“在此”(idha)是一个表示处所的虚词,有时是依“世间”而说的,比如:“如来出现于此世间。”有时是依“教法”而说的,比如:“比丘们,第一沙门唯在此,第二沙门在此。”有时是依“空间/处所”而说的,比如:巴利
190. Athassa bhagavā etadavoca, etaṃ avoca, idāni vattabbaṃ ‘‘idha mahārājā’’tiādiṃ sakalaṃ suttaṃ avocāti attho. Tattha idhāti desāpadese nipāto, svāyaṃ katthaci lokaṃ upādāya vuccati. Yathāha – ‘‘idha tathāgato loke uppajjatī’’ti. Katthaci sāsanaṃ yathāha – ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, paṭhamo samaṇo, idha dutiyo samaṇo’’ti (a. ni. 4.241). Katthaci okāsaṃ. Yathāha –
“ 我今正立于此,身为天众而存在;
我又重获寿命,贤友,当如是知。”巴利
‘‘Idheva tiṭṭhamānassa, devabhūtassa me sato; Punarāyu ca me laddho, evaṃ jānāhi mārisā’’ti. (dī. ni. 2.369);
在某些地方,它只是用来补足句子的音节而已。比如经中说:“比丘们,我在这里已经吃过了,已经吃饱了。”但在这里,应当理解为是依据“世间”而说的。“大王”——为了宣说先前已经答应过的教法,又再次称呼“大王”。这里说的是:“大王,在这个世间里,如来出现,他是阿拉汉……乃至……佛陀、世尊。”其中,“如来”这个词在《梵网经》里已经解释过了。“阿拉汉”等词在《清净道论》里已经详细解释过了。“出现于世间”这里,“世间”有三种:空间世间、有情世间、行世间。但这里指的是有情世间。而且,如来出现于有情世间时,不是在天界,不是在梵天界,而只是在人界。在人界中,也不是在别的轮围世界,而正是在这个轮围世界。在这个轮围世界里,也不是在所有地方,而是在这样一个划定范围的中间区域:东边有个叫伽姜伽罗的镇,那再过去有大娑罗树,从那再过去就是边地,以内是中央;东南方有条叫沙罗伐底的河,从那再过去是边地,以内是中央;南方有个叫白耳迦尼迦的镇,从那再过去是边地,以内是中央;西方有个叫图那的婆罗门村,从那再过去是边地,以内是中央;北方有座叫乌西罗陀迦的山,从那再过去是边地,以内是中央。这样划定范围,长三百由旬,宽二百五十由旬,周围九百由旬,就在这个中间区域里出现。不只是如来,独觉佛、上首弟子、八十位大长老、佛陀的母亲、佛陀的父亲、转轮王,以及其他达到核心成就的婆罗门和居士,也都是在这里出现的。巴利
Katthaci padapūraṇamattameva. Yathāha ‘‘idhāhaṃ, bhikkhave, bhuttāvī assaṃ pavārito’’ti (ma. ni. 1.30). Idha pana lokaṃ upādāya vuttoti veditabbo. Mahārājāti yathā paṭiññātaṃ desanaṃ desetuṃ puna mahārājāti ālapati. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘mahārāja imasmiṃ loke tathāgato uppajjati arahaṃ…pe… buddho bhagavā’’ti. Tattha tathāgatasaddo brahmajāle vutto. Arahantiādayo visuddhimagge vitthāritā. Loke uppajjatīti ettha pana lokoti – okāsaloko sattaloko saṅkhāralokoti tividho. Idha pana sattaloko adhippeto. Sattaloke uppajjamānopi ca tathāgato na devaloke, na brahmaloke, manussalokeva uppajjati. Manussalokepi na aññasmiṃ cakkavāḷe, imasmiṃyeva cakkavāḷe. Tatrāpi na sabbaṭṭhānesu, ‘‘puratthimāya disāya gajaṅgalaṃ nāma nigamo tassāparena mahāsālo, tato parā paccantimā janapadā orato majjhe, puratthimadakkhiṇāya disāya salaḷavatī nāma nadī. Tato parā paccantimā janapadā, orato majjhe, dakkhiṇāya disāya setakaṇṇikaṃ nāma nigamo, tato parā paccantimā janapadā, orato majjhe, pacchimāya disāya thūṇaṃ nāma brāhmaṇagāmo, tato parā paccantimā janapadā, orato majjhe, uttarāya disāya usiraddhajo nāma pabbato, tato parā paccantimā janapadā orato majjhe’’ti evaṃ paricchinne āyāmato tiyojanasate, vitthārato aḍḍhateyyayojanasate, parikkhepato navayojanasate majjhimapadese uppajjati. Na kevalañca tathāgato, paccekabuddhā, aggasāvakā, asītimahātherā, buddhamātā, buddhapitā, cakkavattī rājā aññe ca sārappattā brāhmaṇagahapatikā etthevuppajjanti.
在这里,从善生女供养乳粥开始,一直到阿拉汉道,这期间称为“出现”;在阿拉汉果位,则称为“已出现”。或者从大出离开始,一直到阿拉汉道。或者从兜率天开始,一直到阿拉汉道。或者从燃灯佛足下发愿开始,一直到阿拉汉道,这期间称为“出现”;在阿拉汉果位,则称为“已出现”。这里是根据最初出现的情形而说“出现”。如来出现于世间,这就是此处的意思。巴利
Tattha tathāgato sujātāya dinnamadhupāyāsabhojanato yāva arahattamaggo, tāva uppajjati nāma, arahattaphale uppanno nāma. Mahābhinikkhamanato vā yāva arahattamaggo. Tusitabhavanato vā yāva arahattamaggo. Dīpaṅkarapādamūlato vā yāva arahattamaggo, tāva uppajjati nāma, arahattaphale uppanno nāma. Idha sabbapaṭhamaṃ uppannabhāvaṃ sandhāya uppajjatīti vuttaṃ. Tathāgato loke uppanno hotīti ayañhettha attho.
那个世间:那位世尊,就是这世间。现在要指出接下来应当说明的内容。含天神的:就是与诸天神一起,所以叫含天神的。同样,与魔罗一起叫含魔罗的,与梵天神一起叫含梵天神的,与沙门婆罗门一起叫含沙门婆罗门的。生类:因为是由出生而有的,所以叫生类,那就是众生。含天人的:就是与天和人一起。其中,通过含天神的这个词,应当知道是指五欲界天;通过含魔罗的这个词,是指第六欲界天;通过含梵天神的这个词,是指梵身天等梵天界;通过含沙门婆罗门这个词,一方面是指那些作为教法之敌、站在对立面的沙门婆罗门,另一方面也指已经止息恶法、已经排除恶法的沙门婆罗门;通过生类这个词,是指有情世间;通过含天人的这个词,是指世俗所说的天以及其余的人。因此在这里应当这样理解:以三个词摄取了连同器世间的有情世间,以两个词则纯粹就有情世间而摄取了有情世间。巴利
So imaṃ lokanti so bhagavā imaṃ lokaṃ. Idāni vattabbaṃ nidasseti. Sadevakanti saha devehi sadevakaṃ. Evaṃ saha mārena samārakaṃ, saha brahmunā sabrahmakaṃ, saha samaṇabrāhmaṇehi sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṃ. Pajātattā pajā, taṃ pajaṃ. Saha devamanussehi sadevamanussaṃ. Tattha sadevakavacanena pañca kāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Samāraka – vacanena chaṭṭhakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ. Sabrahmakavacanena brahmakāyikādibrahmaggahaṇaṃ. Sassamaṇabrāhmaṇīvacanena sāsanassa paccatthikapaccāmittasamaṇabrāhmaṇaggahaṇaṃ, samitapāpabāhitapāpasamaṇabrāhmaṇaggahaṇañca. Pajāvacanena sattalokaggahaṇaṃ. Sadevamanussavacanena sammutidevaavasesamanussaggahaṇaṃ. Evamettha tīhi padehi okāsalokena saddhiṃ sattaloko. Dvīhi pajāvasena sattalokova gahitoti veditabbo.
另一种理解方式是:用“含天神的”这一说法,涵盖了无色界天世间;用“含魔罗的”这一说法,涵盖了六欲天世间;用“含梵天的”这一说法,涵盖了有色梵天世间;用“含沙门婆罗门等”这一说法,则是按四众弟子来说,指与世俗所说的天共同存在的人间世间,或者指其余一切有情世间。巴利
Aparo nayo, sadevakaggahaṇena arūpāvacaradevaloko gahito. Samārakaggahaṇena cha kāmāvacaradevaloko. Sabrahmakaggahaṇena rūpī brahmaloko. Sassamaṇabrāhmaṇādiggahaṇena catuparisavasena sammutidevehi vā saha manussaloko, avasesasabbasattaloko vā.
这里,通过“连同诸天神”这一说法,从最高层次的界定,说明整个世间都是(佛陀)所亲证的。于是,有些人产生了疑惑:“魔罗有大威神力,是六欲天的自在主宰、他化自在者,难道连他也被(佛陀)亲证了吗?”为了消除他们的疑惑,便说“连同魔罗”。又有些人这样想:“梵天神有大威神力,用一个手指就能照亮一千个轮围世界,用两个手指……乃至用十个手指就能照亮一万个轮围世界,还享受无上的禅定之乐,难道连他也被亲证了吗?”为了消除他们的疑惑,便说“连同梵天神”。接着,有些人又想到:“许多沙门、婆罗门是教法的敌人,难道连他们也被亲证了吗?”为了消除他们的疑惑,便说“连同沙门婆罗门及众生”。这样,先说明了最高层次者被亲证的情况,然后依据世俗的天和其余人类,从最高层次的界定角度,说明其余有情世间也被亲证,所以说“连同诸天神与人”。这就是此处层层递进的次第。巴利
Api cettha sadevakavacanena ukkaṭṭhaparicchedato sabbassa lokassa sacchikatabhāvamāha. Tato yesaṃ ahosi – ‘‘māro mahānubhāvo cha kāmāvacarissaro vasavattī, kiṃ sopi etena sacchikato’’ti, tesaṃ vimatiṃ vidhamanto ‘‘samāraka’’nti āha. Yesaṃ pana ahosi – ‘‘brahmā mahānubhāvo ekaṅguliyā ekasmiṃ cakkavāḷasahasse ālokaṃ pharati, dvīhi …pe… dasahi aṅgulīhi dasasu cakkavāḷasahassesu ālokaṃ pharati. Anuttarañca jhānasamāpattisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti, kiṃ sopi sacchikato’’ti, tesaṃ vimatiṃ vidhamanto sabrahmakanti āha. Tato ye cintesuṃ – ‘‘puthū samaṇabrāhmaṇā sāsanassa paccatthikā, kiṃ tepi sacchikatā’’ti, tesaṃ vimatiṃ vidhamanto sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṃ pajanti āha. Evaṃ ukkaṭṭhukkaṭṭhānaṃ sacchikatabhāvaṃ pakāsetvā atha sammutideve avasesamanusse ca upādāya ukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasena sesasattalokassa sacchikatabhāvaṃ pakāsento sadevamanussanti āha. Ayamettha bhāvānukkamo.
古师们则说:“含诸天神的”,是指与诸天神一起的其余世间。“含魔的”,是指与魔罗一起的其余世间。“含梵天的”,是指与梵天一起的其余世间。这样,先用三种方式把三界一切有情都收进这三句里,接着又用两句来总括,所以说“含沙门、婆罗门,含众生、天人”。这样一来,通过这五句,就按各自的方式把三界完全统摄尽了。巴利
Porāṇā panāhu sadevakanti devehi saddhiṃ avasesalokaṃ. Samārakanti mārena saddhiṃ avasesalokaṃ. Sabrahmakanti brahmehi saddhiṃ avasesalokaṃ. Evaṃ sabbepi tibhavūpage satte tīhākārehi tīsu padesu pakkhipitvā puna dvīhi padehi pariyādiyanto sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṃ pajaṃ sadevamanussanti āha. Evaṃ pañcahipi padehi tena tenākārena tedhātukameva pariyādinnanti.
“自己证知、亲自现证之后而宣说”:这里“自己”是指不依靠他人引导、独立而证。“证知”就是通过证知、以殊胜的智慧了知的意思。“现证”就是令其现前、亲自体证,这样也就排除了类比推理等认知方式。“宣说”就是使人觉悟、使人了知、加以开显。巴利
Sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedetīti ettha pana sayanti sāmaṃ aparaneyyo hutvā. Abhiññāti abhiññāya, adhikena ñāṇena ñatvāti attho. Sacchikatvāti paccakkhaṃ katvā, etena anumānādipaṭikkhepo kato hoti. Pavedetīti bodheti viññāpeti pakāseti.
他宣说初善、中善、后善的法:这位世尊因为悲悯众生,即使舍弃了无上的远离之乐,仍然为众生说法。而且无论说得少还是说得多,他都只是以初善等方式来说。也就是说,在开头,他以善妙、良善、没有过失的方式来说;在中间也一样,在结尾也一样,都以善妙、良善、没有过失的方式来说。这里,教说有初、中、后,教法也有初、中、后。就教说而言,即使是一首四句偈,第一句名为初,中间两句名为中,最后一句名为后。对于单一相续的经,序分是初,“这是我所说”是后,两者之间是中。对于多相续的经,第一相续是初,最后的相续是后,中间的一相续、两相续或众多相续就是中。巴利
So dhammaṃ deseti ādikalyāṇaṃ…pe… pariyosānakalyāṇanti so bhagavā sattesu kāruññataṃ paṭicca hitvāpi anuttaraṃ vivekasukhaṃ dhammaṃ deseti. Tañca kho appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā desento ādikalyāṇādippakārameva deseti. Ādimhipi, kalyāṇaṃ bhaddakaṃ anavajjameva katvā deseti, majjhepi, pariyosānepi, kalyāṇaṃ bhaddakaṃ anavajjameva katvā desetīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha atthi desanāya ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ, atthi sāsanassa. Desanāya tāva catuppadikāyapi gāthāya paṭhamapādo ādi nāma, tato dve majjhaṃ nāma, ante eko pariyosānaṃ nāma. Ekānusandhikassa suttassa nidānaṃ ādi, idamavocāti pariyosānaṃ, ubhinnamantarā majjhaṃ. Anekānusandhikassa suttassa paṭhamānusandhi ādi, ante anusandhi pariyosānaṃ, majjhe eko vā dve vā bahū vā majjhameva.
不过,对于教法来说,戒、定、观才是它的开端。经里也这样说:“什么是善法的开端?就是清净的戒和正直的见。”而像“诸比丘,有中道,是如来所证悟的”这样说的圣道,就是中间。果和涅槃则是终点。经中说:“婆罗门,梵行就是为了这个目的,这就是它的核心,这就是它的终点”,这里是把果说为终点。又说:“毗舍佉贤友,梵行被称为以涅槃为归宿,以涅槃为归趣,以涅槃为终点”,这里是把涅槃说为终点。这里指的是教说的初、中、后。因为世尊说法时,开头显示戒,中间显示道,最后显示涅槃。所以说:“他开示初善、中善、后善的法。”因此,其他说法的人说法时,也应当这样——巴利
Sāsanassa pana sīlasamādhivipassanā ādi nāma. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘ko cādi kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ? Sīlañca suvisuddhaṃ diṭṭhi ca ujukā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.369). ‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, majjhimā paṭipadā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā’’ti evaṃ vutto pana ariyamaggo majjhaṃ nāma. Phalañceva nibbānañca pariyosānaṃ nāma. ‘‘Etadatthamidaṃ, brāhmaṇa, brahmacariyaṃ, etaṃ sāraṃ, etaṃ pariyosāna’’nti (ma. ni. 1.324) hi ettha phalaṃ pariyosānanti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Nibbānogadhaṃ hi, āvuso visākha, brahmacariyaṃ vussati, nibbānaparāyanaṃ nibbānapariyosāna’’nti (ma. ni. 1.466) ettha nibbānaṃ pariyosānanti vuttaṃ. Idha desanāya ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ adhippetaṃ. Bhagavā hi dhammaṃ desento ādimhi sīlaṃ dassetvā majjhe maggaṃ pariyosāne nibbānaṃ dasseti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘so dhammaṃ deseti ādikalyāṇaṃ majjhekalyāṇaṃ pariyosānakalyāṇa’’nti. Tasmā aññopi dhammakathiko dhammaṃ kathento –
“ 开头要展示戒,中间要讲清楚道;
最后归结到涅槃,这就是说法者的立足点。”巴利
‘‘Ādimhi sīlaṃ dasseyya, majjhe maggaṃ vibhāvaye; Pariyosānamhi nibbānaṃ, esā kathikasaṇṭhitī’’ti.
“有义有文”:如果一个人的开示是依靠粥、饭食、女人、男人之类的描述来展开的,那他就不是在“有义”地开示。而世尊舍弃了那样的开示,只教导以四念处等为基础的开示,因此被称为“有义地开示”。反过来,如果一个人的开示只有单个音节,或者完全没有唇音,或者所有送气音、所有鼻音都缺失,那么由于音韵不完整,就像达米勒人、吉罗陀人、娑婆罗人等边地部族的语言一样,这就叫作“无文”的开示。而世尊——巴利
Sātthaṃ sabyañjananti yassa hi yāgubhattaitthipurisādivaṇṇanānissitā desanā hoti, na so sātthaṃ deseti. Bhagavā pana tathārūpaṃ desanaṃ pahāya catusatipaṭṭhānādinissitaṃ desanaṃ deseti. Tasmā sātthaṃ desetīti vuccati. Yassa pana desanā ekabyañjanādiyuttā vā sabbaniroṭṭhabyañjanā vā sabbavissaṭṭhasabbaniggahītabyañjanā vā, tassa damiḷakirātasavarādimilakkhūnaṃ bhāsā viya byañjanapāripūriyā abhāvato abyañjanā nāma desanā hoti. Bhagavā pana –
“ 松弛音和紧绷音,长音和短音,重音和轻音,还有鼻音;
结合与确立,以及解脱:依靠对音节的辨别,就有这十种分类。”巴利
‘‘Sithilaṃ dhanitañca dīgharassaṃ, garukaṃ lahukañca niggahītaṃ; Sambandhavavatthitaṃ vimuttaṃ, dasadhā byañjanabuddhiyā pabhedo’’ti.
像这样,说法时不破坏这十种文句,而让文句完整无缺地呈现出来,然后才说法,因此被称为“教导具有完整文句的法”。在“完全圆满”这个说法里,“完全”是“全部”的意思,“圆满”是“不多不少”的意思。这里说的是:所教导的确实是整体圆满的,连一部分不圆满的情况都不存在。因为没有什么需要补充,也没有什么需要去掉,所以应当理解为“完全圆满”。“清净”是指没有杂染。如果有人想靠着这个法教获得利养或恭敬而说法,他的开示就是不清净的。但世尊不看重世间的利养,以遍及一切众生的利益之心,通过修慈使心地柔软,安住在救拔众生的状态中,以这样的心来说法。因此被称为“教导清净的法”。巴利
Evaṃ vuttaṃ dasavidhaṃ byañjanaṃ amakkhetvā paripuṇṇabyañjanameva katvā dhammaṃ deseti, tasmā sabyañjanaṃ dhammaṃ desetīti vuccati. Kevalaparipuṇṇanti ettha kevalanti sakalādhivacanaṃ. Paripuṇṇanti anūnādhikavacanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti sakalaparipuṇṇameva deseti, ekadesanāpi aparipuṇṇā natthīti. Upanetabbaapanetabbassa abhāvato kevalaparipuṇṇanti veditabbaṃ. Parisuddhanti nirupakkilesaṃ. Yo hi imaṃ dhammadesanaṃ nissāya lābhaṃ vā sakkāraṃ vā labhissāmīti deseti, tassa aparisuddhā desanā hoti. Bhagavā pana lokāmisanirapekkho hitapharaṇena mettābhāvanāya muduhadayo ullumpanasabhāvasaṇṭhitena cittena deseti. Tasmā parisuddhaṃ dhammaṃ desetīti vuccati.
“阐明梵行”在这里,“梵行”这个词出现在这些含义中:布施、服务、五学处戒、四无量心、远离淫欲、满足于自己的妻子、精进、伍波萨他戒支、圣道、教法。巴利
Brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetīti ettha panāyaṃ brahmacariya-saddo dāne veyyāvacce pañcasikkhāpadasīle appamaññāsu methunaviratiyaṃ sadārasantose vīriye uposathaṅgesu ariyamagge sāsaneti imesvatthesu dissati.
“ 你的誓愿是什么?梵行又是什么?
这果报是何等善修所得?
神通、光辉、力量与精进的成就,
这是你的大宫殿,龙象。
我和妻子在人间的时候,
我们俩都曾是有信心的施主。
那时我的家就像一口随时能打水的井。
沙门婆罗门都得到了满足。
此即我之誓愿,此即彼梵行;
彼善修者,此为其果报。
神通、光辉、力量与精进的成就,
智者啊,这也是我的大宫殿。”巴利
‘‘Kiṃ te vataṃ kiṃ pana brahmacariyaṃ, Kissa suciṇṇassa ayaṃ vipāko; Iddhī jutī balavīriyūpapatti, Idañca te nāga, mahāvimānaṃ. Ahañca bhariyā ca manussaloke, Saddhā ubho dānapatī ahumhā; Opānabhūtaṃ me gharaṃ tadāsi, Santappitā samaṇabrāhmaṇā ca. Taṃ me vataṃ taṃ pana brahmacariyaṃ, Tassa suciṇṇassa ayaṃ vipāko; Iddhī jutī balavīriyūpapatti, Idañca me dhīra mahāvimāna’’nti. (jā. 2.17.1595);
在这部《布纳咖本生》里,布施被称为梵行。巴利
Imasmiñhi puṇṇakajātake dānaṃ brahmacariyanti vuttaṃ.
“ 因为什么,手能施与所欲?因为什么,手能流出甘蜜?
你凭什么样的梵行,福德才在手中得以圆满?
因为那,手能施予所欲;因为那,手流着甘蜜。
因为我的这份梵行,福德就在手中圆满成就。”巴利
‘‘Kena pāṇi kāmadado, kena pāṇi madhussavo; Kena te brahmacariyena, puññaṃ pāṇimhi ijjhati. Tena pāṇi kāmadado, tena pāṇi madhussavo; Tena me brahmacariyena, puññaṃ pāṇimhi ijjhatī’’ti. (pe. va. 275,277);
在《嫩芽饿鬼事》里,把服侍称为梵行。在《鹧鸪本生》里说:“比丘们,就是这样,那个名叫鹧鸪的梵行确实存在过。”(《小品》311)这里把五学处戒称为梵行。在《大典尊经》里说:“五髻啊,我那个梵行,不是为了厌离,不是为了离贪,不是为了灭尽……只是为了投生到梵天界而已。”(《长部》2.329)这里把四无量称为梵行。在《削减经》里说:“别人会成为非梵行者,我们在这里要成为梵行者。”(《中部》1.83)这里把远离淫欲称为梵行。巴利
Imasmiṃ aṅkurapetavatthumhi veyyāvaccaṃ brahmacariyanti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ, kho taṃ bhikkhave, tittiriyaṃ nāma brahmacariyaṃ ahosī’’ti (cūḷava. 311) imasmiṃ tittirajātake pañcasikkhāpadasīlaṃ brahmacariyanti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Taṃ kho pana me, pañcasikha, brahmacariyaṃ neva nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya…pe… yāvadeva brahmalokūpapattiyā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.329) imasmiṃ mahāgovindasutte catasso appamaññāyo brahmacariyanti vuttā. ‘‘Pare abrahmacārī bhavissanti, mayamettha brahmacārī bhavissāmā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.83) imasmiṃ sallekhasutte methunavirati brahmacariyanti vuttā.
“ 我等不越妻,
妻众亦不越我。
除了她们,我们修梵行。
所以,我们年轻人确实不会死。”巴利
‘‘Mayañca bhariyā nātikkamāma, Amhe ca bhariyā nātikkamanti; Aññatra tāhi brahmacariyaṃ carāma, Tasmā hi amhaṃ daharā na mīyare’’ti. (jā. 1.4.97);
在《大护法本生》中,满足于自己的妻子被称为梵行。而在《毛发竖立经》中说:“舍利弗,我确实记得我曾修习具足四支的梵行,那时我确实是苦行僧。”(《中部》第1册第155节)在这部经里,精进被称为梵行。巴利
Mahādhammapālajātake sadārasantoso brahmacariyanti vutto. ‘‘Abhijānāmi kho panāhaṃ, sāriputta, caturaṅgasamannāgataṃ brahmacariyaṃ caritā, tapassī sudaṃ homī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.155) lomahaṃsanasutte vīriyaṃ brahmacariyanti vuttaṃ.
“ 以低劣的梵行,投生在刹帝利族中;
以中等的梵行,生到天界;以最殊胜的梵行,则得净化。”巴利
‘‘Hīnena brahmacariyena, khattiye upapajjati; Majjhimena ca devattaṃ, uttamena visujjhatī’’ti. (jā. 1.8.75);
在《尼米本生》里,为了调伏自己而受持的八支伍波萨他,被称为梵行。“五髻啊,我这种梵行,完全是为了厌离、离贪、灭尽……乃至……就是这圣八支道。”在《大典尊经》里,圣道被称为梵行。“这种梵行成就、兴旺、广布、为众人所知、广泛流传,直到被天和人好好宣说。”在《清净经》里,包含三学的整个教法被称为梵行。在这里,所指的也正是这种梵行。所以说“阐明梵行”,就是宣说“初善……乃至……清净”的法。当他这样宣说时,就是在阐明包含三学的整个教法的梵行,应当这样理解这里的含义。“梵行”:从最殊胜的意义上说,就是像梵那样的行持;或者说,是已成为梵者——佛陀等——的行持。巴利
Evaṃ nimijātake attadamanavasena kato aṭṭhaṅgiko uposatho brahmacariyanti vutto. ‘‘Idaṃ kho pana me, pañcasikha, brahmacariyaṃ ekantanibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya…pe… ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo’’ti (dī. ni. 2.329) mahāgovindasuttasmiṃyeva ariyamaggo brahmacariyanti vutto. ‘‘Tayidaṃ brahmacariyaṃ iddhañceva phītañca vitthārikaṃ bāhujaññaṃ puthubhūtaṃ yāva devamanussehi suppakāsita’’nti (dī. ni. 3.174) pāsādikasutte sikkhattayasaṅgahitaṃ sakalasāsanaṃ brahmacariyanti vuttaṃ. Imasmimpi ṭhāne idameva brahmacariyanti adhippetaṃ. Tasmā brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetīti so dhammaṃ deseti ādikalyāṇaṃ…pe… parisuddhaṃ. Evaṃ desento ca sikkhattayasaṅgahitaṃ sakalasāsanaṃ brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Brahmacariyanti seṭṭhaṭṭhena brahmabhūtaṃ cariyaṃ. Brahmabhūtānaṃ vā buddhādīnaṃ cariyanti vuttaṃ hoti.
191 “那法”:就是具有上面所说的那种成就的法。“或者居士听闻”:为什么首先提到居士呢?因为他们已经摧破了我慢,而且人数众多。一般来说,从刹帝利家族出家的人,会依靠出身而心生我慢;从婆罗门家族出家的人,会依靠咒术而心生我慢;从低贱种姓家族出家的人,也无法凭自己的出身站稳脚跟。可是居士家的子弟不一样,他们腋下流着汗、背上结着盐霜,亲自耕种田地,因为没有那种我慢,所以已经摧破了我慢和骄矜。他们出家以后,不摆我慢也不摆骄矜,尽自己所能学习全部佛陀的教法,修习观禅,就能够证得阿拉汉果。而且从其他家族出家的人并不多,居士才是多数。因此,由于他们已经摧破我慢并且人数众多,所以首先提到居士。巴利
191.Taṃ dhammanti taṃ vuttappakārasampadaṃ dhammaṃ. Suṇāti gahapati vāti kasmā paṭhamaṃ gahapatiṃ niddisati? Nihatamānattā, ussannattā ca. Yebhuyyena hi khattiyakulato pabbajitā jātiṃ nissāya mānaṃ karonti. Brāhmaṇakulā pabbajitā mante nissāya mānaṃ karonti. Hīnajaccakulā pabbajitā attano attano vijātitāya patiṭṭhātuṃ na sakkonti. Gahapatidārakā pana kacchehi sedaṃ muñcantehi piṭṭhiyā loṇaṃ pupphamānāya bhūmiṃ kasitvā tādisassa mānassa abhāvato nihatamānadappā honti. Te pabbajitvā mānaṃ vā dappaṃ vā akatvā yathābalaṃ sakalabuddhavacanaṃ uggahetvā vipassanāya kammaṃ karontā sakkonti arahatte patiṭṭhātuṃ. Itarehi ca kulehi nikkhamitvā pabbajitā nāma na bahukā, gahapatikāva bahukā. Iti nihatamānattā ussannattā ca paṭhamaṃ gahapatiṃ niddisatīti.
或者,其他家族中的某一家。再生,就是再出生。对如来获得信心,意思是:听闻清净的法之后,对法主如来生起信心:“那位世尊确实是正自觉者。”他这样反思,就是这样观察。居家生活是拥挤的,意思是:即使夫妻二人住在六十肘大的房子里,或者彼此相距一百由旬,只要还有牵挂和障碍,居家生活就是拥挤的。尘路,按照《大注释》的说法,是贪尘等生起的地方。也有人说是来路。因为不粘着,就像露天一样,所以叫露天。出家的人即使住在尖顶屋、宝殿、天宫等门窗紧闭的隐蔽处,也终究不粘着、不执取、不被束缚。因此说“出家是露天”。再者,居家生活拥挤,是因为没有行善的空间;尘路,就像不设防的垃圾堆,是烦恼尘聚集的地方;出家是露天,是因为行善有充分自由的空间。巴利
Aññatarasmiṃ vāti itaresaṃ vā kulānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ. Paccājātoti patijāto. Tathāgate saddhaṃ paṭilabhatīti parisuddhaṃ dhammaṃ sutvā dhammassāmimhi tathāgate – ‘‘sammāsambuddho vata so bhagavā’’ti saddhaṃ paṭilabhati. Iti paṭisañcikkhatīti evaṃ paccavekkhati. Sambādho gharāvāsoti sacepi saṭṭhihatthe ghare yojanasatantarepi vā dve jāyampatikā vasanti, tathāpi nesaṃ sakiñcanasapalibodhaṭṭhena gharāvāso sambādhoyeva. Rajopathoti rāgarajādīnaṃ uṭṭhānaṭṭhānanti mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Āgamanapathotipi vadanti. Alagganaṭṭhena abbhokāso viyāti abbhokāso. Pabbajito hi kūṭāgāraratanapāsādadevavimānādīsu pihitadvāravātapānesu paṭicchannesu vasantopi neva laggati, na sajjati, na bajjhati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘abbhokāso pabbajjā’’ti. Api ca sambādho gharāvāso kusalakiriyāya okāsābhāvato. Rajopatho asaṃvutasaṅkāraṭṭhānaṃ viya rajānaṃ kilesarajānaṃ sannipātaṭṭhānato. Abbhokāso pabbajjā kusalakiriyāya yathāsukhaṃ okāsasabbhāvato.
“这并不容易……我应当出家”:这里简要说明一下。这个由三学组成的梵行生活,必须做到哪怕只是一天也不破戒,一直到临终最后一念都保持绝对圆满;必须做到哪怕只是一天也不被烦恼的污垢染污,一直到临终最后一念都保持绝对清净。应当像磨光的螺贝、洗净的螺贝那样来行持。住在家里、身处居家环境中的人,要这样行持到绝对圆满……乃至……绝对清净,并不容易。那么,我何不剃掉头发和胡须,穿上染色树皮汁所染、适合出家修行者的袈裟,从家里出来,出家去过没有家的生活呢?这里,种田、经商等对家庭有益的事业称为“家业”,而出家没有这些,所以应当知道出家就是“无家”,也就是没有家的状态。“我应当出家”:就是我应当去实行出家这条路。巴利
Nayidaṃsukaraṃ…pe… pabbajeyyanti etthāyaṃ saṅkhepakathā, yadetaṃ sikkhattayabrahmacariyaṃ ekampi divasaṃ akhaṇḍaṃ katvā carimakacittaṃ pāpetabbatāya ekantaparipuṇṇaṃ, caritabbaṃ ekadivasampi ca kilesamalena amalīnaṃ katvā carimakacittaṃ pāpetabbatāya ekantaparisuddhaṃ . Saṅkhalikhitanti likhitasaṅkhasadisaṃ dhotasaṅkhasappaṭibhāgaṃ caritabbaṃ. Idaṃ na sukaraṃ agāraṃ ajjhāvasatā agāramajjhe vasantena ekantaparipuṇṇaṃ…pe… carituṃ, yaṃnūnāhaṃ kese ca massuñca ohāretvā kasāyarasapītatāya kāsāyāni brahmacariyaṃ carantānaṃ anucchavikāni vatthāni acchādetvā paridahitvā agārasmā nikkhamitvā anagāriyaṃ pabbajeyyanti. Ettha ca yasmā agārassa hitaṃ kasivāṇijjādikammaṃ agāriyanti vuccati, tañca pabbajjāya natthi, tasmā pabbajjā anagāriyanti ñātabbā, taṃ anagāriyaṃ. Pabbajeyyanti paṭipajjeyyaṃ.
192-193 “少”:一千以下的财富聚集,称为少;从一千开始,就是多。“亲族圈”:因为具有系缚的意义,亲族本身就叫亲族圈。二十人以下也称为少,从二十人开始就是多。“巴帝摩卡防护者”:就是具足巴帝摩卡防护。“仪行与行处具足者”:就是在仪行和行处上都具足。“于微小罪”:就是在微细的过失上。“于诸过失”:就是在诸不善法上。“见怖畏者”:就是见到怖畏。“正受持”:就是正确地受持之后。“于诸学处学”:就是在诸学处上,逐条正确地受持而学。这里是简略说明,详细说明则在《清净道论》中说过。巴利
192-193.Appaṃ vāti sahassato heṭṭhā bhogakkhandho appo nāma hoti, sahassato paṭṭhāya mahā. Ābandhanaṭṭhena ñātiyeva ñātiparivaṭṭo. Sopi vīsatiyā heṭṭhā appo nāma hoti, vīsatiyā paṭṭhāya mahā. Pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutoti pātimokkhasaṃvarena samannāgato. Ācāragocarasampannoti ācārena ceva gocarena ca sampanno. Aṇumattesūti appamattakesu. Vajjesūti akusaladhammesu. Bhayadassāvīti bhayadassī. Samādāyāti sammā ādiyitvā. Sikkhati sikkhāpadesūti sikkhāpadesu taṃ taṃ sikkhāpadaṃ samādiyitvā sikkhati. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimagge vutto.
具足善的身业和语业,活命清净:在这里,通过仪行和行处的把握,已经包含了善的身业和语业。然而,这种名为“活命清净戒”的戒,并不是生在虚空里或树顶上等处,而只是生在身门和语门中;所以,为了显示它生起的门,才说“具足善的身业和语业”。又因为具足了这些,所以就是“活命清净”。或者,这也是依据《沙门文荼迦经》(中部2.260)而说的。在那部经里确实这样说:“木匠,什么是善戒?我说善的身业、善的语业以及清净的活命,这些都属于戒。”因为具足了这些,所以应当知道就是“活命清净”。巴利
Kāyakammavacīkammena samannāgato kusalena parisuddhājīvoti ettha ācāragocaraggahaṇeneva ca kusale kāyakammavacīkamme gahitepi yasmā idaṃ ājīvapārisuddhisīlaṃ nāma na ākāse vā rukkhaggādīsu vā uppajjati, kāyavacīdvāresuyeva pana uppajjati; tasmā tassa uppattidvāradassanatthaṃ kāyakammavacīkammena samannāgato kusalenāti vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana tena samannāgato, tasmā parisuddhājīvo. Samaṇamuṇḍikaputtasuttantavasena (ma. ni. 2.260) vā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha hi ‘‘katame ca, thapati, kusalā sīlā? Kusalaṃ kāyakammaṃ, kusalaṃ vacīkammaṃ, parisuddhaṃ ājīvampi kho ahaṃ thapati sīlasmiṃ vadāmī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana tena samannāgato, tasmā parisuddhājīvoti veditabbo.
戒具足:就是具备《梵网经》里说的三种戒。守护根门:就是在包括意根在内的六根上把门关好。具备正念与正知:就是在前进、返回等七种情况下,都有正念和正知。知足:就是对衣服、饮食、住处、医药这四种生活所需,以三种知足而感到满足。巴利
Sīlasampannoti brahmajāle vuttena tividhena sīlena samannāgato hoti. Indriyesu guttadvāroti manacchaṭṭhesu indriyesu pihitadvāro hoti. Satisampajaññena samannāgatoti abhikkante paṭikkantetiādīsu sattasu ṭhānesu satiyā ceva sampajaññena ca samannāgato hoti. Santuṭṭhoti catūsu paccayesu tividhena santosena santuṭṭho hoti.
194-211 194-211. 这样把纲目列出来之后,再按顺序逐一解说时,说了“大王,比丘怎样才是戒具足呢”等等。其中,“这也是他的戒”意思是:对这位比丘来说,远离杀生也是他戒行中的一条戒。或者,这里的处格是表示主格的意义。因为在《大注》里,这句话被解释为“这也是那位沙门的戒”,意思正是如此。其余部分应当依照《梵网经》里所说的方式来理解。“这是他的戒”意思是:这就是他所持守的戒。巴利
194-211. Evaṃ mātikaṃ nikkhipitvā anupubbena bhājento ‘‘kathañca, mahārāja, bhikkhu sīlasampanno hotī’’tiādimāha. Tattha idampissa hoti sīlasminti idampi assa bhikkhuno pāṇātipātā veramaṇi sīlasmiṃ ekaṃ sīlaṃ hotīti attho. Paccattavacanatthe vā etaṃ bhummaṃ. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyañhi idampi tassa samaṇassa sīlanti ayameva attho vutto. Sesaṃ brahmajāle vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Idamassa hoti sīlasminti idaṃ assa sīlaṃ hotīti attho.
212 他无论从哪一方面都看不到恐惧,其原因就是戒的防护:那些以不防护为根源而生起的恐惧,其中若有哪一种恐惧会由戒的防护而产生,他在任何一种防护之下都看不到它。为什么?因为当有防护时,以不防护为根源的恐惧就不存在了。“如同已灌顶者”:就像按规定的仪轨举行了刹帝利灌顶仪式、头顶被灌过圣水的人。“即:来自敌人的”:凡是可能来自任何一个敌人的恐惧,他都看不到。为什么?因为他已经消灭了一切敌对者。“内在的”:指自己身心相续内部的,意思是在自己身心相续之中。“无过失的快乐”:他体验着那无可指责、无可非难的善的快乐;这种快乐以戒为基础,伴随无追悔、欢喜、喜、轻安诸法,是身体和心的快乐。“大王!比丘如此就是戒具足者”:如此,具足这样不间断详细开示的三种戒,这位比丘就被称为戒具足者。关于戒的论述到此结束。巴利
212.Na kutoci bhayaṃ samanupassati, yadidaṃ sīlasaṃvaratoti yāni asaṃvaramūlakāni bhayāni uppajjanti, tesu yaṃ idaṃ bhayaṃ sīlasaṃvarato bhaveyya, taṃ kutoci ekasaṃvaratopi na samanupassati. Kasmā? Saṃvarato asaṃvaramūlakassa bhayassa abhāvā. Muddhābhisittoti yathāvidhānavihitena khattiyābhisekena muddhani avasitto. Yadidaṃ paccatthikatoti yaṃ kutoci ekapaccatthikatopi bhayaṃ bhaveyya, taṃ na samanupassati. Kasmā? Yasmā nihatapaccāmitto. Ajjhattanti niyakajjhattaṃ, attano santāneti attho. Anavajjasukhanti anavajjaṃ aninditaṃ kusalaṃ sīlapadaṭṭhānehi avippaṭisārapāmojjapītipassaddhidhammehi pariggahitaṃ kāyikacetasikasukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti. Evaṃ kho, mahārāja, bhikkhu sīlasampanno hotīti evaṃ nirantaraṃ vitthāretvā dassitena tividhena sīlena samannāgato bhikkhu sīlasampanno nāma hotīti sīlakathaṃ niṭṭhāpesi.
根律仪论巴利
Indriyasaṃvarakathā
213 213. 在讲“守护根门”这一段里,说到“以眼见色”时,这个“眼”字在某些地方指的是佛眼,就像经里说的:“他以佛眼观察世间。”(《大品》9)在某些地方指的是被称为一切知智的普眼,就像经里说的:“善慧啊,登上那座法所成的殿堂,成为普眼者。”(《大品》8)在某些地方指的是法眼,比如“远离尘垢、远离污秽的法眼生起了”(《大品》16),这里指的是三种圣道的智慧。而“眼生起了,智生起了”(《大品》15)这里,指的是宿命通等智慧,称为慧眼。在“以天眼”等出现的地方,指的是天眼。在“缘于眼及色”这里,指的是净色眼。但在这里,这个“眼”字是借用净色眼的名称来指眼识,所以意思是:以眼识见色之后。其余部分该说的,都已经在《清净道论》里讲过了。“不杂染之乐”:因为远离了烦恼的杂染,所以是不杂、不混、清净的增上心之乐,他正在体验这个乐。巴利
213. Indriyesu guttadvārabhājanīye cakkhunā rūpanti ayaṃ cakkhusaddo katthaci buddhacakkhumhi vattati, yathāha – ‘‘buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ volokesī’’ti (mahāva. 9). Katthaci sabbaññutaññāṇasaṅkhāte samantacakkhumhi, yathāha – ‘‘tathūpamaṃ dhammamayaṃ, sumedha, pāsādamāruyha samantacakkhū’’ti (mahāva. 8). Katthaci dhammacakkhumhi ‘‘virajaṃ vītamalaṃ dhammacakkhuṃ udapādī’’ti (mahāva. 16) hi ettha ariyamaggattayapaññā. ‘‘Cakkhuṃ udapādi ñāṇaṃ udapādī’’ti (mahāva. 15) ettha pubbenivāsādiñāṇaṃ paññācakkhūti vuccati. ‘‘Dibbena cakkhunā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.284) āgataṭṭhānesu dibbacakkhumhi vattati. ‘‘Cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe cā’’ti ettha pasādacakkhumhi vattati. Idha panāyaṃ pasādacakkhuvohārena cakkhuviññāṇe vattati, tasmā cakkhuviññāṇena rūpaṃ disvāti ayametthattho. Sesapadesu yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ visuddhimagge vuttaṃ. Abyāsekasukhanti kilesabyāsekavirahitattā abyāsekaṃ asammissaṃ parisuddhaṃ adhicittasukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedetīti.
关于正念与正知巴利
Satisampajaññakathā
214 214. 在“正念正知”的分别中,说到“于前进时、返回时”:这里首先,“前进”是指向前走,“返回”是指转回来,这两者在行、住、坐、卧四种威仪中都可以找到。在行走时,把身体向前移动,就称为前进;转身往回走,就称为返回。在站立时,站在原地而把身体向前倾,也称为前进;把身体向后仰,也称为返回。在坐着时,坐着而将身体朝座位前方挪动,称为前进;向座位后方退移,称为返回。在躺卧时,也是同样的道理。巴利
214. Satisampajaññabhājanīyamhi abhikkante paṭikkanteti ettha tāva abhikkantaṃ vuccati gamanaṃ, paṭikkantaṃ nivattanaṃ, tadubhayampi catūsu iriyāpathesu labbhati. Gamane tāva purato kāyaṃ abhiharanto abhikkamati nāma . Paṭinivattanto paṭikkamati nāma. Ṭhānepi ṭhitakova kāyaṃ purato onāmento abhikkamati nāma, pacchato apanāmento paṭikkamati nāma. Nisajjāya nisinnakova āsanassa purimaaṅgābhimukho saṃsaranto abhikkamati nāma, pacchimaaṅgapadesaṃ paccāsaṃsaranto paṭikkamati nāma. Nipajjanepi eseva nayo.
他具备正知而行:就是以正知去做一切该做的事。或者说,他本身就是正知的实行者。因为他在前进等一切动作中,确实始终在运用正知,在任何地方都不曾离开正知。其中,正知有四种:有益正知、适宜正知、行处正知、不痴正知。在这四种当中,当想要前进的心念生起时,不单凭心的冲动就贸然前去,而是先考量“我去那里到底有没有意义”,在辨明有意义和无意义之后,再选取有意义的那一方去做,这就是有益正知。这里所说的“意义”,是指通过瞻仰佛塔、菩提树、僧众、长老、不净相等,使法得到增长。因为有人见到佛塔或菩提树后,以佛为所缘;见到僧众后,以僧为所缘,生起欢喜心,接着观察它的坏灭,就能证得阿拉汉果。见到长老们后,依止他们的教导;见到不净相后,在那里生起初禅,再同样观察它的坏灭,也能证得阿拉汉果。所以说,见到这些是有意义的。不过也有人主张,即使从财物供养中也能得到增长,那也算是有意义,因为依靠它能资助梵行的修习。巴利
Sampajānakārī hotīti sampajaññena sabbakiccakārī. Sampajaññameva vā kārī. So hi abhikkantādīsu sampajaññaṃ karoteva. Na katthaci sampajaññavirahito hoti. Tattha sātthakasampajaññaṃ, sappāyasampajaññaṃ, gocarasampajaññaṃ asammohasampajaññanti catubbidhaṃ sampajaññaṃ. Tattha abhikkamanacitte uppanne cittavaseneva agantvā – ‘‘kinnu me ettha gatena attho atthi natthī’’ti atthānatthaṃ pariggahetvā atthapariggaṇhanaṃ sātthakasampajaññaṃ. Tattha ca atthoti cetiyadassanabodhisaṅghatheraasubhadassanādivasena dhammato vuḍḍhi. Cetiyaṃ vā bodhiṃ vā disvāpi hi buddhārammaṇaṃ, saṅghadassanena saṅghārammaṇaṃ, pītiṃ uppādetvā tadeva khayavayato sammasanto arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. There disvā tesaṃ ovāde patiṭṭhāya, asubhaṃ disvā tattha paṭhamajjhānaṃ uppādetvā tadeva khayavayato sammasanto arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Tasmā etesaṃ dassanaṃ sātthakanti vuttaṃ. Keci pana āmisatopi vuḍḍhi atthoyeva, taṃ nissāya brahmacariyānuggahāya paṭipannattāti vadanti.
在路上行走时,要先分辨什么是适宜、什么是不适宜,把握其中适宜的部分,这就是适宜正知。具体来说:比如瞻礼佛塔本身是有益的。但如果佛塔举行大供养时,方圆十由旬到十二由旬内的群众都聚集过来,男女信众都盛装打扮、佩戴装饰,像彩绘的人像一样往来走动。这时,如果他对可意的对象生起贪爱,对不可意的对象生起瞋恨,在心不在焉时生起愚痴,或者犯下身体接触的过失,又或者对性命和梵行造成障碍,那么那个地方就是不适宜的。如果没有上面说的这些障碍,就是适宜的。瞻礼菩提树也是同样的道理。见僧众也是有益的。但如果在村子里搭起大帐篷,人们整夜听法,像前面说的那样,既有大众聚集,又会产生障碍,那么那个地方就是不适宜的。如果没有障碍,就是适宜的。去拜见被大批随从围绕的长老们,也是同样的道理。巴利
Tasmiṃ pana gamane sappāyāsappāyaṃ pariggahetvā sappāyapariggaṇhanaṃ sappāyasampajaññaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ – cetiyadassanaṃ tāva sātthakaṃ, sace pana cetiyassa mahāpūjāya dasadvādasayojanantare parisā sannipatanti, attano vibhavānurūpā itthiyopi purisāpi alaṅkatapaṭiyattā cittakammarūpakāni viya sañcaranti. Tatra cassa iṭṭhe ārammaṇe lobho hoti, aniṭṭhe paṭigho, asamapekkhane moho uppajjati, kāyasaṃsaggāpattiṃ vā āpajjati. Jīvitabrahmacariyānaṃ vā antarāyo hoti, evaṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ asappāyaṃ hoti. Vuttappakāraantarāyābhāve sappāyaṃ. Bodhidassanepi eseva nayo. Saṅghadassanampi sātthaṃ. Sace pana antogāme mahāmaṇḍapaṃ kāretvā sabbarattiṃ dhammassavanaṃ karontesu manussesu vuttappakāreneva janasannipāto ceva antarāyo ca hoti, evaṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ asappāyaṃ hoti. Antarāyābhāve sappāyaṃ. Mahāparisaparivārānaṃ therānaṃ dassanepi eseva nayo.
看见不净相也是有好处的。为了说明这个道理,这里有这样一个故事:据说,有一位年轻的比丘带着一个沙弥去取齿木。沙弥离开道路往前走,看见了一具不净相,就证得了初禅,再以初禅为基础,观照诸行,依次证悟了前三个果位,然后为了更高的道果,把握住业处,停在那里。年轻比丘看不见他,就喊了一声:“沙弥!”沙弥心想:“从我出家那天起,还从来没有和比丘说过两句闲话。以后我还要证得更高的殊胜境界。”于是他回答:“尊者,什么事?”比丘说:“过来。”沙弥就应了一声走过来,然后说:“尊者,请您先沿着这条路走过去,在我刚才站的地方,朝东站一会儿,往那个方向看一看。”比丘照做了,也同样证得了和沙弥一样的殊胜境界。就这样,一个不净相让两个人得到了利益。虽然看见不净相有这样的好处,但对男人来说,女人的不净相是不适宜的;对女人来说,男人的不净相也是不适宜的。只有同性的不净相才适宜。像这样去把握适宜,就叫作“适宜正知”。巴利
Asubhadassanampi sātthaṃ, tadatthadīpanatthañca idaṃ vatthu – eko kira daharabhikkhu sāmaṇeraṃ gahetvā dantakaṭṭhatthāya gato. Sāmaṇero maggā okkamitvā purato gacchanto asubhaṃ disvā paṭhamajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā tadeva pādakaṃ katvā saṅkhāre sammasanto tīṇi phalāni sacchikatvā uparimaggatthāya kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariggahetvā aṭṭhāsi. Daharo taṃ apassanto sāmaṇerāti pakkosi. So ‘mayā pabbajitadivasato paṭṭhāya bhikkhunā saddhiṃ dve kathā nāma na kathitapubbā. Aññasmimpi divase upari visesaṃ nibbattessāmī’ti cintetvā kiṃ, bhanteti paṭivacanamadāsi. ‘Ehī’ti ca vutte ekavacaneneva āgantvā, ‘bhante, iminā tāva maggeneva gantvā mayā ṭhitokāse muhuttaṃ puratthābhimukho ṭhatvā olokethā’ti āha. So tathā katvā tena pattavisesameva pāpuṇi. Evaṃ ekaṃ asubhaṃ dvinnaṃ janānaṃ atthāya jātaṃ. Evaṃ sātthampi panetaṃ purisassa mātugāmāsubhaṃ asappāyaṃ, mātugāmassa ca purisāsubhaṃ asappāyaṃ, sabhāgameva sappāyanti evaṃ sappāyapariggaṇhanaṃ sappāyasampajaññaṃ nāma.
像这样,已经把握了“有益”和“适宜”之后,还要在三十八种业处中,选取一种合自己心意的、称为业处的行处,把它学到手;然后在乞食等行境中,始终带着这个业处走,这就叫“行处正知”。为了说明它,应当了解下面这四种情况。巴利
Evaṃ pariggahitasātthakasappāyassa pana aṭṭhatiṃsāya kammaṭṭhānesu attano cittaruciyaṃ kammaṭṭhānasaṅkhātaṃ gocaraṃ uggahetvā bhikkhācāragocare taṃ gahetvāva gamanaṃ gocarasampajaññaṃ nāma. Tassāvibhāvanatthaṃ idaṃ catukkaṃ veditabbaṃ –
在这里,有些比丘把业处带出去却不带回来;有些带回来却不带出去;有些既不带出去也不带回来;有些既带出去又带回来。其中,一位比丘白天通过经行和坐禅,把心从障碍法中净化出来,初夜也同样如此,中夜躺下休息,后夜又以坐禅和经行度过。天还没亮,他就先完成佛塔广场和菩提树广场的日常事务,给菩提树浇水,备好饮用水和洗用水,然后履行对戒师、亲教师等的一切犍度规定的义务。他处理好身体的事,进入住处,在两三个禅座上坐暖身体,专心修习业处。到了乞食的时候,他起身,以业处为先,拿起衣钵,从住处出来,心里一直系念着业处,走到佛塔广场。如果他的业处是佛随念,就不放下这个业处,直接进入佛塔广场。如果是别的业处,他就在台阶下站住,像手里拿着东西暂时放下一样,把那个业处搁在一旁,转而缘取对佛陀的欢喜心,然后登上佛塔广场。如果是大塔,就绕三圈,在四个地方礼拜;如果是小塔,也同样绕行,在八个地方礼拜。礼完塔,来到菩提树广场,即使手里拿着钵,也要像面对佛陀世尊本人一样,表现出恭敬的姿态,礼拜菩提树。他这样礼完塔和菩提树之后,走到存放物品的地方,像用手拿起放下的东西一样,把先前搁下的业处重新提起来,然后以业处为先,在村子附近披好袈裟,进村乞食。人们看见他,说“尊者来了”,就迎上前来,接过他的钵,请他在集会堂或家里坐下,供养粥。在饭食还没结束之前,他们为他洗脚、涂油,然后坐在他面前,或者问他问题,或者想听他说法。即使他们不请他说法,注释师们说,为了摄受众人,还是应当说法。因为说法从来不离业处,所以应当以业处为先来说法,以业处为先来受用饮食,作完随喜之后,即使人们回去时跟着送他,他也从村里出来,到了那里让他们回去,然后上路。巴利
Idhekacco bhikkhu harati, na paccāharati; ekacco paccāharati, na harati; ekacco pana neva harati, na paccāharati; ekacco harati ca, paccāharati cāti. Tattha yo bhikkhu divasaṃ caṅkamena nisajjāya ca āvaraṇīyehi dhammehi cittaṃ parisodhetvā tathā rattiyā paṭhamayāme, majjhimayāme seyyaṃ kappetvā pacchimayāmepi nisajjacaṅkamehi vītināmetvā pageva cetiyaṅgaṇabodhiyaṅgaṇavattaṃ katvā bodhirukkhe udakaṃ āsiñcitvā, pānīyaṃ paribhojanīyaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā ācariyupajjhāyavattādīni sabbāni khandhakavattāni samādāya vattati. So sarīraparikammaṃ katvā senāsanaṃ pavisitvā dve tayo pallaṅke usumaṃ gāhāpento kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjitvā bhikkhācāravelāyaṃ uṭṭhahitvā kammaṭṭhānasīseneva pattacīvaramādāya senāsanato nikkhamitvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontova cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ gantvā, sace buddhānussatikammaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, taṃ avissajjetvāva cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ pavisati. Aññaṃ ce kammaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, sopānamūle ṭhatvā hatthena gahitabhaṇḍaṃ viya taṃ ṭhapetvā buddhārammaṇaṃ pītiṃ gahetvā cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ āruyha, mahantaṃ cetiyaṃ ce, tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā catūsu ṭhānesu vanditabbaṃ. Khuddakaṃ cetiyaṃ ce, tatheva padakkhiṇaṃ katvā aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu vanditabbaṃ. Cetiyaṃ vanditvā bodhiyaṅgaṇaṃ pattenāpi buddhassa bhagavato sammukhā viya nipaccākāraṃ dassetvā bodhi vanditabbā. So evaṃ cetiyañca bodhiñca vanditvā paṭisāmitaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā paṭisāmitabhaṇḍakaṃ hatthena gaṇhanto viya nikkhittakammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā gāmasamīpe kammaṭṭhānasīseneva cīvaraṃ pārupitvā gāmaṃ piṇḍāya pavisati. Atha naṃ manussā disvā ayyo no āgatoti paccuggantvā pattaṃ gahetvā āsanasālāya vā gehe vā nisīdāpetvā yāguṃ datvā yāva bhattaṃ na niṭṭhāti, tāva pāde dhovitvā telena makkhetvā purato te nisīditvā pañhaṃ vā pucchanti, dhammaṃ vā sotukāmā honti. Sacepi na kathāpenti, janasaṅgahatthaṃ dhammakathā nāma kātabbā yevāti aṭṭhakathācariyā vadanti. Dhammakathā hi kammaṭṭhānavinimuttā nāma natthi, tasmā kammaṭṭhānasīseneva dhammakathaṃ kathetvā kammaṭṭhānasīseneva āhāraṃ paribhuñjitvā anumodanaṃ katvā nivattiyamānehipi manussehi anugatova gāmato nikkhamitvā tattha te nivattetvā maggaṃ paṭipajjati.
这时,那些先出村、在村外吃完斋饭的沙弥和年轻比丘们看见了他,就迎上前去,接过他的衣钵。据说,古代的比丘们不会因为认出“这是我们的戒师、教授师”就看着他的脸来服侍,而是完全按照到来的先后次序来做。他们问他:“尊者,这些人是您的什么人?是母系那边的亲戚,还是父系那边的亲戚?”他反问:“你们是看到什么才这样问的?”他们说:“看到他们对您有那么深的情意和恭敬。”他便说道:“贤友们,这些人为我们做的事,连父母都难以做到。我们的衣钵也是他们供养的,靠他们的恩德,我们在怖畏中不知道什么是怖畏,在饥馑中不知道什么是饥馑。像这样帮助我们的人,实在是找不到了。”他一边这样讲述那些人的功德,一边离去。这就叫“带出去而不持回”。巴利
Atha naṃ puretaraṃ nikkhamitvā bahigāme katabhattakiccā sāmaṇeradaharabhikkhū disvā paccuggantvā pattacīvaramassa gaṇhanti. Porāṇakabhikkhū kira amhākaṃ upajjhāyo ācariyoti na mukhaṃ oloketvā vattaṃ karonti, sampattaparicchedeneva karonti. Te taṃ pucchanti – ‘‘bhante, ete manussā tumhākaṃ kiṃ honti, mātipakkhato sambandhā pitipakkhato’’ti? Kiṃ disvā pucchathāti? Tumhesu etesaṃ pemaṃ bahumānanti. Āvuso, yaṃ mātāpitūhipi dukkaraṃ, taṃ ete amhākaṃ karonti, pattacīvarampi no etesaṃ santakameva, etesaṃ ānubhāvena neva bhaye bhayaṃ, na chātake chātakaṃ jānāma. Īdisā nāma amhākaṃ upakārino natthīti tesaṃ guṇe kathento gacchati. Ayaṃ vuccati harati na paccāharatīti.
如果有人按照前面所说的那样去履行日常义务和修行,他体内的业生火界就会炽盛燃烧,这时它舍弃未执取而执取已执取,汗水从身上流下来,业处就无法顺利进入轨道。于是他一早就拿了衣钵,急速去礼拜佛塔,在牛群出村的时刻就进村乞粥。得到粥后,走到坐堂去喝。这时,只要吞下两三口,他体内的业生火界就舍弃已执取而执取未执取,就像用一百罐水沐浴过一样,火界的热恼平息下来,变得清凉。他以业处为先导而受用粥,然后洗钵、洗脸,在午前进食之前一直作意业处;之后再到别处乞食,也以业处为先导而受用食物。从那时起,他就能把辗转递进、持续现起的业处牢牢把握住而回来。这就称为“持回而不带出去”。像这样的比丘,喝了粥之后就开始修观,在佛陀的教法中证得阿拉汉果的人多得数不清。就在锡兰岛上,各个村落的坐堂里,没有一个座位旁边不曾有喝了粥之后证得阿拉汉果的比丘。巴利
Yassa pana pageva vuttappakāraṃ vattapaṭipattiṃ karontassa kammajatejodhātu pajjalati, anupādinnakaṃ muñcitvā upādinnakaṃ gaṇhāti, sarīrato sedā muñcanti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ vīthiṃ nārohati, so pageva pattacīvaramādāya vegasā cetiyaṃ vanditvā gorūpānaṃ nikkhamanavelāyameva gāmaṃ yāgubhikkhāya pavisitvā yāguṃ labhitvā āsanasālaṃ gantvā pivati, athassa dvattikkhattuṃ ajjhoharaṇamatteneva kammajatejodhātu upādinnakaṃ muñcitvā anupādinnakaṃ gaṇhāti, ghaṭasatena nhāto viya tejodhātu pariḷāhanibbānaṃ patvā kammaṭṭhānasīsena yāguṃ paribhuñjitvā pattañca mukhañca dhovitvā antarābhatte kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikatvā avasesaṭṭhāne piṇḍāya caritvā kammaṭṭhānasīsena āhārañca paribhuñjitvā tato paṭṭhāya poṅkhānupoṅkhaṃ upaṭṭhahamānaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā āgacchati, ayaṃ vuccati paccāharatina haratīti. Edisā ca bhikkhū yāguṃ pivitvā vipassanaṃ ārabhitvā buddhasāsane arahattappattā nāma gaṇanapathaṃ vītivattā. Sīhaḷadīpeyeva tesu tesu gāmesu āsanasālāyaṃ vā na taṃ āsanamatthi, yattha yāguṃ pivitvā arahattappattā bhikkhū natthīti.
如果有人放逸地过日子,放弃了自己的责任,破坏了所有应做的义务,心被五种心的障碍束缚着,连“有业处这回事”这个念头都不生起,就进村乞食,以不合宜的方式和在家人混在一起,一起走动、一起吃喝,最后空无所得地出村——这种人就叫作“既不带去,也不带回”。巴利
Yo pana pamādavihārī hoti, nikkhittadhuro sabbavattāni bhinditvā pañcavidhacetokhīlavinibandhacitto viharanto – ‘‘kammaṭṭhānaṃ nāma atthī’’ti saññampi akatvā gāmaṃ piṇḍāya pavisitvā ananulomikena gihisaṃsaggena saṃsaṭṭho caritvā ca bhuñjitvā ca tuccho nikkhamati, ayaṃ vuccati neva harati na paccāharatīti.
再说,这里所说的“带去又带回”,应当依照去与返的规矩来理解。因为希求自身利益的善男子们在教法中出家后,或十人、二十人、三十人、四十人、五十人,乃至百人共住一处,制定共住规约而住:“贤友们,你们不是因负债而出家,不是因恐惧而出家,也不是为谋生而出家,而是为了从苦中解脱才在这里出家。所以,行走时生起的烦恼,就在行走时压制下去;同样,站立时生起的烦恼,就在站立时压制下去;坐着时生起的烦恼,就在坐着时压制下去;躺卧时生起的烦恼,就在躺卧时压制下去。”巴利
Yo panāyaṃ – ‘‘harati ca paccāharati cā’’ti vutto, so gatapaccāgatavattavaseneva veditabbo. Attakāmā hi kulaputtā sāsane pabbajitvā dasapi vīsampi tiṃsampi cattālīsampi paññāsampi satampi ekato vasantā katikavattaṃ katvā viharanti, ‘‘āvuso, tumhe na iṇaṭṭā, na bhayaṭṭā, na jīvikāpakatā pabbajitā, dukkhā muccitukāmā panettha pabbajitā, tasmā gamane uppannakilesaṃ gamaneyeva niggaṇhatha, tathā ṭhāne, nisajjāya, sayane uppannakilesaṃ sayaneva niggaṇhathā’’ti.
他们这样约定好之后,去乞食时,在每隔半优莎婆、一优莎婆、半伽乌答、一伽乌答的地方,都有石头作标记。他们带着这个想,一边作意业处一边走。如果谁在行走时生起烦恼,就地把它压伏。如果压伏不了,他就停下来;这时从后面走来的人也会停下来。他心想:“这位比丘知道我心中生起的念头,这对我是不合适的。”于是自我呵责,增长观禅,就在那里进入圣者的境地。如果还是做不到,他就坐下;这时从后面走来的人也会坐下,道理一样。即使还不能进入圣者的境地,他也会镇伏那个烦恼,继续作意业处而行。他不会让心和业处分开而抬脚;如果抬了脚,就转身回到原来的地方。就像住在廊房里的摩诃普萨提婆长老那样。巴利
Te evaṃ katikavattaṃ katvā bhikkhācāraṃ gacchantā aḍḍhausabhausabhaaḍḍhagāvutagāvutantaresu pāsāṇā honti, tāya saññāya kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontāva gacchanti. Sace kassaci gamane kileso uppajjati, tattheva naṃ niggaṇhāti. Tathā asakkonto tiṭṭhati, athassa pacchato āgacchantopi tiṭṭhati. So ‘‘ayaṃ bhikkhu tuyhaṃ uppannavitakkaṃ jānāti, ananucchavikaṃ te eta’’nti attānaṃ paṭicodetvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā tattheva ariyabhūmiṃ okkamati; tathā asakkonto nisīdati. Athassa pacchato āgacchantopi nisīdatīti soyeva nayo. Ariyabhūmiṃ okkamituṃ asakkontopi taṃ kilesaṃ vikkhambhetvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontova gacchati, na kammaṭṭhānavippayuttena cittena pādaṃ uddharati, uddharati ce, paṭinivattitvā purimapadesaṃyeva eti. Ālindakavāsī mahāphussadevatthero viya.
据说,他圆满修习“去回行持”达十九年之久,一直这样安住。人们也看见过他:那些在路上耕地、播种、碾磨、做各种活计的人,看到长老这样来回行走,就纷纷议论说:“这位长老一次又一次地折返,难道是迷路了?还是忘了什么东西?”他对这些不加理会,只是以专注于业处的心修习沙门法,在二十年之内证得了阿拉汉果。在他证得阿拉汉果那天,住在他经行道尽头的神灵用手指点亮了灯,站在一旁。四大天王、帝释天神以及娑婆主梵天都前来侍奉。林住者摩诃帝萨长老看到那片光明,第二天问他:“昨夜尊者身边有光明,那是什么光明?”长老岔开话题说:“所谓光明,有灯光,也有宝珠之光……”诸如此类。后来被追问:“你们要隐瞒吗?”他才承认,并说出了实情。就像住在黑藤圆亭的玛哈那嘎长老一样。巴利
So kira ekūnavīsativassāni gatapaccāgatavattaṃ pūrento eva vihāsi, manussāpi addasaṃsu antarāmagge kasantā ca vapantā ca maddantā ca kammāni ca karontā theraṃ tathāgacchantaṃ disvā – ‘‘ayaṃ thero punappunaṃ nivattitvā gacchati, kinnu kho maggamūḷho, udāhu kiñci pamuṭṭho’’ti samullapanti. So taṃ anādiyitvā kammaṭṭhānayuttacitteneva samaṇadhammaṃ karonto vīsativassabbhantare arahattaṃ pāpuṇi, arahattappattadivase cassa caṅkamanakoṭiyaṃ adhivatthā devatā aṅgulīhi dīpaṃ ujjāletvā aṭṭhāsi. Cattāropi mahārājāno sakko ca devānamindo brahmā ca sahampati upaṭṭhānaṃ agamaṃsu. Tañca obhāsaṃ disvā vanavāsī mahātissatthero taṃ dutiyadivase pucchi – ‘‘rattibhāge āyasmato santike obhāso ahosi, kiṃ so obhāso’’ti? Thero vikkhepaṃ karonto obhāso nāma dīpobhāsopi hoti, maṇiobhāsopīti evamādimāha. Tato ‘paṭicchādetha tumhe’ti nibaddho ‘āmā’ti paṭijānitvā ārocesi. Kāḷavallimaṇḍapavāsī mahānāgatthero viya ca.
据说,他也是在圆满履行“往返行持”时,先这样决意:“我要先礼敬世尊的大精进。”于是七年之中只行站立与经行。后来,他又用十六年圆满“往返行持”,证得阿拉汉果。他抬脚时,心与业处相应;心不与业处相应而抬脚时,他就折返回来。走到村庄附近,到了可能让人起疑“这是牛,还是出家人”的地方,他就停下来,披上衣,从腋下取水洗钵,并含一口水在口中。为什么要这样做?免得有人前来布施或礼拜时,自己仅仅说一句“祝你们长寿”,就使业处散乱。不过,如果有人问:“尊者,今天是什么日子?”或者问日期、比丘人数、问题等,他就把水咽下,然后回答。如果没有人问日期等事,到了该离开的时候,他就在村口把水吐掉,然后离去。巴利
Sopi kira gatapaccāgatavattaṃ pūrento – paṭhamaṃ tāva bhagavato mahāpadhānaṃ pūjessāmīti sattavassāni ṭhānacaṅkamameva adhiṭṭhāsi. Puna soḷasavassāni gatapaccāgatavattaṃ pūretvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. So kammaṭṭhānayutteneva cittena pādaṃ uddharanto, viyuttena uddhaṭe paṭinivattento gāmasamīpaṃ gantvā ‘‘gāvī nu pabbajito nū’’ti āsaṅkanīyapadese ṭhatvā cīvaraṃ pārupitvā kacchakantarato udakena pattaṃ dhovitvā udakagaṇḍūsaṃ karoti. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Mā me bhikkhaṃ dātuṃ vā vandituṃ vā āgate manusse ‘dīghāyukā hothā’ti vacanamattenāpi kammaṭṭhānavikkhepo ahosīti. ‘‘Ajja, bhante, katimī’’ti divasaṃ vā bhikkhugaṇanaṃ vā pañhaṃ vā pucchito pana udakaṃ gilitvā āroceti. Sace divasādīni pucchakā na honti, nikkhamanavelāya gāmadvāre niṭṭhubhitvāva yāti.
就像在迦兰巴提他寺入雨安居的五十位比丘一样。据说,他们在阿沙里月满月日立下约定:“未证得阿拉汉果之前,我们彼此不交谈。”进村乞食时,他们也先含一口水再进去。有人问起日期等事时,他们就按前面说的方式应对。那里的人看见他们吐出的水,便知道:“今天来了一个,今天来了两个。”他们又这样想:“这些人到底只是不跟我们说话,还是彼此之间也不交谈?如果彼此之间也不交谈,那一定是起了争执。来吧,我们去让他们互相和解。”众人来到寺院,在五十位比丘中,却看不到有两个比丘待在同一处。于是他们当中一个有眼力的人说:“诸位,爱争执的人住的地方绝不是这样的:塔院和菩提树院扫得这么干净,扫帚摆放得整整齐齐,饮用水和洗漱用水也都准备得妥妥当当。”众人便从那里折返了。那些比丘在三个月安居期内就证得了阿拉汉果,在大自恣时作了清净自恣。巴利
Kalambatitthavihāre vassūpagatā paññāsabhikkhū viya ca. Te kira āsaḷhipuṇṇamāyaṃ katikavattaṃ akaṃsu – ‘‘arahattaṃ appatvā aññamaññaṃ nālapissāmā’’ti, gāmañca piṇḍāya pavisantā udakagaṇḍūsaṃ katvā pavisiṃsu. Divasādīsu pucchitesu vuttanayeneva paṭipajjiṃsu. Tattha manussā niṭṭhubhanaṃ disvā jāniṃsu – ‘‘ajjeko āgato, ajja dve’’ti. Evañca cintesuṃ – ‘‘kinnu kho ete amhehiyeva saddhiṃ na sallapanti, udāhu aññamaññampi. Sace aññamaññampi na sallapanti, addhā vivādajātā bhavissanti. Etha ne aññamaññaṃ khamāpessāmā’’ti, sabbe vihāraṃ gantvā paññāsāya bhikkhūsu dvepi bhikkhū ekokāse nāddasaṃsu. Tato yo tesu cakkhumā puriso, so āha – ‘‘na bho kalahakārakānaṃ vasanokāso īdiso hoti, susammaṭṭhaṃ cetiyaṅgaṇabodhiyaṅgaṇaṃ, sunikkhittā sammajjaniyo, sūpaṭṭhapitaṃ pānīyaṃ paribhojanīya’’nti, te tatova nivattā. Tepi bhikkhū anto temāseyeva arahattaṃ patvā mahāpavāraṇāya visuddhipavāraṇaṃ pavāresuṃ.
就像住在黑藤圆亭的玛哈那嘎长老那样,也像在迦兰巴提他寺入雨安居的比丘们那样,他抬脚走路时,心始终与业处相应。走到村庄附近,漱一口水,观察各条街道,哪条街上没有酒鬼、赌徒之类惹事生非的人,也没有凶暴的象、马等,就走那条街。在那里乞食时,他并不像赶路的人那样急匆匆地快走,因为并没有所谓“快速乞食头陀支”这种修法。走到地势不平的地方,他就像运水车一样,稳稳当当地走。挨家挨户进去时,他先观察施主是想布施还是不想布施,等到合适的时机,才接受食物拿好。然后回到村内、村外或寺院,在舒适合适的地方坐下,提起业处作意,对食物生起厌逆想,依照车轴润滑油、涂疮药、亲子肉等方式来省察,然后受用具足八支的食物:不是为了玩乐,不是为了骄傲,不是为了打扮,不是为了装饰……吃完后,做完喝水洗钵等事,休息片刻消除吃饭带来的疲劳。就像午前一样,午后、初夜、后夜也只是一心作意业处。这样的人,就叫做“带出又带回”。巴利
Evaṃ kāḷavallimaṇḍapavāsī mahānāgatthero viya, kalambatitthavihāre vassūpagatabhikkhū viya ca kammaṭṭhānayutteneva cittena pādaṃ uddharanto gāmasamīpaṃ gantvā udakagaṇḍūsaṃ katvā vīthiyo sallakkhetvā, yattha surāsoṇḍadhuttādayo kalahakārakā caṇḍahatthiassādayo vā natthi, taṃ vīthiṃ paṭipajjati. Tattha ca piṇḍāya caramāno na turitaturito viya javena gacchati. Na hi javena piṇḍapātiyadhutaṅgaṃ nāma kiñci atthi. Visamabhūmibhāgappattaṃ pana udakasakaṭaṃ viya niccalo hutvā gacchati. Anugharaṃ paviṭṭho ca dātukāmaṃ vā adātukāmaṃ vā sallakkhetvā tadanurūpaṃ kālaṃ āgamento bhikkhaṃ paṭilabhitvā ādāya antogāme vā bahigāme vā vihārameva vā āgantvā yathā phāsuke patirūpe okāse nisīditvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikaronto āhāre paṭikūlasaññaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā akkhabbhañjana – vaṇalepanaputtamaṃsūpamavasena paccavekkhanto aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgataṃ āhāraṃ āhāreti, neva davāya na madāya na maṇḍanāya na vibhūsanāya…pe… bhuttāvī ca udakakiccaṃ katvā muhuttaṃ bhattakilamathaṃ paṭippassambhetvā yathā purebhattaṃ, evaṃ pacchābhattaṃ purimayāmaṃ pacchimayāmañca kammaṭṭhānameva manasi karoti, ayaṃ vuccati harati ca paccāharati cāti.
一个人如果圆满实践了这种被称为“带出带回”的来去义务,并且具备充分的解脱资粮,那么他在青年时期就能证得阿拉汉果。如果青年时期没有证得,就在中年时期证得;如果中年时期没有证得,就在临终时证得;如果临终时没有证得,就投生为天子之后证得;如果投生为天子之后也没有证得,那就在没有佛出世的时代投生,亲证独觉菩提。如果连独觉菩提也没有亲证,那么他会在诸佛面前成为快速通达者——就像巴希亚·达鲁尸喇长老那样有大智慧,像舍利弗长老那样有大神通力,像大目犍连长老那样修头陀行,像大迦叶长老那样拥有天眼,像阿那律长老那样持守律法,像优波离长老那样善于说法,像布纳·满慈子长老那样住在林野,像雷瓦达长老那样多闻,像阿难长老那样乐于乞食,像罗睺罗长老那样作为佛陀的真子。因此,在这四类情况之外,那位既能向前带、也能向后带的人,他的行处正知已经达到顶点、圆满究竟。巴利
Idaṃ pana haraṇapaccāharaṇasaṅkhātaṃ gatapaccāgatavattaṃ pūrento yadi upanissayasampanno hoti, paṭhamavaye eva arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. No ce paṭhamavaye pāpuṇāti, atha majjhimavaye; no ce majjhimavaye pāpuṇāti, atha maraṇasamaye; no ce maraṇasamaye pāpuṇāti, atha devaputto hutvā; no ce devaputto hutvā pāpuṇāti, anuppanne buddhe nibbatto paccekabodhiṃ sacchikaroti. No ce paccekabodhiṃ sacchikaroti, atha buddhānaṃ sammukhībhāve khippābhiñño hoti; seyyathāpi thero bāhiyo dārucīriyo mahāpañño vā, seyyathāpi thero sāriputto mahiddhiko vā, seyyathāpi thero mahāmoggallāno dhutavādo vā, seyyathāpi thero mahākassapo dibbacakkhuko vā, seyyathāpi thero anuruddho vinayadharo vā, seyyathāpi thero upāli dhammakathiko vā, seyyathāpi thero puṇṇo mantāṇiputto āraññiko vā, seyyathāpi thero revato bahussuto vā, seyyathāpi thero ānando bhikkhākāmo vā, seyyathāpi thero rāhulo buddhaputtoti. Iti imasmiṃ catukke yvāyaṃ harati ca paccāharati ca, tassa gocarasampajaññaṃ sikhāpattaṃ hoti.
不过,在前行等动作中不迷乱,就是“无痴正知”。这应当这样理解:在这里,一位比丘前行或返回时,不像那些愚痴的凡夫在前行等动作中那样迷乱——他们要么认为“是我自己在前进,前进是由我造作的”,要么认为“我在前进,前进是我造作的”。他不会这样迷乱。当“我在前进”这个心念生起时,与那个心同时生起的心生风界,就在产生身表的状态下生起。正是由于这个心生风界的推动和扩散作用,这个被称为身体的骨骼聚合体才向前行进。当他这样前行时,每一次抬脚,地界和水界这两界就变得微弱、力量小,另外两界就变得强盛、力量大;在脚向前移出、移过的阶段也是这样。在脚放下时,火界和风界这两界就变得微弱、力量小,另外两界就变得强盛、力量大;在脚置下、踏实的阶段也是这样。在这里,抬脚时生起的色法和非色法,到不了移出的阶段;同样,移出时生起的,到不了移过的阶段;移过时生起的,到不了放下的阶段;放下时生起的,到不了置下的阶段;置下时生起的,到不了踏实的阶段。它们就在各自生起的地方,一段一段、一个关节一个关节、一节一节地,像撒在热锅里的芝麻一样噼噼啪啪地坏灭。那么,到底是谁在前进?又是谁的前进呢?从究竟意义来说,只是诸界的行走、诸界的站立、诸界的坐下、诸界的躺卧。在每一个部位,都与色法一起。巴利
Abhikkamādīsu pana asammuyhanaṃ asammohasampajaññaṃ, taṃ evaṃ veditabbaṃ – idha bhikkhu abhikkamanto vā paṭikkamanto vā yathā andhabālaputhujjanā abhikkamādīsu – ‘‘attā abhikkamati, attanā abhikkamo nibbattito’’ti vā, ‘‘ahaṃ abhikkamāmi, mayā abhikkamo nibbattito’’ti vā sammuyhanti, tathā asammuyhanto ‘‘abhikkamāmī’’ti citte uppajjamāne teneva cittena saddhiṃ cittasamuṭṭhānā vāyodhātu viññattiṃ janayamānā uppajjati. Iti cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāravasena ayaṃ kāyasammato aṭṭhisaṅghāto abhikkamati. Tassevaṃ abhikkamato ekekapāduddharaṇe pathavīdhātu āpodhātūti dve dhātuyo omattā honti mandā, itarā dve adhimattā honti balavatiyo; tathā atiharaṇavītiharaṇesu. Vossajjane tejodhātu vāyodhātūti dve dhātuyo omattā honti mandā, itarā dve adhimattā balavatiyo, tathā sannikkhepanasannirujjhanesu. Tattha uddharaṇe pavattā rūpārūpadhammā atiharaṇaṃ na pāpuṇanti, tathā atiharaṇe pavattā vītiharaṇaṃ, vītiharaṇe pavattā vossajjanaṃ, vossajjane pavattā sannikkhepanaṃ, sannikkhepane pavattā sannirujjhanaṃ na pāpuṇanti. Tattha tattheva pabbaṃ pabbaṃ sandhi sandhi odhi odhi hutvā tattakapāle pakkhittatilāni viya paṭapaṭāyantā bhijjanti. Tattha ko eko abhikkamati, kassa vā ekassa abhikkamanaṃ? Paramatthato hi dhātūnaṃyeva gamanaṃ, dhātūnaṃ ṭhānaṃ, dhātūnaṃ nisajjanaṃ, dhātūnaṃ sayanaṃ. Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ koṭṭhāse saddhiṃ rūpena.
一个心念生起,另一个心念就灭去;
与无间地狱的连接,就像河流的水流一样持续不断。巴利
Aññaṃ uppajjate cittaṃ, aññaṃ cittaṃ nirujjhati; Avīcimanusambandho, nadīsotova vattatīti.
在前进等动作中不迷惑,这就叫无痴正知。巴利
Evaṃ abhikkamādīsu asammuyhanaṃ asammohasampajaññaṃ nāmāti.
“向前走、往回走时,都保持正知而行”这一句的意思到此讲完了。巴利
Niṭṭhito abhikkante paṭikkante sampajānakārī hotīti padassa attho.
在“向前看、向旁边看”这句话里,“向前看”指的是朝正前方看,“向旁边看”指的是朝斜侧方看。另外,向下看、向上看和向后看,则分别叫“下视”“上视”和“回视”,但这些在这里没有被采用。按照适合当下语境的原则,这里只取了前面这两种;或者说,通过这两种,其实也已经把那些全都包含进来了。巴利
Ālokite vilokiteti ettha pana ālokitaṃ nāma purato pekkhaṇaṃ. Vilokitaṃ nāma anudisāpekkhaṇaṃ. Aññānipi heṭṭhā upari pacchato pekkhaṇavasena olokitaullokitāpalokitāni nāma honti, tāni idha na gahitāni. Sāruppavasena pana imāneva dve gahitāni, iminā vā mukhena sabbānipi tāni gahitānevāti.
在这里,“我要看”这个念头在心里生起时,不是随着心的冲动就直接去看,而是先把握其中的意义,这就是“有益正知”。应当以尊者难陀作为“身证者”的例子来理解这一点。世尊确实这样说过:“比丘们,如果难陀需要向东看,难陀就会把全部心力都集中起来,然后才向东看:‘我这样向东看时,贪欲和忧恼这些恶不善法不会流入我的心。’这样,他在那时就是正知的人。比丘们,如果难陀需要向西看……向北看……向南看……向上看……向下看……如果难陀需要向隅方观察,难陀就会把全部心力都集中起来,然后才向隅方观察:‘我这样向隅方观察时,贪欲和忧恼这些恶不善法不会流入我的心。’这样,他在那时就是正知的人。”巴利
Tattha ‘‘ālokessāmī’’ti citte uppanne cittavaseneva anoloketvā atthapariggaṇhanaṃ sātthakasampajaññaṃ, taṃ āyasmantaṃ nandaṃ kāyasakkhiṃ katvā veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘sace, bhikkhave, nandassa puratthimā disā āloketabbā hoti, sabbaṃ cetasā samannāharitvā nando puratthimaṃ disaṃ āloketi – ‘evaṃ me puratthimaṃ disaṃ ālokayato na abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssavissantī’ti. Itiha tattha sampajāno hoti (a. ni. 8.9). Sace, bhikkhave, nandassa pacchimā disā…pe… uttarā disā…pe… dakkhiṇā disā…pe… uddhaṃ…pe… adho…pe… anudisā anuviloketabbā hoti, sabbaṃ cetasā samannāharitvā nando anudisaṃ anuviloketi – ‘evaṃ me anudisaṃ anuvilokayato na abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssavissantī’ti. Itiha tattha sampajāno hotī’’ti.
另外,在这里也应该像前面讲过的“见塔庙等”那样,理解有益和适宜这两点;而对业处的不忘失,就是行境正知。因此在这里,以蕴、界、处为业处的人,应当只依自己的业处来观察;以遍等为业处的人,则应当以业处为首要来观察。身体内部并没有一个叫做“我”的看者或观察者;当“我要看”这个念头在心里生起时,与那个心一起生起的心生风界,就引发身表。这样,由于心的活动和风界的推动,下眼睑向下沉,上眼睑向上抬,并没有谁用机关把它拉开。接着,眼识生起,完成看的作用——这样了知,在这里就叫不迷惑正知。另外,在这里还应通过根本遍知、外来性和暂时性来理解不迷惑正知。首先,依根本遍知来说——巴利
Api ca idhāpi pubbe vuttacetiyadassanādivaseneva sātthakatā ca sappāyatā ca veditabbā, kammaṭṭhānassa pana avijahanameva gocarasampajaññaṃ. Tasmā ettha khandhadhātuāyatanakammaṭṭhānikehi attano kammaṭṭhānavaseneva, kasiṇādikammaṭṭhānikehi vā pana kammaṭṭhānasīseneva ālokanaṃ vilokanaṃ kātabbaṃ. Abbhantare attā nāma āloketā vā viloketā vā natthi, ‘ālokessāmī’ti pana citte uppajjamāne teneva cittena saddhiṃ cittasamuṭṭhānā vāyodhātu viññattiṃ janayamānā uppajjati. Iti cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāravasena heṭṭhimaṃ akkhidalaṃ adho sīdati, uparimaṃ uddhaṃ laṅgheti. Koci yantakena vivaranto nāma natthi. Tato cakkhuviññāṇaṃ dassanakiccaṃ sādhentaṃ uppajjatīti evaṃ pajānanaṃ panettha asammohasampajaññaṃ nāma. Api ca mūlapariññā āgantukatāva kālikabhāvavasena pettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ. Mūlapariññāvasena tāva –
有分、转向,以及看、领受;
推度、确定,第七是速行。巴利
Bhavaṅgāvajjanañceva, dassanaṃ sampaṭicchanaṃ; Santīraṇaṃ voṭṭhabbanaṃ, javanaṃ bhavati sattamaṃ.
在这里,有分心执行着投生有的支分作用而持续运转。它被转向之后,唯作意界执行转向的作用;它灭去后,眼识执行看的作用;它灭去后,异熟意界执行领受的作用;它灭去后,异熟意识界执行推度的作用;它灭去后,唯作意识界执行确定的作用;它灭去后,速行心便生起七次。在这七次速行中,即使是在第一次速行时,也不会因为贪染、嗔害和迷乱而生起“这是女人,这是男人”这样的看和观察。第二次速行时也是如此……乃至第七次速行时也是如此。然而,当它们像战场上的战士一样,因强弱之势而溃败倒下时,才会因为贪染等而生起“这是女人,这是男人”这样的看和观察。如此,在这里首先应当以根本遍知来了知不迷惑正知。巴利
Tattha bhavaṅgaṃ upapattibhavassa aṅgakiccaṃ sādhayamānaṃ pavattati, taṃ āvaṭṭetvā kiriyamanodhātu āvajjanakiccaṃ sādhayamānā, taṃnirodhā cakkhuviññāṇaṃ dassanakiccaṃ sādhayamānaṃ, taṃnirodhā vipākamanodhātu sampaṭicchanakiccaṃ sādhayamānā, taṃnirodhā vipākamanoviññāṇadhātu santīraṇakiccaṃ sādhayamānā, taṃnirodhā kiriyamanoviññāṇadhātu voṭṭhabbanakiccaṃ sādhayamānā , taṃnirodhā sattakkhattuṃ javanaṃ javati. Tattha paṭhamajavanepi – ‘‘ayaṃ itthī, ayaṃ puriso’’ti rajjanadussanamuyhanavasena ālokitavilokitaṃ nāma na hoti. Dutiyajavanepi…pe… sattamajavanepi. Etesu pana yuddhamaṇḍale yodhesu viya heṭṭhupariyavasena bhijjitvā patitesu – ‘‘ayaṃ itthī, ayaṃ puriso’’ti rajjanādivasena ālokitavilokitaṃ hoti. Evaṃ tāvettha mūlapariññāvasena asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
不过,当色境进入眼门的视野时,从有分心开始震动之后,转向等心为了完成各自的作用而依次生起又灭去,到最后,速行心生起。相对于先前生起的转向等心来说,眼门就像是它们的家,而速行心就像是一个外来的客人。就像一个外人走进别人家里想讨点东西,如果主人们都默不作声,他却在那里发号施令,那是不合适的;同样,在作为转向等心之家的眼门里,当转向等心都没有贪染、没有嗔恨、没有迷乱的时候,速行心却生起贪染、嗔恨、迷乱,那也是不合适的。应当这样,从“外来者”的角度来了知不迷惑正知。巴利
Cakkhudvāre pana rūpe āpāthamāgate bhavaṅgacalanato uddhaṃ sakakiccanipphādanavasena āvajjanādīsu uppajjitvā niruddhesu avasāne javanaṃ uppajjati, taṃ pubbe uppannānaṃ āvajjanādīnaṃ gehabhūte cakkhudvāre āgantukapuriso viya hoti. Tassa yathā paragehe kiñci yācituṃ paviṭṭhassa āgantukapurisassa gehassāmikesu tuṇhīmāsinesu āṇākaraṇaṃ na yuttaṃ, evaṃ āvajjanādīnaṃ gehabhūte cakkhudvāre āvajjanādīsupi arajjantesu adussantesu amuyhantesu ca rajjanadussanamuyhanaṃ ayuttanti evaṃ āgantukabhāvavasena asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
那些在眼门生起、并以确定心为终点的心,它们和相应的心所一起,就在各自生起的地方坏灭,彼此看不到对方,所以是短暂、只维持一刹那的。就像在一间屋子里,所有人都死了,只剩下一个人,而这个人当下也就要死了,这时候他还去沉迷歌舞等享乐,那显然是不合适的。同样,在同一个门中,当转向等相应的心都在各自那里灭去后,剩下那个当下就要灭的速行心,如果还以贪染、嗔怒、迷乱的方式去耽著享乐,也是不合适的。应当这样,从“只维持一刹那”的角度来了知不迷惑正知。巴利
Yāni panetāni cakkhudvāre voṭṭhabbanapariyosānāni cittāni uppajjanti, tāni saddhiṃ sampayuttadhammehi tattha tattheva bhijjanti, aññamaññaṃ na passantīti, ittarāni tāvakālikāni honti. Tattha yathā ekasmiṃ ghare sabbesu mānusakesu matesu avasesassa ekassa taṅkhaṇaññeva maraṇadhammassa na yuttā naccagītādīsu abhirati nāma. Evameva ekadvāre sasampayuttesu āvajjanādīsu tattha tattheva matesu avasesassa taṅkhaṇeyeva maraṇadhammassa javanassāpi rajjanadussanamuyhanavasena abhirati nāma na yuttāti. Evaṃ tāvakālikabhāvavasena asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
另外,还可以从观察蕴、处、界、缘的角度来理解这一点。在这里,眼和色属于色蕴,看属于识蕴,与看相应的受属于受蕴,想属于想蕴,触等属于行蕴。这样,当这五蕴聚合在一起时,看和观就显现出来。那么,其中是谁在单独地看?是谁在单独地观?巴利
Api ca khandhāyatanadhātupaccayapaccavekkhaṇavasena petaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ettha hi cakkhu ceva rūpā ca rūpakkhandho, dassanaṃ viññāṇakkhandho, taṃsampayuttā vedanā vedanākkhandho, saññā saññākkhandho, phassādikā saṅkhārakkhandho. Evametesaṃ pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ samavāye ālokanavilokanaṃ paññāyati. Tattha ko eko āloketi, ko viloketi?
同样地,眼是眼处,色是色处,看是意处,受等相应法是法处。这四处和合在一起时,看和观就显现出来。那么,这里面到底是谁在单独地看?是谁在单独地观?巴利
Tathā cakkhu cakkhāyatanaṃ, rūpaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ, dassanaṃ manāyatanaṃ, vedanādayo sampayuttadhammā dhammāyatanaṃ. Evametesaṃ catunnaṃ āyatanānaṃ samavāye ālokanavilokanaṃ paññāyati. Tattha ko eko āloketi, ko viloketi?
同样地,眼是眼界,色是色界,看是眼识界,与它相应的受等诸法是法界。这四界和合在一起时,看和观就显现出来。那么在这里,是谁在单独地看?是谁在单独地观?巴利
Tathā cakkhu cakkhudhātu, rūpaṃ rūpadhātu, dassanaṃ cakkhuviññāṇadhātu, taṃsampayuttā vedanādayo dhammā dhammadhātu. Evametāsaṃ catunnaṃ dhātūnaṃ samavāye ālokanavilokanaṃ paññāyati. Tattha ko eko āloketi, ko viloketi?
同样地,眼是依止缘,色是所缘缘,转向是无间缘、等无间缘、亲依止缘、有缘、离去缘,光是亲依止缘,受等是俱生缘。当这些缘和合在一起时,看和观便显现出来。那么在这里,到底是谁在单独地看?是谁在观?在这里,应当通过观察蕴、处、界、缘的方式,来理解无痴正知。巴利
Tathā cakkhu nissayapaccayo, rūpā ārammaṇapaccayo, āvajjanaṃ anantarasamanantarūpanissayanatthivigatapaccayo , āloko upanissayapaccayo, vedanādayo sahajātapaccayo. Evametesaṃ paccayānaṃ samavāye ālokanavilokanaṃ paññāyati. Tattha ko eko āloketi, ko viloketīti? Evamettha khandhāyatanadhātupaccayapaccavekkhaṇavasenapi asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
关于“弯曲与伸直”,这里说的是肢体的屈伸。在那里,不是只凭心意去弯曲和伸直,而是要先把握手脚屈伸所带来的利与害,分辨什么是利益、什么是损害,再把握住利益,这就是利益正知。其中,如果有人过久地弯曲或伸直手脚,那么在他保持这种姿势的每一个刹那,受都会生起,心得不到一境性,业处会退失,不能证得殊胜。反之,若能适时弯曲、适时伸直,那些受就不会生起,心能得定,业处会增长,能证得殊胜。应当这样来了知对利益与非利益的把握。巴利
Samiñjite pasāriteti pabbānaṃ samiñjanapasāraṇe. Tattha cittavaseneva samiñjanapasāraṇaṃ akatvā hatthapādānaṃ samiñjanapasāraṇapaccayā atthānatthaṃ pariggaṇhitvā atthapariggaṇhanaṃ sātthakasampajaññaṃ. Tattha hatthapāde aticiraṃ samiñjetvā vā pasāretvā vā ṭhitassa khaṇe khaṇe vedanā uppajjati, cittaṃ ekaggataṃ na labhati, kammaṭṭhānaṃ paripatati, visesaṃ nādhigacchati. Kāle samiñjentassa kāle pasārentassa pana tā vedanā nuppajjanti, cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ phātiṃ gacchati, visesamadhigacchatīti , evaṃ atthānatthapariggaṇhanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
不过,即使有义时,也要分辨适合与不适合,选取适合的,这就是适合正知。这里的方法是——巴利
Atthe pana satipi sappāyāsappāyaṃ pariggaṇhitvā sappāyapariggaṇhanaṃ sappāyasampajaññaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ nayo –
据说,在大塔广场上,年轻比丘们正在诵习经典,他们背后的年轻比丘尼们则在听法。就在那里,一位年轻比丘伸手时碰到了身体,就因为这件事,他后来还俗成了在家人。另一位比丘伸脚时,把脚伸进了火里,骨头被烧坏,脚也烧伤了。又有一位把脚伸到蚁丘上,被毒蛇咬了。还有一位把脚伸到挂袈裟的竹竿那边,被宝石蛇咬了。所以,应当避免在这种不合适的地方伸手伸脚,而要在合适的地方伸展。这就是这里的适宜正知。巴利
Mahācetiyaṅgaṇe kira daharabhikkhū sajjhāyaṃ gaṇhanti, tesaṃ piṭṭhipassesu daharabhikkhuniyo dhammaṃ suṇanti. Tatreko daharo hatthaṃ pasārento kāyasaṃsaggaṃ patvā teneva kāraṇena gihī jāto. Aparo bhikkhu pādaṃ pasārento aggimhi pasāresi, aṭṭhimāhacca pādo jhāyi. Aparo vammike pasāresi, so āsīvisena ḍaṭṭho. Aparo cīvarakuṭidaṇḍake pasāresi, taṃ maṇisappo ḍaṃsi. Tasmā evarūpe asappāye apasāretvā sappāye pasāretabbaṃ. Idamettha sappāyasampajaññaṃ.
关于行境正知,可以用大长老的故事来说明。据说,大长老坐在日间住处,和弟子们交谈时,突然弯了一下手,然后又把手放回原位,再慢慢地弯。弟子们问他:“尊者,为什么您突然弯了手,又放回原位,再慢慢地弯呢?”大长老回答:“贤友们,从我一开始着手作意业处以来,从来没有舍离业处弯过手。可是刚才和你们交谈时,我舍离了业处弯了手,所以才放回原位,再带着业处慢慢地弯。”弟子们赞叹道:“萨度,尊者!比丘就应该这样。”因此,在这里也应了知:不舍离业处本身,就是行境正知。巴利
Gocarasampajaññaṃ pana mahātheravatthunā dīpetabbaṃ – mahāthero kira divāṭhāne nisinno antevāsikehi saddhiṃ kathayamāno sahasā hatthaṃ samiñjetvā puna yathāṭhāne ṭhapetvā saṇikaṃ samiñjesi. Taṃ antevāsikā pucchiṃsu – ‘‘kasmā, bhante, sahasā hatthaṃ samiñjitvā puna yathāṭhāne ṭhapetvā saṇikaṃ samiñjiyitthā’’ti? Yato paṭṭhāyāhaṃ, āvuso, kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikātuṃ āraddho, na me kammaṭṭhānaṃ muñcitvā hattho samiñjitapubbo, idāni pana me tumhehi saddhiṃ kathayamānena kammaṭṭhānaṃ muñcitvā samiñjito. Tasmā puna yathāṭhāne ṭhapetvā samiñjesinti. Sādhu , bhante, bhikkhunā nāma evarūpena bhavitabbanti. Evametthāpi kammaṭṭhānāvijahanameva gocarasampajaññanti veditabbaṃ.
身体内部并没有一个叫“我”的东西在弯曲或伸展。弯曲和伸展之所以发生,只是因为前面说过的心生风界被激发,像拉线牵动木偶的手脚那样动起来。能这样如实了知,就是这里所说的不迷乱正知。巴利
Abbhantare attā nāma koci samiñjento vā pasārento vā natthi, vuttappakāracittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphārena pana suttākaḍḍhanavasena dāruyantassa hatthapādalacalanaṃ viya samiñjanapasāraṇaṃ hotīti evaṃ parijānanaṃ panettha asammohasampajaññanti veditabbaṃ.
关于“持桑喀帝、钵与衣”这一说法:在这里,穿桑喀帝和衣、披桑喀帝和衣,以及用钵接受布施等受用方式,就叫做“持”。其中,先说持桑喀帝和衣:穿着或披着它们去乞食时,得到食物、抵御寒冷等,像这样由世尊所说的那种意义,就是“义”。依据这一点,应当了知“有义正知”。巴利
Saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇeti ettha saṅghāṭicīvarānaṃ nivāsanapārupanavasena pattassa bhikkhāpaṭiggahaṇādivasena paribhogo dhāraṇaṃ nāma. Tattha saṅghāṭicīvaradhāraṇe tāva nivāsetvā vā pārupitvā vā piṇḍāya carato āmisalābho sītassa paṭighātāyātiādinā nayena bhagavatā vuttappakāroyeva ca attho attho nāma. Tassa vasena sātthakasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
对天生怕热的人和身体虚弱的人来说,细薄的衣是合适的;对怕冷的人来说,厚实、双层的衣是合适的。反过来就不合适。对任何人来说,破旧的衣都不合适,因为缝补之类的事会给他造成障碍。同样,绢绸、天竺绸等让人贪著的衣也不合适。因为这样的衣对独住林中的人来说,会成为住处的障碍,甚至成为生命的障碍。更确定地说,凡是靠看相、占卜等邪命手段得来的衣,以及使用它时不善法增长、善法衰退的衣,就是不合适的。反过来则是合适的。依此,这里就是“适合正知”。只有在不舍弃业处的前提下,才应了知这是“行境正知”。巴利
Uṇhapakatikassa pana dubbalassa ca cīvaraṃ sukhumaṃ sappāyaṃ, sītālukassa ghanaṃ dupaṭṭaṃ. Viparītaṃ asappāyaṃ. Yassa kassaci jiṇṇaṃ asappāyameva, aggaḷādidānena hissa taṃ palibodhakaraṃ hoti. Tathā paṭṭuṇṇadukūlādibhedaṃ lobhanīyacīvaraṃ. Tādisañhi araññe ekakassa nivāsantarāyakaraṃ jīvitantarāyakarañcāpi hoti. Nippariyāyena pana yaṃ nimittakammādimicchājīvavasena uppannaṃ, yañcassa sevamānassa akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti, taṃ asappāyaṃ. Viparītaṃ sappāyaṃ. Tassa vasenettha sappāyasampajaññaṃ. Kammaṭṭhānāvijahanavaseneva gocarasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
身体里面并没有一个叫“我”的东西在披衣,而只是如前所说的那种由心造作的风界扩散作用,才使得披衣这件事发生。在这里,衣也是没有心识的,身体也是没有心识的。衣不知道“我盖住了身体”,身体也不知道“我被衣盖住了”。只是诸界在遮盖界的聚合,就像用布或碎布盖住书本一样。所以,不该因为得到好看的衣就生起欢喜,也不该因为得到不好看的衣就生起忧愁。巴利
Abbhantare attā nāma koci cīvaraṃ pārupento natthi, vuttappakārena cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva pana cīvarapārupanaṃ hoti. Tattha cīvarampi acetanaṃ, kāyopi acetano. Cīvaraṃ na jānāti – ‘‘mayā kāyo pārupito’’ti. Kāyopi na jānāti – ‘‘ahaṃ cīvarena pārupito’’ti. Dhātuyova dhātusamūhaṃ paṭicchādenti paṭapilotikāyapotthakarūpapaṭicchādane viya. Tasmā neva sundaraṃ cīvaraṃ labhitvā somanassaṃ kātabbaṃ, na asundaraṃ labhitvā domanassaṃ.
对于蚁丘、树神龛、树木等,有些人用花环、香、烟、布等来作供养恭敬,有些人则用粪便、尿、泥浆、棍棒、刀杖击打等来作不恭敬的行为。那些蚁丘、树木等并不会因此生起欢喜或忧恼。同样地,不应因为得到好看的袈裟就生起欢喜,也不应因为得到不好看的袈裟就生起忧恼。通过这样生起的省察,在这里应当了知为不迷乱正知。巴利
Nāgavammikacetiyarukkhādīsu hi keci mālāgandhadhūmavatthādīhi sakkāraṃ karonti, keci gūthamuttakaddamadaṇḍasatthappahārādīhi asakkāraṃ. Na tehi nāgavammikarukkhādayo somanassaṃ vā domanassaṃ vā karonti. Evameva neva sundaraṃ cīvaraṃ labhitvā somanassaṃ kātabbaṃ , na asundaraṃ labhitvā domanassanti, evaṃ pavattapaṭisaṅkhānavasenettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
即使在拿钵的时候,也不应该急匆匆地抓起钵,而应该这样想:“我拿着这个钵去乞食,就能得到食物。”像这样,以拿钵这件事为因缘、从应当获得的利益的角度来理解,这就是“有义正知”。巴利
Pattadhāraṇepi pattaṃ sahasāva aggahetvā imaṃ gahetvā piṇḍāya caramāno bhikkhaṃ labhissāmīti, evaṃ pattaggahaṇapaccayā paṭilabhitabbaṃ atthavasena sātthakasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
身体瘦弱的人,用沉重的钵不合适;任何人的钵如果有四五个凸起、难以洗净,也同样不合适。洗不干净的钵不能用,因为光是洗它就会成为障碍。光泽像宝石一样的钵容易让人贪著,就像在衣的那部分所说的那样,是不合适的。如果是通过看相、占卜等方式得到的钵,使用它时不善法增长、善法减退,这种钵就绝对不合适。与此相反的,才是合适的。依此,这里说的是“适合正知”。同时,只要不舍离业处,就应当理解为“行境正知”。巴利
Kisadubbalasarīrassa pana garupatto asappāyo, yassa kassaci catupañcagaṇṭhikāhato dubbisodhanīyo asappāyova. Duddhotapattopi na vaṭṭati, taṃ dhovantasseva cassa palibodho hoti. Maṇivaṇṇapatto pana lobhanīyo, cīvare vuttanayeneva asappāyo, nimittakammādivasena laddho pana yañcassa sevamānassa akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti, ayaṃ ekantaasappāyova. Viparīto sappāyo. Tassa vasenettha sappāyasampajaññaṃ. Kammaṭṭhānāvijahanavaseneva ca gocarasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
身体里面并没有什么叫做“我”的东西在拿钵;只是按照前面说的那样,由心所造作的風界的作用,才叫拿钵。在这里,钵没有心识,手也没有心识。钵不知道“我被手拿住了”,手也不知道“我们拿住了钵”。只是诸界在抓取诸界的聚合,就像用火钳夹起烧红的钵一样。应当通过这样生起的省察,在这里了知不迷乱正知。巴利
Abbhantare attā nāma koci pattaṃ gaṇhanto natthi, vuttappakārena cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāravaseneva pattaggahaṇaṃ nāma hoti. Tattha pattopi acetano, hatthāpi acetanā. Patto na jānāti – ‘‘ahaṃ hatthehi gahito’’ti. Hatthāpi na jānanti – ‘‘amhehi patto gahito’’ti. Dhātuyova dhātusamūhaṃ gaṇhanti, saṇḍāsena aggivaṇṇapattaggahaṇe viyāti. Evaṃ pavattapaṭisaṅkhānavasenettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
再者,就像有人看到那些躺在救济院里的人——手和脚都被砍断,伤口流着脓和血,长满蛆虫,被绿头苍蝇团团围住,孤苦无依——有慈悲心的人就会拿些破布给他们遮住伤口,又用头盖骨之类的容器把药递过去。在这些破布当中,有人拿到的是细软的,有人拿到的是粗硬的;那些盛药的容器,有人拿到的是形状好的,有人拿到的是形状差的。但他们不会因此高兴或不满,因为对他们来说,只要破布能盖住伤口、头盖骨能接住药,就足够了。同样,如果一位比丘把袈裟看作遮伤口的破布,把钵看作盛药的容器,把钵里得到的食物看作容器里的药,那么就该知道,他在穿用桑喀帝、钵和袈裟时,是以不迷乱的正知而行,具备最上的正知。巴利
Api ca yathā chinnahatthapāde vaṇamukhehi paggharitapubbalohitakimikule nīlamakkhikasamparikiṇṇe anāthasālāyaṃ nipanne anāthamanusse disvā, ye dayālukā purisā, te tesaṃ vaṇamattacoḷakāni ceva kapālādīhi ca bhesajjāni upanāmenti. Tattha coḷakānipi kesañci saṇhāni, kesañci thūlāni pāpuṇanti. Bhesajjakapālakānipi kesañci susaṇṭhānāni, kesañci dussaṇṭhānāni pāpuṇanti, na te tattha sumanā vā dummanā vā honti . Vaṇapaṭicchādanamatteneva hi coḷakena, bhesajjapaṭiggahaṇamatteneva ca kapālakena tesaṃ attho. Evameva yo bhikkhu vaṇacoḷakaṃ viya cīvaraṃ, bhesajjakapālakaṃ viya ca pattaṃ, kapāle bhesajjamiva ca patte laddhaṃ bhikkhaṃ sallakkheti, ayaṃ saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇe asammohasampajaññena uttamasampajānakārīti veditabbo.
在“吃”等当中,“吃”是指吃团食;“饮”是指喝粥等;“嚼”是指嚼粉饼等硬食;“尝”是指尝蜜、糖浆等。其中,以“不是为嬉戏”等这种方式所说的八种目的,就是所谓的“义”。应当依据这个义来理解“有义正知”。巴利
Asitādīsu asiteti piṇḍapātabhojane. Pīteti yāguādipāne. Khāyiteti piṭṭhakhajjādikhādane. Sāyiteti madhuphāṇitādisāyane. Tattha neva davāyātiādinā nayena vutto aṭṭhavidhopi attho attho nāma. Tasseva vasena sātthakasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
至于粗劣、精美、苦、甜等味道,如果某种食物让某人不舒服,那这种食物对那个人就是不适合的。而如果是通过看相、占卜等方式得来的食物,以及吃下去之后不善法增长、善法减退的食物,那就绝对是完全不适合的;反过来就是适合的。就这一点来说,这里说的是“适合正知”。而只要不放弃业处,就应当理解为“行境正知”。巴利
Lūkhapaṇītatittamadhurarasādīsu pana yena bhojanena yassa phāsu na hoti, taṃ tassa asappāyaṃ. Yaṃ pana nimittakammādivasena paṭiladdhaṃ, yañcassa bhuñjato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti, taṃ ekantaasappāyameva, viparītaṃ sappāyaṃ. Tassa vasenettha sappāyasampajaññaṃ. Kammaṭṭhānāvijahanavaseneva ca gocarasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
身体里面并没有什么叫做“我”的进食者。只是因为前面说的那种心所造的风界在起作用,才有取钵、接钵这回事。只是因为心所造的风界在起作用,才有手伸进钵里这回事。只是因为心所造的风界在起作用,才有捏饭团、拿起饭团、张开嘴这些动作,并不是有什么人用钥匙或机关把下颌骨撑开。只是因为心所造的风界在起作用,才有把饭团放进嘴里、上齿像杵一样捣碎、下齿像臼一样承接、舌头像手一样翻搅。就这样,舌尖的稀薄唾液和舌根的浓稠唾液把食物润湿。这食物在下齿的臼里,被像手一样的舌头翻来翻去,被唾液的水分浸湿,又被像杵一样的上齿捣碎,并没有什么人以汤匙或勺子把它送进体内,是风界自己让它进去的。进去之后,并没有什么人在那里铺上草席把它托住,是风界的力量让它停在那里。停在那里之后,并没有什么人在下面砌灶点火来煮它,是火界自己在煮。煮好之后,并没有什么人以棍子或竿子把它弄出去,是风界自己把它排出去。这样,风界负责推入、推出、维持、翻动、捣碎、弄干、排出。地界负责维持、翻动、捣碎、弄干。水界负责润湿并保持潮湿。火界把进入体内的食物煮熟。空界是通道。识界则随着如理作意在各个阶段正确地运作。应当以这种对正在发生的过程的反复观察,来理解这里所说的不迷乱正知。巴利
Abbhantare attā nāma koci bhuñjako natthi, vuttappakāracittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva pattappaṭiggahaṇaṃ nāma hoti. Cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva hatthassa patte otāraṇaṃ nāma hoti. Cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva ālopakaraṇaṃ ālopauddhāraṇaṃ mukhavivaraṇañca hoti, na koci kuñcikāya yantakena vā hanukaṭṭhīni vivarati. Cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva ālopassa mukhe ṭhapanaṃ, uparidantānaṃ musalakiccasādhanaṃ, heṭṭhimadantānaṃ udukkhalakiccasādhanaṃ, jivhāya hatthakiccasādhanañca hoti. Iti tattha aggajivhāya tanukakheḷo mūlajivhāya bahalakheḷo makkheti. Taṃ heṭṭhādantaudukkhale jivhāhatthaparivattakaṃ kheḷodakena temitaṃ uparidantamusalasañcuṇṇitaṃ koci kaṭacchunā vā dabbiyā vā antopavesento nāma natthi, vāyodhātuyāva pavisati. Paviṭṭhaṃ paviṭṭhaṃ koci palālasanthāraṃ katvā dhārento nāma natthi, vāyodhātuvaseneva tiṭṭhati. Ṭhitaṃ ṭhitaṃ koci uddhanaṃ katvā aggiṃ jāletvā pacanto nāma natthi, tejodhātuyāva paccati. Pakkaṃ pakkaṃ koci daṇḍakena vā yaṭṭhiyā vā bahi nīhārako nāma natthi, vāyodhātuyeva nīharati. Iti vāyodhātu paṭiharati ca, vītiharati ca, dhāreti ca, parivatteti ca, sañcuṇṇeti ca, visoseti ca, nīharati ca. Pathavīdhātu dhāreti ca, parivatteti ca, sañcuṇṇeti ca, visoseti ca. Āpodhātu sineheti ca, allattañca anupāleti. Tejodhātu antopaviṭṭhaṃ paripāceti. Ākāsadhātu añjaso hoti. Viññāṇadhātu tattha tattha sammāpayogamanvāya ābhujatīti. Evaṃ pavattapaṭisaṅkhānavasenettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
另外,还可以从十个方面来观察食物的可厌性:行走、寻求、受用、住处、贮藏、未熟、已熟、果实、流泄、涂润。由此应知这里属于不迷乱的明觉。若要详细解说,则可从《清净道论》中解说食厌想的部分来了解。巴利
Api ca gamanato pariyesanato paribhogato āsayato nidhānato aparipakkato paripakkato phalato nissandato sammakkhanatoti, evaṃ dasavidhapaṭikūlabhāvapaccavekkhaṇato pettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ. Vitthārakathā panettha visuddhimagge āhārapaṭikūlasaññāniddesato gahetabbā.
“大小便的行为”是指大便和小便的排泄动作。在这里,如果到了该排泄的时候却不排泄,全身就会出汗,眼睛发花,心无法专一,还会引发其他各种疾病。而排泄的人就不会有这一切问题,这就是这里的含义。应当依据这一点来理解“有益明了”。巴利
Uccārapassāvakammeti uccārassa ca passāvassa ca karaṇe. Tattha pattakāle uccārapassāvaṃ akarontassa sakalasarīrato sedā muccanti, akkhīni bhamanti, cittaṃ na ekaggaṃ hoti, aññe ca rogā uppajjanti. Karontassa pana sabbaṃ taṃ na hotīti ayamettha attho. Tassa vasena sātthakasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
在不对的地方大小便,就会犯戒,恶名增长,甚至有生命危险;在合适的地方大小便,这些都不会发生。这就是这里所说的“适宜”,依此应知为“适宜明了”。而“行境明了”,应当理解为不离开所修的业处。巴利
Aṭṭhāne uccārapassāvaṃ karontassa pana āpatti hoti, ayaso vaḍḍhati, jīvitantarāyo hoti, patirūpe ṭhāne karontassa sabbaṃ taṃ na hotīti idamettha sappāyaṃ tassa vasena sappāyasampajaññaṃ. Kammaṭṭhānāvijahanavaseneva ca gocarasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
身体里面并没有一个叫“我”的东西在拉屎撒尿,只是心所造的风界在推动,才有大小便这回事。就像成熟的脓疮破了,脓和血是不由自主地流出来的;又像装得太满的水罐,水是不由自主地溢出来的。同样,积在直肠和膀胱里的大小便,被风的力量逼着,就算不情愿也会排出来。可是这样排出来的大小便,既不是那位比丘自己的,也不是别人的,它只是身体排出来的东西而已。打个比方说,就像有人把水罐里的陈水倒掉,那水既不是他的,也不是别人的,只是做个清理罢了。应当这样结合当下发生的事来审察,于此了知不迷乱明了。巴利
Abbhantare attā nāma uccārapassāvakammaṃ karonto natthi, cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva pana uccārapassāvakammaṃ hoti . Yathā vā pana pakke gaṇḍe gaṇḍabhedena pubbalohitaṃ akāmatāya nikkhamati. Yathā ca atibharitā udakabhājanā udakaṃ akāmatāya nikkhamati. Evaṃ pakkāsayamuttavatthīsu sannicitā uccārapassāvā vāyuvegasamuppīḷitā akāmatāyapi nikkhamanti. So panāyaṃ evaṃ nikkhamanto uccārapassāvo neva tassa bhikkhuno attano hoti, na parassa, kevalaṃ sarīranissandova hoti. Yathā kiṃ? Yathā udakatumbato purāṇudakaṃ chaḍḍentassa neva taṃ attano hoti, na paresaṃ; kevalaṃ paṭijagganamattameva hoti; evaṃ pavattapaṭisaṅkhānavasenettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
在“行”等项目中,“行”是指行走;“住”是指站立;“坐”是指坐下;“卧”是指躺卧;“醒”是指清醒;“说”是指说话;“默然”是指不说话。在“行走时了知‘我在行走’,站立时了知‘我在站立’,坐下时了知‘我在坐下’,躺卧时了知‘我在躺卧’”这段经文里,说的是长时间威仪。在“前进、后退、前看、旁看、弯曲、伸展”这段经文里,说的是中等威仪。而这里说的“行、住、坐、卧、醒”,说的是细分威仪。因此,在这些威仪中,也应当依照前面所说的方式,理解为保持明觉而行动。巴利
Gatādīsu gateti gamane. Ṭhiteti ṭhāne. Nisinneti nisajjāya. Sutteti sayane. Jāgariteti jāgaraṇe. Bhāsiteti kathane. Tuṇhībhāveti akathane. ‘‘Gacchanto vā gacchāmīti pajānāti, ṭhito vā ṭhitomhīti pajānāti, nisinno vā nisinnomhīti pajānāti, sayāno vā sayānomhīti pajānātī’’ti imasmiñhi sutte addhānairiyāpathā kathitā. ‘‘Abhikkante paṭikkante ālokite vilokite samiñjite pasārite’’ti imasmiṃ majjhimā. ‘‘Gate ṭhite nisinne sutte jāgarite’’ti idha pana khuddakacuṇṇiyairiyāpathā kathitā. Tasmā tesupi vuttanayeneva sampajānakāritā veditabbā.
三藏大长老摩诃湿婆却说:有人走了很久,或者经行很久之后,停下来站着,这样审察:“经行时生起的那些色法与名法,就在这里灭尽了。”这个人就叫作“在行走时保持明觉而行”。巴利
Tipiṭakamahāsivatthero panāha – yo ciraṃ gantvā vā caṅkamitvā vā aparabhāge ṭhito iti paṭisañcikkhati – ‘‘caṅkamanakāle pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā’’ti . Ayaṃ gate sampajānakārī nāma.
有人正在读诵,或者在回答问题,或者在作意业处,站了很久之后,后来坐下来,这样省察:站立时生起的色法与名法,就在这里灭尽了。这就叫作于站立时具正知而行动的人。巴利
Yo sajjhāyaṃ vā karonto, pañhaṃ vā vissajjento, kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā manasikaronto ciraṃ ṭhatvā aparabhāge nisinno iti paṭisañcikkhati – ‘‘ṭhitakāle pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā’’ti. Ayaṃ ṭhite sampajānakārī nāma.
有人只是因为读诵等事而久坐,后来起身时这样审察:坐的时候生起的名色法,就在那里已经灭了。这个人就叫作于坐时具正知者。巴利
Yo sajjhāyādikaraṇavaseneva ciraṃ nisīditvā aparabhāge uṭṭhāya iti paṭisañcikkhati – ‘‘nisinnakāle pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā’’ti. Ayaṃ nisinne sampajānakārī nāma.
如果有人躺卧着,不管是诵经还是作意业处,之后入睡,醒来后再这样省察:“躺卧时生起的名色法,就在这里灭去了。”这个人就叫作“在睡眠时和清醒时都具足正知的人”。因为唯作心不转起时称为睡眠,转起时称为清醒。巴利
Yo pana nipannako sajjhāyaṃ vā karonto kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā manasikaronto niddaṃ okkamitvā aparabhāge uṭṭhāya iti paṭisañcikkhati – ‘‘sayanakāle pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā’’ti. Ayaṃ sutte jāgarite ca sampajānakārī nāma. Kiriyamayacittānañhi appavattanaṃ soppaṃ nāma, pavattanaṃ jāgaritaṃ nāma.
如果有人正在说话,他能具念、正知地说:“这个声音,是依靠嘴唇、牙齿、舌头、上腭,以及依靠心与之相应的运作才生起的。”或者,他长时间诵经之后,或者说法之后,或者修行业处之后,或者回答问题之后,后来沉默下来时,这样省察:“说话时生起的色法与名法,就在这里灭尽了。”这个人就叫做“在说话时具足正知的人”。巴利
Yo pana bhāsamāno – ‘‘ayaṃ saddo nāma oṭṭhe ca paṭicca, dante ca jivhañca tāluñca paṭicca, cittassa ca tadanurūpaṃ payogaṃ paṭicca jāyatī’’ti sato sampajānova bhāsati. Ciraṃ vā pana kālaṃ sajjhāyaṃ vā katvā, dhammaṃ vā kathetvā, kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā pavattetvā, pañhaṃ vā vissajjetvā, aparabhāge tuṇhībhūto iti paṭisañcikkhati – ‘‘bhāsitakāle uppannā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā’’ti. Ayaṃ bhāsite sampajānakārī nāma.
如果有人保持沉默,长时间作意于法或业处,之后这样审察:“在沉默期间生起的色法与非色法,就在这里灭尽了。”因为当有所造色在转起时,才叫“说话”;当它不转起时,就叫“沉默”。这个人就称为“在沉默时具足正知而行的人”。巴利
Yo tuṇhībhūto ciraṃ dhammaṃ vā kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā manasikatvā aparabhāge iti paṭisañcikkhati – ‘‘tuṇhībhūtakāle pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā’’ti. Upādārūpappavattiyañhi sati bhāsati nāma, asati tuṇhī bhavati nāmāti. Ayaṃ tuṇhībhāve sampajānakārī nāmāti.
这段是玛哈斯瓦长老所说的“不痴之行”,也正是《大念处经》所要表达的意思。不过,在《沙门果经》这里,四种正知全都可以得到。因此,在这里也应当依照前面所说的方式,从四种正知的角度来理解“正知而行”。而“正知而行”这个说法,在一切地方都应当理解为:与念相应的正知在起作用。因为“具足念与正知”这句话,就是对它的详细解释。在《分别论》中,这些词句已经这样分别说明了:“具念正知而前行,具念正知而返回。”像这样,“大王,如是”——也就是以与念相应的正知来前行等,这样的人就叫做具足念与正知,这就是它的意思。巴利
Tayidaṃ mahāsivattherena vuttaṃ asammohadhuraṃ mahāsatipaṭṭhānasutte adhippetaṃ. Imasmiṃ pana sāmaññaphale sabbampi catubbidhaṃ sampajaññaṃ labbhati. Tasmā vuttanayeneva cettha catunnaṃ sampajaññānaṃ vasena sampajānakāritā veditabbā. Sampajānakārīti ca sabbapadesu satisampayuttasseva sampajaññassa vasena attho veditabbo. Satisampajaññena samannāgatoti etassa hi padassa ayaṃ vitthāro. Vibhaṅgappakaraṇe pana – ‘‘sato sampajāno abhikkamati, sato sampajāno paṭikkamatī’’ti evaṃ etāni padāni vibhattāneva. Evaṃ, kho mahārājāti evaṃ satisampayuttassa sampajaññassa vasena abhikkamādīni pavattento satisampajaññena samannāgato nāma hotīti attho.
215 大王,在这里,“比丘是知足者”这句话中,“知足者”是指具备对任何资具的知足。而这种知足有十二种,即:对于衣,有随所得知足、随体力知足、随适宜知足三种;对于团食等也是如此。以下是它的分别说明:巴利
215.Idha, mahārāja, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hotīti ettha santuṭṭhoti itarītarapaccayasantosena samannāgato. So panesa santoso dvādasavidho hoti, seyyathidaṃ – cīvare yathālābhasantoso, yathābalasantoso, yathāsāruppasantosoti tividho. Evaṃ piṇḍapātādīsu. Tassāyaṃ pabhedavaṇṇanā –
在这里,一位比丘得到一件袈裟,不管是好的还是不好的。他就靠这件袈裟过日子,不再想要别的,就算得到别的也不接受。这就是他对袈裟的“随得而知足”。不过,如果他天生体弱,或者被疾病和衰老压垮,披着沉重的袈裟时觉得很吃力,那他就跟一位情况差不多的比丘交换,靠轻便的袈裟过日子,照样知足。这就是他对袈裟的“随力而知足”。还有一种比丘,能得到上等的资具。他得到钵、衣等物品中某一件贵重的钵或衣,或者得到很多钵和衣时,就想着:“这件给长老们、出家很久的人,这件适合多闻的人,这件给病人,这件给少有所得的人。”这样布施出去之后,他拿他们的旧袈裟,或者从垃圾堆之类的地方捡些破布,用那些旧袈裟和破布做成桑喀帝披着,也照样知足。这就是他对袈裟的“随适合而知足”。巴利
Idha bhikkhu cīvaraṃ labhati, sundaraṃ vā asundaraṃ vā. So teneva yāpeti, aññaṃ na pattheti, labhantopi na gaṇhati. Ayamassa cīvare yathālābhasantoso. Atha pana pakatidubbalo vā hoti, ābādhajarābhibhūto vā, garucīvaraṃ pārupanto kilamati. So sabhāgena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ taṃ parivattetvā lahukena yāpentopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa cīvare yathābalasantoso. Aparo paṇītapaccayalābhī hoti. So pattacīvarādīnaṃ aññataraṃ mahagghapattacīvaraṃ bahūni vā pana pattacīvarāni labhitvā idaṃ therānaṃ cirapabbajitānaṃ, idaṃ bahussutānaṃ anurūpaṃ, idaṃ gilānānaṃ, idaṃ appalābhīnaṃ hotūti datvā tesaṃ purāṇacīvaraṃ vā gahetvā saṅkārakūṭādito vā nantakāni uccinitvā tehi saṅghāṭiṃ katvā dhārentopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa cīvare yathāsāruppasantoso.
在这里,比丘得到团食,不管是粗劣的还是精美的,他就靠这些维持生活,不希求别的;即使得到别的,也不接受。这就是他对于团食的“随得之知足”。如果有人得到的团食与自己的体质相冲突,或者与病情相冲突,吃了之后身体不舒服,他就把这份团食送给志趣相投的比丘,从对方手里取合适的食物来吃,照样修行沙门之法,心里仍然满足。这就是他对于团食的“随力之知足”。还有一种比丘,得到大量精美的团食。他就像处理袈裟那样,把这些食物分给长老、出家已久的人、多闻的人、少有所得的人、生病的人,然后吃他们剩下的,或者再去乞食,把各种食物混在一起吃,心里仍然满足。这就是他对于团食的“随适合知足”。巴利
Idha pana bhikkhu piṇḍapātaṃ labhati lūkhaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vā, so teneva yāpeti, aññaṃ na pattheti, labhantopi na gaṇhati. Ayamassa piṇḍapāte yathālābhasantoso. Yo pana attano pakativiruddhaṃ vā byādhiviruddhaṃ vā piṇḍapātaṃ labhati, yenassa paribhuttena aphāsu hoti. So sabhāgassa bhikkhuno taṃ datvā tassa hatthato sappāyabhojanaṃ bhuñjitvā samaṇadhammaṃ karontopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa piṇḍapāte yathābalasantoso. Aparo bahuṃ paṇītaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ labhati. So taṃ cīvaraṃ viya theracirapabbajitabahussutaappalābhīgilānānaṃ datvā tesaṃ vā sesakaṃ piṇḍāya vā caritvā missakāhāraṃ bhuñjantopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa piṇḍapāte yathāsāruppasantoso.
在这里,比丘得到住处,不论合意还是不合意,他都不会因此产生欢喜或忧愁;哪怕只是草铺,他也随所得而满足。这就是他对住处的“随得之知足”。如果比丘得到的住处与他的体质相冲突,或与他的病情相冲突,住在那里让他身心不适,他就把那个住处让给志趣相投的比丘,然后住在对方让出的适合自己的住处里,依然感到满足。这就是他对住处的“随力之知足”。巴利
Idha pana bhikkhu senāsanaṃ labhati, manāpaṃ vā amanāpaṃ vā, so tena neva somanassaṃ, na domanassaṃ uppādeti; antamaso tiṇasanthārakenapi yathāladdheneva tussati. Ayamassa senāsane yathālābhasantoso. Yo pana attano pakativiruddhaṃ vā byādhiviruddhaṃ vā senāsanaṃ labhati, yatthassa vasato aphāsu hoti, so taṃ sabhāgassa bhikkhuno datvā tassa santake sappāyasenāsane vasantopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa senāsane yathābalasantoso.
另一位有大福德的人,能得到许多精美的住处,比如山洞、凉亭、楼阁等等。他把这些像施舍袈裟一样,送给长老、出家已久的人、多闻的人、少有所得的人和生病的人,然后自己无论住在哪里,都感到满足。这就是他在住处方面随适合而知的满足。还有一种人,他这样想:所谓最上等的住处,其实是让人放逸的地方。坐在那里,昏沉睡眠就会袭来;被睡眠压倒后,再醒来时,欲望的念头就会冒出来。这样想过之后,即使得到了那样的住处,他也不接受。他拒绝之后,住在露天、树下等地方,也一样感到满足。这也是他在住处方面随适合而知的满足。巴利
Aparo mahāpuñño leṇamaṇḍapakūṭāgārādīni bahūni paṇītasenāsanāni labhati. So tāni cīvaraṃ viya theracirapabbajitabahussutaappalābhīgilānānaṃ datvā yattha katthaci vasantopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa senāsane yathāsāruppasantoso. Yopi – ‘‘uttamasenāsanaṃ nāma pamādaṭṭhānaṃ, tattha nisinnassa thinamiddhaṃ okkamati, niddābhibhūtassa puna paṭibujjhato kāmavitakkā pātubhavantī’’ti paṭisañcikkhitvā tādisaṃ senāsanaṃ pattampi na sampaṭicchati. So taṃ paṭikkhipitvā abbhokāsarukkhamūlādīsu vasantopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayampissa senāsane yathāsāruppasantoso.
在这里,比丘得到医药,无论是粗劣的还是精美的,他对自己所得到的就感到满足,不再希求别的,即使有别的可得也不去拿。这就是他对病缘的随得之知足。但如果有人需要油,却得到了糖浆,他就把糖浆送给志趣相投的比丘,再从对方手里拿到油,或者另外去寻找,用来制药,也照样感到满足。这就是他对病缘的随力之知足。巴利
Idha pana bhikkhu bhesajjaṃ labhati, lūkhaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vā, so yaṃ labhati, teneva tussati, aññaṃ na pattheti, labhantopi na gaṇhati. Ayamassa gilānapaccaye yathālābhasantoso. Yo pana telena atthiko phāṇitaṃ labhati. So taṃ sabhāgassa bhikkhuno datvā tassa hatthato telaṃ gahetvā aññadeva vā pariyesitvā bhesajjaṃ karontopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa gilānapaccaye yathābalasantoso.
另一位有大福德的人,得到很多油、蜂蜜、糖浆等上等药物。他就像对待袈裟那样,把这些东西送给长老、出家已久的人、多闻的人、少有所得的人和生病的人,然后靠他们带回来的不管什么药物维持生活,也一样知足。可是,如果有人在一个容器里放牛尿诃子,在另一个容器里放四种甜药,然后对他说:“尊者,您想要哪个就拿哪个吧!”如果他的病用这两种药中的任何一种都能治好,这时他会想:“牛尿诃子可是佛陀等圣者所赞叹的。”于是拒绝四种甜药,只用牛尿诃子来做药,成为最知足的人。这就是他在病缘方面随宜相应的知足。巴利
Aparo mahāpuñño bahuṃ telamadhuphāṇitādipaṇītabhesajjaṃ labhati. So taṃ cīvaraṃ viya theracirapabbajitabahussutaappalābhīgilānānaṃ datvā tesaṃ ābhatena yena kenaci yāpentopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Yo pana ekasmiṃ bhājane muttaharīṭakaṃ ṭhapetvā ekasmiṃ catumadhuraṃ – ‘‘gaṇhāhi, bhante, yadicchasī’’ti vuccamāno sacassa tesu aññatarenapi rogo vūpasammati, atha muttaharīṭakaṃ nāma buddhādīhi vaṇṇitanti catumadhuraṃ paṭikkhipitvā muttaharīṭakeneva bhesajjaṃ karonto paramasantuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa gilānapaccaye yathāsāruppasantoso.
比丘具备这十二种对各类资具的知足,就有八种资具可以受用:三衣、钵、裁齿木的小刀、一根针、腰带、滤水囊。对此也有这样的说法:巴利
Iminā pana dvādasavidhena itarītarapaccayasantosena samannāgatassa bhikkhuno aṭṭha parikkhārā vaṭṭanti. Tīṇi cīvarāni, patto, dantakaṭṭhacchedanavāsi, ekā sūci, kāyabandhanaṃ parissāvananti. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
“ 三衣、钵、小刀、针和腰带,
连同滤水囊,这八样东西,属于精勤修行的比丘。”巴利
‘‘Ticīvarañca patto ca, vāsi sūci ca bandhanaṃ; Parissāvanena aṭṭhete, yuttayogassa bhikkhuno’’ti.
这些全都既是护身的,也是护腹的。怎么说呢?先说三衣:在下衣穿好、上衣披好之后四处走动时,它护着身体、养着身体,所以是护身的。用衣角滤水来喝的时候,以及拿取可吃的水果等食物的时候,它护着肚子、养着肚子,所以是护腹的。巴利
Te sabbe kāyaparihārikāpi honti kucchiparihārikāpi. Kathaṃ? Ticīvaraṃ tāva nivāsetvā ca pārupitvā ca vicaraṇakāle kāyaṃ pariharati, posetīti kāyaparihārikaṃ hoti. Cīvarakaṇṇena udakaṃ parissāvetvā pivanakāle khāditabbaphalāphalagahaṇakāle ca kucchiṃ pariharati; posetīti kucchiparihārikaṃ hoti.
钵也是这样:用它取水,在洗澡时和清理住处时,它是护身的东西;用它盛食物来吃时,它是护腹的东西。巴利
Pattopi tena udakaṃ uddharitvā nhānakāle kuṭiparibhaṇḍakaraṇakāle ca kāyaparihāriko hoti. Āhāraṃ gahetvā bhuñjanakāle kucchiparihāriko.
小刀也是这样:在砍齿木的时候,以及在整理床、椅的脚和靠背、衣架、小屋木柱等的时候,它是护身的东西;在砍甘蔗、削椰子等的时候,它是护腹的东西。巴利
Vāsipi tāya dantakaṭṭhacchedanakāle mañcapīṭhānaṃ aṅgapādacīvarakuṭidaṇḍakasajjanakāle ca kāyaparihārikā hoti. Ucchuchedananāḷikerāditacchanakāle kucchiparihārikā.
针也是这样:缝制袈裟时,是护身的东西;戳起糕饼或水果来吃时,是护肚的东西。巴利
Sūcipi cīvarasibbanakāle kāyaparihārikā hoti. Pūvaṃ vā phalaṃ vā vijjhitvā khādanakāle kucchiparihārikā.
系上身体的带子,在行走时它是保护身体的;捆绑甘蔗等,在拿取时它是保护肚子的。巴利
Kāyabandhanaṃ bandhitvā vicaraṇakāle kāyaparihārikaṃ. Ucchuādīni bandhitvā gahaṇakāle kucchiparihārikaṃ.
用滤水器滤过水,在洗澡时和整理住处周围时,它是护身之物;在滤饮用水时,用它取芝麻、米、谷芽等来嚼食时,它是护腹之物。这就是八资具比丘的资具限度。至于九资具比丘,进入卧处时,允许有铺地布或钥匙。十资具比丘,允许有坐具或皮片。十一资具比丘,允许有手杖或油筒。十二资具比丘,允许有伞或凉鞋。在这其中,不应说只有八资具比丘才算是知足,而其余的人是不知足、多欲、负担重。因为他们同样少欲、知足、容易养活、生活轻便。不过,世尊并不是针对他们来说这部经的,而是针对八资具比丘说的。他把小刀和针放进滤水器,再放进钵里,把钵挂在肩头,将三衣系在身上,就能随心所欲、轻松地离开。他不需要回头再取任何东西。为了显示这位比丘生活轻便,世尊才说:“他满足于护身之衣……”等等。其中,“护身的”意思是仅仅足以保护身体;“护腹的”意思是仅仅足以保护腹部。“即持而去”是指他把全部仅有的八资具都带上,系在身上就走。他不会生起“这是我的寺院、这是我的区域、这是我的侍者”之类的牵挂或系缚。他就像离弦之箭,又像离开象群的发情大象,随自己的意愿受用林丛、树下、山崖等住处,独自站立,独自坐下,在一切威仪中都是独一无伴的。巴利
Parissāvanaṃ tena udakaṃ parissāvetvā nhānakāle, senāsanaparibhaṇḍakaraṇakāle ca kāyaparihārikaṃ. Pānīyaṃ parissāvanakāle, teneva tilataṇḍulaputhukādīni gahetvā khādanakāle ca kucchiparihāriyaṃ. Ayaṃ tāva aṭṭhaparikkhārikassa parikkhāramattā. Navaparikkhārikassa pana seyyaṃ pavisantassa tatraṭṭhakaṃ paccattharaṇaṃ vā kuñcikā vā vaṭṭati. Dasaparikkhārikassa nisīdanaṃ vā cammakhaṇḍaṃ vā vaṭṭati. Ekādasaparikkhārikassa pana kattarayaṭṭhi vā telanāḷikā vā vaṭṭati. Dvādasaparikkhārikassa chattaṃ vā upāhanaṃ vā vaṭṭati. Etesu ca aṭṭhaparikkhārikova santuṭṭho, itare asantuṭṭhā mahicchā mahābhārāti na vattabbā. Etepi hi appicchāva santuṭṭhāva subharāva sallahukavuttinova. Bhagavā pana na yimaṃ suttaṃ tesaṃ vasena kathesi, aṭṭhaparikkhārikassa vasena kathesi. So hi khuddakavāsiñca sūciñca parissāvane pakkhipitvā pattassa anto ṭhapetvā pattaṃ aṃsakūṭe laggetvā ticīvaraṃ kāyapaṭibaddhaṃ katvā yenicchakaṃ sukhaṃ pakkamati. Paṭinivattetvā gahetabbaṃ nāmassa na hoti. Iti imassa bhikkhuno sallahukavuttitaṃ dassento bhagavā – ‘‘santuṭṭho hoti kāyaparihārikena cīvarenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha kāyaparihārikenāti kāyapariharaṇamattakena. Kucchiparihārikenāti kucchipariharaṇamattakena. Samādāyeva pakkamatīti aṭṭhaparikkhāramattakaṃ sabbaṃ gahetvāva kāyapaṭibaddhaṃ katvāva gacchati. ‘‘Mama vihāro pariveṇaṃ upaṭṭhāko’’ti āsaṅgo vā bandho vā na hoti. So jiyā mutto saro viya, yūthā apakkanto madahatthī viya ca icchiticchitaṃ senāsanaṃ vanasaṇḍaṃ rukkhamūlaṃ vanapabbhāraṃ paribhuñjanto ekova tiṭṭhati, ekova nisīdati. Sabbiriyāpathesu ekova adutiyo.
“ 他四处无碍,对任何方向都不生嗔恨,
无论得到什么都能满足。
能安忍于种种危难,身心都不惊慌恐惧,
一个人应当像犀牛角那样独自而行。”巴利
‘‘Cātuddiso appaṭigho ca hoti, Santussamāno itarītarena; Parissayānaṃ sahitā achambhī, Eko care khaggavisāṇakappo’’ti. (su. ni. 42);
他就达到了这样被称赞的犀牛角状态。巴利
Evaṃ vaṇṇitaṃ khaggavisāṇakappataṃ āpajjati.
现在,为了用譬喻说明这个道理,就说了“犹如……”等话。其中,“有翅膀的鸟”就是长着翅膀的鸟。“飞”就是飞起来。这里简要的意思是:鸟知道某个地方有棵树结了熟果,就从四面八方飞来,用爪、翅膀、嘴等啄击、摇动那些果实来吃。它们不会想“这是今天该吃的,那是明天该吃的”。等果实吃完了,它们不会为树设下守护,也不会在树上留下羽毛、爪或嘴。而是对那棵树毫无留恋,谁想去哪个方向,就只以双翅为负担振翅飞往那里。同样,这位比丘无所执著,无所牵挂,想去哪里就去哪里。因此说“即持而去”。巴利
Idāni tamatthaṃ upamāya sādhento – ‘‘seyyathāpī’’tiādimāha. Tattha pakkhī sakuṇoti pakkhayutto sakuṇo. Ḍetīti uppatati. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – sakuṇā nāma ‘‘asukasmiṃ padese rukkho paripakkaphalo’’ti ñatvā nānādisāhi āgantvā nakhapattatuṇḍādīhi tassa phalāni vijjhantā vidhunantā khādanti. ‘Idaṃ ajjatanāya, idaṃ svātanāya bhavissatī’ti tesaṃ na hoti. Phale pana khīṇe neva rukkhassa ārakkhaṃ ṭhapenti, na tattha pattaṃ vā nakhaṃ vā tuṇḍaṃ vā ṭhapenti. Atha kho tasmiṃ rukkhe anapekkho hutvā, yo yaṃ disābhāgaṃ icchati, so tena sapattabhārova uppatitvā gacchati. Evameva ayaṃ bhikkhu nissaṅgo nirapekkho yena kāmaṃ pakkamati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘samādāyeva pakkamatī’’ti.
论盖的断除巴利
Nīvaraṇappahānakathā
216 “他以这些……”这段话要说明什么?是要说明住阿兰若的资具具足。因为如果一个人没有这四种资具,他的阿兰若住就不能成就。他就会落到与畜生或林中游荡者相提并论的地步。住在阿兰若的天神会发出恐怖的声音,说:“像这样的恶比丘,住阿兰若有什么用?”还会用手拍打自己的头,做出要逃走的样子。恶名也会传开:“某比丘进了森林以后,做了这样那样的恶行。”但如果一个人具备这四种资具,他的阿兰若住就能成就。他回顾自己的戒行,看不到任何黑点或污痕,就生起喜悦;再观察这喜悦终归坏灭消散,便证入圣者的境界。住在阿兰若的天神心生欢喜,对他称扬赞叹。他的声望就像滴入水中的油滴一样,向四周扩散开来。巴利
216.Soiminā cātiādinā kiṃ dasseti? Araññavāsassa paccayasampattiṃ dasseti. Yassa hi ime cattāro paccayā natthi, tassa araññavāso na ijjhati. Tiracchānagatehi vā vanacarakehi vā saddhiṃ vattabbataṃ āpajjati. Araññe adhivatthā devatā – ‘‘kiṃ evarūpassa pāpabhikkhuno araññavāsenā’’ti bheravasaddaṃ sāventi, hatthehi sīsaṃ paharitvā palāyanākāraṃ karonti. ‘‘Asuko bhikkhu araññaṃ pavisitvā idañcidañca pāpakammaṃ akāsī’’ti ayaso pattharati. Yassa panete cattāro paccayā atthi, tassa araññavāso ijjhati. So hi attano sīlaṃ paccavekkhanto kiñci kāḷakaṃ vā tilakaṃ vā apassanto pītiṃ uppādetvā taṃ khayavayato sammasanto ariyabhūmiṃ okkamati. Araññe adhivatthā devatā attamanā vaṇṇaṃ bhaṇanti. Itissa udake pakkhittatelabindu viya yaso vitthāriko hoti.
在这里,“远离”是指空寂、没有声音、没有喧闹的意思。正是针对这一点,《分别论》中说:“所谓‘远离’,即使坐卧的地方就在附近,只要那里没有在家人和出家人聚集混杂,那就可以称为远离。”而“坐卧具”这个词,是因为人们在那里躺卧和坐,所以是床、椅等物的统称。因此说:“‘坐卧具’:床是坐卧具,椅子也是,褥垫也是,枕头也是,精舍也是,半覆屋也是,殿堂也是,楼阁也是,台榭也是,石窟也是,依处也是,堂也是,茅舍也是,竹林丛也是,树下也是,帐幕也是坐卧具;乃至比丘们返回、停留的任何地方,这一切都叫作坐卧具。”巴利
Tattha vivittanti suññaṃ, appasaddaṃ, appanigghosanti attho. Etadeva hi sandhāya vibhaṅge – ‘‘vivittanti santike cepi senāsanaṃ hoti, tañca anākiṇṇaṃ gahaṭṭhehi pabbajitehi. Tena taṃ vivitta’’nti vuttaṃ. Seti ceva āsati ca etthāti senāsanaṃ mañcapīṭhādīnametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘senāsananti mañcopi senāsanaṃ , pīṭhampi, bhisipi, bimbohanampi, vihāropi, aḍḍhayogopi, pāsādopi, hammiyampi, guhāpi, aṭṭopi, māḷopi leṇampi, veḷugumbopi, rukkhamūlampi, maṇḍapopi, senāsanaṃ, yattha vā pana bhikkhū paṭikkamanti, sabbametaṃ senāsana’’nti (vibha. 527).
另外,“精舍、半覆屋、殿堂、楼阁、洞窟”,这叫作住处的坐卧具。“床、椅、褥、枕”,这叫作床椅的坐卧具。“毛毯、皮革片、草席、叶席”,这叫作铺设物的坐卧具。“或者比丘们返回的任何地方”,这叫作场所的坐卧具。这样,坐卧具共有四种,这一切都被“坐卧具”这个名称所统摄。巴利
Api ca – ‘‘vihāro aḍḍhayogo pāsādo hammiyaṃ guhā’’ti idaṃ vihārasenāsanaṃ nāma. ‘‘Mañco pīṭhaṃ bhisi bimbohana’’nti idaṃ mañcapīṭhasenāsanaṃ nāma. ‘‘Cimilikā cammakhaṇḍo tiṇasanthāro paṇṇasanthāro’’ti idaṃ santhatasenāsanaṃ nāma. ‘‘Yattha vā pana bhikkhū paṭikkamantī’’ti idaṃ okāsasenāsanaṃ nāmāti. Evaṃ catubbidhaṃ senāsanaṃ hoti, taṃ sabbaṃ senāsanaggahaṇena saṅgahitameva.
在这里,为了说明什么样的住处适合那位像鸟一样、心不执著一方的比丘,经文接着说了“阿兰若、树下”等等。
其中,“阿兰若”是指走出村落、越过门槛之外的一切地方。这一段是随顺比丘尼的情况而说的。而《分别》里说的“所谓阿兰若住处,是指最远五百弓的距离”,这才符合这位比丘的情况。它的具体特征,在《清净道论》的“头陀支解说”中已经讲过。
“树下”是指任何树荫浓密、幽静无人的树下。
“山”是指岩石山地。在那里,于山中的水池边洗完澡,坐在清凉的树荫下,当各方景象清晰可见、清凉的风吹拂着坐者时,心便得专一。
“岩窟”是指两山之间,或就在一座山中,有像隧道一样的大洞穴,具有坟场特征,这在《清净道论》中已说过。
“林丛”是指越过村界之后,人们不耕作、不播种、众人也不去的地方,因此说“林丛是远离住处之异名”等等。
“露地”是指没有遮盖的地方。若愿意,便在那里造一间衣屋而住。
“草堆”是指草堆。人们从大草堆中抽出草来,在像山洞石窟一样的住处里做成居所,也把草放在树丛、灌木丛等上面,坐在下面修沙门法。就是针对这个而这样说。巴利
Idha panassa sakuṇasadisassa cātuddisassa bhikkhuno anucchavikasenāsanaṃ dassento araññaṃ rukkhamūlantiādimāha. Tattha araññanti nikkhamitvā bahi indakhīlā sabbametaṃ araññanti. Idaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ vasena āgataṃ. ‘‘Āraññakaṃ nāma senāsanaṃ pañcadhanusatikaṃ pacchima’’nti (pārā. 654) idaṃ pana imassa bhikkhuno anurūpaṃ. Tassa lakkhaṇaṃ visuddhimagge dhutaṅganiddese vuttaṃ. Rukkhamūlanti yaṃ kiñci sandacchāyaṃ vivittarukkhamūlaṃ. Pabbatanti selaṃ. Tattha hi udakasoṇḍīsu udakakiccaṃ katvā sītāya rukkhacchāyāya nisinnassa nānādisāsu khāyamānāsu sītena vātena bījiyamānassa cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti. Kandaranti kaṃ vuccati udakaṃ, tena dāritaṃ, udakena bhinnaṃ pabbatapadesaṃ. Yaṃ nadītumbantipi, nadīkuñjantipi vadanti. Tattha hi rajatapaṭṭasadisā vālikā hoti, matthake maṇivitānaṃ viya vanagahaṇaṃ, maṇikhandhasadisaṃ udakaṃ sandati. Evarūpaṃ kandaraṃ oruyha pānīyaṃ pivitvā gattāni sītāni katvā vālikaṃ ussāpetvā paṃsukūlacīvaraṃ paññapetvā nisinnassa samaṇadhammaṃ karoto cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti. Giriguhanti dvinnaṃ pabbatānaṃ antare, ekasmiṃyeva vā umaggasadisaṃ mahāvivaraṃ susānalakkhaṇaṃ visuddhimagge vuttaṃ. Vanapatthanti gāmantaṃ atikkamitvā manussānaṃ anupacāraṭṭhānaṃ, yattha na kasanti na vapanti, tenevāha – ‘‘vanapatthanti dūrānametaṃ senāsanānaṃ adhivacana’’ntiādi. Abbhokāsanti acchannaṃ. Ākaṅkhamāno panettha cīvarakuṭiṃ katvā vasati. Palālapuñjanti palālarāsi. Mahāpalālapuñjato hi palālaṃ nikkaḍḍhitvā pabbhāraleṇasadise ālaye karonti, gacchagumbhādīnampi upari palālaṃ pakkhipitvā heṭṭhā nisinnā samaṇadhammaṃ karonti. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.
饭后,就是吃过饭之后。乞食归来,就是从寻找团食的地方回来。结跏趺坐,就是把双腿在四周盘结起来的坐姿。结跏趺,就是盘结。把身体挺直,就是把上半身竖直,让十八节脊椎骨尖端对尖端、笔直相接。这样坐着的时候,皮肤、肌肉、筋腱不会弯曲。如果它们弯曲,那种因为弯曲而每一刹那生起的受就会产生;但它们不产生。那些受不生起时,心就专一,业处不会散乱,会增长、发展、广大。把念安立在面前,就是把念安放在业处面前,或者安放在口鼻附近。因此,《分别论》中说:“这念已安立、善安立于鼻端或口相,因此说‘把念安立在面前’。”或者说,pari是摄持之义,mukha是出离之义,sati是安立之义,因此说“把念安立在面前”。这里也应依照《无碍解道》所说的方法理解其义。其中简要来说,就是“作摄持出离之念”。巴利
Pacchābhattanti bhattassa pacchato. Piṇḍapātapaṭikkantoti piṇḍapātapariyesanato paṭikkanto. Pallaṅkanti samantato ūrubaddhāsanaṃ. Ābhujitvāti bandhitvā. Ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāyāti uparimaṃ sarīraṃ ujuṃ ṭhapetvā aṭṭhārasa piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṭṭhike koṭiyā koṭiṃ paṭipādetvā. Evañhi nisinnassa cammamaṃsanhārūni na paṇamanti. Athassa yā tesaṃ paṇamanapaccayā khaṇe khaṇe vedanā uppajjeyyuṃ, tā nuppajjanti. Tāsu anuppajjamānāsu cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ na paripatati, vuḍḍhiṃ phātiṃ vepullaṃ upagacchati. Parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvāti kammaṭṭhānābhimukhaṃ satiṃ ṭhapayitvā. Mukhasamīpe vā katvāti attho. Teneva vibhaṅge vuttaṃ – ‘‘ayaṃ sati upaṭṭhitā hoti sūpaṭṭhitā nāsikagge vā mukhanimitte vā, tena vuccati parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā’’ti (vibha. 537). Athavā parīti pariggahaṭṭho. Mukhanti niyyānaṭṭho. Satīti upaṭṭhānaṭṭho. Tena vuccati – ‘‘parimukhaṃ sati’’nti. Evaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ vuttanayenapettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepo – ‘‘pariggahitaniyyānasatiṃ katvā’’ti.
217 217. “贪欲就是世间”:在这里,以坏灭、崩坏之义,五取蕴就是世间。因此,这句话的意思是:在五取蕴中舍断贪染,镇伏爱欲。“已离贪欲”:因为通过镇伏而断除,所以是“已离贪欲”,意思是说,并不是像眼识那样本来就没有贪欲。“令心从贪欲中净化”:就是令心从贪欲中解脱出来。就像那样,它既令心解脱,解脱之后也不再执取,如此而行,这就是其含义。在“舍离嗔害”等句中,道理也与此相同。“嗔害”:由于它使心败坏,犹如腐坏的豆羹等物失坏先前的本性,所以是“嗔害”。以变坏而败坏,或者败坏、毁灭他人,所以是“害”。这两者都是嗔的同义词。“昏沉”:是心的病。“睡眠”:是心所的病,昏沉和睡眠合为“昏沉睡眠”。“光明想”:以能于夜间也了知如同白昼所见的光明,具足已离盖、清净之想。“具念正知”:具足念与智。这是就二者对光明想有助益而说的。“掉举恶作”:掉举和恶作合为“掉举恶作”。“度疑”:已渡越、超越疑而安住。不会这样生起:“这是怎样?这是怎样?”所以是“度疑”。“于诸善法”:于无可呵责之法。不会这样疑惑:“这些是善吗?这些如何是善?”意思是不犹豫。这是此处的略说。然而,关于这些盖,依语词、相、特相等分别而应当说的,那一切都已在《清净道论》中说过。巴利
217.Abhijjhaṃ loketi ettha lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena pañcupādānakkhandhā loko, tasmā pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu rāgaṃ pahāya kāmacchandaṃ vikkhambhetvāti ayametthattho. Vigatābhijjhenāti vikkhambhanavasena pahīnattā vigatābhijjhena, na cakkhuviññāṇasadisenāti attho. Abhijjhāya cittaṃ parisodhetīti abhijjhāto cittaṃ parimoceti. Yathā taṃ sā muñcati ceva, muñcitvā ca na puna gaṇhati, evaṃ karotīti attho. Byāpādapadosaṃ pahāyātiādīsupi eseva nayo. Byāpajjati iminā cittaṃ pūtikummāsādayo viya purimapakatiṃ vijahatīti byāpādo. Vikārāpattiyā padussati, paraṃ vā padūseti vināsetīti padoso. Ubhayametaṃ kodhassevādhivacanaṃ . Thinaṃ cittagelaññaṃ. Middhaṃ cetasikagelaññaṃ, thinañca middhañca thinamiddhaṃ. Ālokasaññīti rattimpi divādiṭṭhālokasañjānanasamatthāya vigatanīvaraṇāya parisuddhāya saññāya samannāgato. Sato sampajānoti satiyā ca ñāṇena ca samannāgato. Idaṃ ubhayaṃ ālokasaññāya upakārattā vuttaṃ. Uddhaccañca kukkuccañca uddhaccakukkuccaṃ. Tiṇṇavicikicchoti vicikicchaṃ taritvā atikkamitvā ṭhito. ‘‘Kathamidaṃ kathamida’’nti evaṃ nappavattatīti akathaṃkathī. Kusalesu dhammesūti anavajjesu dhammesu. ‘‘Ime nu kho kusalā kathamime kusalā’’ti evaṃ na vicikicchati. Na kaṅkhatīti attho. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Imesu pana nīvaraṇesu vacanatthalakkhaṇādibhedato yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ visuddhimagge vuttaṃ.
218 218. 再者,这里所说的“譬如大王”是一个譬喻。其中,“借了债”是指拿了要付利息的钱财。“让债务终结”是指把债务彻底了结,做到连一枚小铜钱那么一点的残余都不剩下,这样来了结;意思就是全部还清。“以此为因”是指无债这个原因。因为他心里想着“我没有债务了”,就会生起强有力的欢喜,获得喜悦。因此说“他会得到欢喜,获得喜悦”。巴利
218. Yā panāyaṃ seyyathāpi mahārājāti upamā vuttā. Tattha iṇaṃ ādāyāti vaḍḍhiyā dhanaṃ gahetvā. Byantiṃ kareyyāti vigatantaṃ kareyya , yathā tesaṃ kākaṇikamattopi pariyanto nāma nāvasissati, evaṃ kareyya; sabbaso paṭiniyyāteyyāti attho. Tato nidānanti āṇaṇyanidānaṃ. So hi ‘‘aṇaṇomhī’’ti āvajjanto balavapāmojjaṃ labhati, somanassaṃ adhigacchati, tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘labhetha pāmojjaṃ, adhigaccheyya somanassa’’nti.
219 疾病:由于生起不相应的感受,身体就像被锯子割断四威仪那样受到侵害,所以叫疾病。他有这种病,就是病者。他被由此而生的苦所折磨。重病就是极其严重的病。不喜:因为被极重的病所困扰,所以对食物不喜欢。仅些许体力:就是指体力本身,意思是身体里几乎没有力气。以此为因:就是健康之因。因为他心想我健康了,那两种欢喜和喜悦就会生起。因此说他会得到欢喜,获得喜悦。巴利
219. Visabhāgavedanuppattiyā kakaceneva catuiriyāpathaṃ chindanto ābādhatīti ābādho, svāssa atthīti ābādhiko. Taṃ samuṭṭhānena dukkhena dukkhito. Adhimattagilānoti bāḷhagilāno. Nacchādeyyāti adhimattabyādhiparetatāya na rucceyya. Balamattāti balameva, balañcassa kāye na bhaveyyāti attho. Tatonidānanti ārogyanidānaṃ. Tassa hi – ‘‘arogomhī’’ti āvajjayato tadubhayaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘labhetha pāmojjaṃ, adhigaccheyya somanassa’’nti.
220 连一丁点财产的损失都不会有。“由于那个原因”是指从束缚中解脱的原因。剩下的部分,都应当按照前面说过的方式在各处套用理解。巴利
220.Na cassa kiñci bhogānaṃ vayoti kākaṇikamattampi bhogānaṃ vayo na bhaveyya. Tatonidānanti bandhanāmokkhanidānaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva sabbapadesu yojetabbaṃ.
221-222 不自在:就是不能自主,不能凭自己的喜好做任何事。受他人支配:就是受别人控制,只能按别人的喜好行事。不能想去哪里就去哪里:即使心里想去某个方向、生起了想去的欲求,也没办法去。奴隶状态:就是奴隶的身份。自由人:就是属于自己的。由此原因:指获得自由的原因。旷野长途道路:就是旷野中的长途旅程,意思是无水的漫长路途。由此原因:指到达安稳之地的原因。巴利
221-222.Anattādhīnoti na attani adhīno, attano ruciyā kiñci kātuṃ na labhati. Parādhīnoti paresu adhīno parasseva ruciyā vattati. Na yena kāmaṃ gamoti yena disābhāgenassa gantukāmatā hoti, icchā uppajjati gamanāya, tena gantuṃ na labhati. Dāsabyāti dāsabhāvā. Bhujissoti attano santako. Tatonidānanti bhujissanidānaṃ. Kantāraddhānamagganti kantāraṃ addhānamaggaṃ, nirudakaṃ dīghamagganti attho. Tatonidānanti khemantabhūminidānaṃ.
223 223. 在“这些五盖未断”这句话里,世尊把未断的欲贪盖比作债务,把其余诸盖比作疾病等,以此来开示。其中的相似之处是这样的:如果有人借了别人的债挥霍掉,当债主们对他说“还债”,辱骂他、捆绑他、甚至要杀他时,他都没法反抗,只能全部忍受。因为他欠着债,这就是他忍受的原因。同样,如果一个人对某样东西生起欲贪,以与渴爱相应的心执取那件事物,那么当他因此被辱骂、被捆绑、被杀害时,他也会全部忍受。因为他那份欲贪就是他忍受的原因,就像那些被家主杀害的女人一样。所以,欲贪应该被看作如同债务。巴利
223.Ime pañca nīvaraṇe appahīneti ettha bhagavā appahīnakāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ iṇasadisaṃ, sesāni rogādisadisāni katvā dasseti. Tatrāyaṃ sadisatā. Yo hi paresaṃ iṇaṃ gahetvā vināseti, so tehi iṇaṃ dehīti vuccamānopi pharusaṃ vuccamānopi bajjhamānopi vadhīyamānopi kiñci paṭibāhituṃ na sakkoti, sabbaṃ titikkhati. Titikkhākāraṇaṃ hissa taṃ iṇaṃ hoti. Evameva yo yamhi kāmacchandena rajjati, taṇhāsahagatena taṃ vatthuṃ gaṇhati, so tena pharusaṃ vuccamānopi bajjhamānopi vadhīyamānopi sabbaṃ titikkhati, titikkhākāraṇaṃ hissa so kāmacchando hoti, gharasāmikehi vadhīyamānānaṃ itthīnaṃ viyāti, evaṃ iṇaṃ viya kāmacchando daṭṭhabbo.
就像患胆病的人,即使有人给他蜂蜜、糖浆等东西,他因为胆病的缘故,尝不出那些东西的味道,只会吐出来喊:“苦啊,苦啊!”同样,心怀嗔恨的人,即使利益他的亲教师、轨范师稍微给他一点教导,他也不接受。他会说:“你们太烦扰我了”之类的话,然后就走掉了。就像那个胆病患者尝不出蜂蜜、糖浆等的味道一样,这个被嗔怒之病控制的人,也尝不出禅定之乐等教法之味。因此,应当把嗔害看成和疾病一样。巴利
Yathā pana pittarogāturo madhusakkarādīsupi dinnesu pittarogāturatāya tesaṃ rasaṃ na vindati, ‘‘tittakaṃ tittaka’’nti uggiratiyeva. Evameva byāpannacitto hitakāmehi ācariyupajjhāyehi appamattakampi ovadiyamāno ovādaṃ na gaṇhati. ‘‘Ati viya me tumhe upaddavethā’’tiādīni vatvā vibbhamati. Pittarogāturatāya so puriso madhusakkarādīnaṃ viya kodhāturatāya jhānasukhādibhedaṃ sāsanarasaṃ na vindatīti. Evaṃ rogo viya byāpādo daṭṭhabbo.
就像在星宿节那天,一个被关在牢里的人,看不到星宿庆典的开始、中间和结尾。第二天他被放出来之后,即使听到别人说“昨天的星宿节真好啊”“那舞蹈真棒”“那歌声真美”之类的话,他也接不上话。为什么呢?因为他根本没有亲身经历过那场星宿节。同样,一个被昏沉睡眠压倒的比丘,即使有人正在讲一场内容丰富、方式巧妙的法,他也既不知道开头,不知道中间,也不知道结尾。等法谈结束之后,听到别人称赞“那场法谈真好啊”“那个道理真妙啊”“那个譬喻真精彩啊”,他也一样接不上话。为什么呢?因为被昏沉睡眠控制着,他全程都没有真正体验到那场法谈。所以,应该把昏沉睡眠看作像牢狱一样。巴利
Yathā pana nakkhattadivase bandhanāgāre baddho puriso nakkhattassa neva ādiṃ na majjhaṃ na pariyosānaṃ passati. So dutiyadivase mutto aho hiyyo nakkhattaṃ manāpaṃ, aho naccaṃ, aho gītantiādīni sutvāpi paṭivacanaṃ na deti. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Nakkhattassa ananubhūtattā. Evameva thinamiddhābhibhūto bhikkhu vicittanayepi dhammassavane pavattamāne neva tassa ādiṃ na majjhaṃ na pariyosānaṃ jānāti. Sopi uṭṭhite dhammassavane aho dhammassavanaṃ, aho kāraṇaṃ, aho upamāti dhammassavanassa vaṇṇaṃ bhaṇamānānaṃ sutvāpi paṭivacanaṃ na deti. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Thinamiddhavasena dhammakathāya ananubhūtattā. Evaṃ bandhanāgāraṃ viya thinamiddhaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
再打个比方:一个奴隶虽然正在欢庆星宿节,主人却命令他:“有件急事,你赶快去那里。要是你不去,我就砍断你的手脚,割掉你的耳朵鼻子!”他只好立刻赶去,根本没法体验星宿节的开头、中间和结尾。为什么呢?因为他受别人控制。同样,一个对律不熟悉的人,即使为了远离而进入森林,只要对任何一件事——哪怕是对可以吃的肉——生起“这是不可以吃的肉”的念头,他就不得不放下远离,为了清净戒律而去找持律者,没法享受远离的快乐。为什么呢?因为他被掉举和悔恨压住了。所以,应该把掉举和悔恨看成跟奴隶一样。巴利
Yathā pana nakkhattaṃ kīḷantopi dāso – ‘‘idaṃ nāma accāyikaṃ karaṇīyaṃ atthi, sīghaṃ tattha gacchāhi. No ce gacchasi, hatthapādaṃ vā te chindāmi kaṇṇanāsaṃ vā’’ti vutto sīghaṃ gacchatiyeva . Nakkhattassa ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ anubhavituṃ na labhati, kasmā? Parādhīnatāya, evameva vinaye apakataññunā vivekatthāya araññaṃ paviṭṭhenāpi kismiñcideva antamaso kappiyamaṃsepi akappiyamaṃsasaññāya uppannāya vivekaṃ pahāya sīlavisodhanatthaṃ vinayadharassa santikaṃ gantabbaṃ hoti, vivekasukhaṃ anubhavituṃ na labhati, kasmā? Uddhaccakukkuccābhibhūtatāyāti. Evaṃ dāsabyaṃ viya uddhaccakukkuccaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
就像一个人走在荒野荒漠的长途上,看见人们被强盗抢劫、殴打的地方,又听到棍棒声或鸟叫声,就疑神疑鬼地想“强盗来了”,于是他走走停停,甚至转身往回走,已走的地方反而比未走的地方少得多。他费尽艰难困苦,也许能到达安全之地,也许到不了。同样,对八事生起疑惑的人,以“这是佛陀吗?这不是佛陀吧?”这样的方式不断疑惑,就无法下定决心、以信心来接受。无法接受,就证不到道或果。就像在荒野荒漠的路上,反复琢磨“有强盗、没强盗”,心四处游走、徘徊、不得透彻、生起恐惧,障碍了到达安全之地;疑惑也是如此,以“这是佛陀吗?不是佛陀吗?”等方式反复琢磨,心四处游走、徘徊、不得透彻、生起恐惧,障碍了到达圣者之地。所以应当把疑惑看作如同荒野荒漠之路。巴利
Yathā pana kantāraddhānamaggappaṭipanno puriso corehi manussānaṃ viluttokāsaṃ pahatokāsañca disvā daṇḍakasaddenapi sakuṇasaddenapi ‘‘corā āgatā’’ti ussaṅkitaparisaṅkitova hoti, gacchatipi tiṭṭhatipi nivattatipi, gataṭṭhānato agataṭṭhānameva bahutaraṃ hoti. So kicchena kasirena khemantabhūmiṃ pāpuṇāti vā na vā pāpuṇāti. Evameva yassa aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu vicikicchā uppannā hoti, so – ‘‘buddho nu kho, no nu kho buddho’’tiādinā nayena vicikicchanto adhimuccitvā saddhāya gaṇhituṃ na sakkoti. Asakkonto maggaṃ vā phalaṃ vā na pāpuṇātīti. Yathā kantāraddhānamagge – ‘‘corā atthi natthī’’ti punappunaṃ āsappanaparisappanaṃ apariyogāhanaṃ chambhitattaṃ cittassa uppādento khemantapattiyā antarāyaṃ karoti, evaṃ vicikicchāpi – ‘‘buddho nu kho, na buddho’’tiādinā nayena punappunaṃ āsappanaparisappanaṃ apariyogāhanaṃ chambhitattaṃ cittassa uppādayamānā ariyabhūmippattiyā antarāyaṃ karotīti kantāraddhānamaggo viya vicikicchā daṭṭhabbā.
224 224. 现在,在“大王,犹如无债”这一段里,世尊把已经断除的贪欲盖比作无债,把其余诸盖比作无病等,这样来显示。这里的相似之处是这样的:好比一个人借了债去经营事业,成功后心想:“这笔债务确实是障碍的根源。”于是连本带息还清债务,让人撕掉借据。从那时起,再没有人派使者来,也没有人送催债的信来。他见到债主时,如果愿意就起身,不愿意就不起身。为什么?因为和那些人已经毫无牵连、不再纠缠。同样地,比丘心想:“这个贪欲确实是障碍的根源。”于是修习六种法,断除贪欲盖。这六种法我们将在《大念处》中说明。这样已经断除贪欲的人,就像还清债务的人见到债主时,不再有恐惧和惊慌。同样地,面对外在的所缘,他既不贪着,也不被系缚,即使见到天界的妙色,烦恼也不会现起。因此,世尊说断除贪欲犹如无债。巴利
224. Idāni – ‘‘seyyathāpi, mahārāja, āṇaṇya’’nti ettha bhagavā pahīnakāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ āṇaṇyasadisaṃ, sesāni ārogyādisadisāni katvā dasseti. Tatrāyaṃ sadisatā, yathā hi puriso iṇaṃ ādāya kammante payojetvā samiddhataṃ patto – ‘‘idaṃ iṇaṃ nāma palibodhamūla’’nti cintetvā savaḍḍhikaṃ iṇaṃ niyyātetvā paṇṇaṃ phālāpeyya. Athassa tato paṭṭhāya neva koci dūtaṃ peseti, na paṇṇaṃ. So iṇasāmike disvāpi sace icchati, āsanā uṭṭhahati, no ce na uṭṭhahati, kasmā? Tehi saddhiṃ nillepatāya alaggatāya. Evameva bhikkhu – ‘‘ayaṃ kāmacchando nāma palibodhamūla’’nti cintetvā cha dhamme bhāvetvā kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ pajahati. Te pana cha dhamme mahāsatipaṭṭhāne vaṇṇayissāma. Tassevaṃ pahīnakāmacchandassa yathā iṇamuttassa purisassa iṇassāmike disvā neva bhayaṃ na chambhitattaṃ hoti. Evameva paravatthumhi neva saṅgo na baddho hoti. Dibbānipi rūpāni passato kileso na samudācarati. Tasmā bhagavā āṇaṇyamiva kāmacchandappahānaṃ āha.
就像那个被胆病折磨的人,通过药物治疗把病治好后,从此就能尝到蜂蜜、糖等甜美的味道。同样,比丘认识到“这个嗔恚确实会带来大祸害”,于是修习六种法,断除了嗔恚盖。关于断除一切盖的六种法,我们会在《大念处》中详细说明。而且不只是这些,为了断除昏沉睡眠等盖而应当修习的法,我们也都会在那里一并说明。这样断除了嗔恚的比丘,就像摆脱胆病的人满心欢喜地享用蜂蜜、糖等美味一样,他以恭敬的态度接受戒律等学处,满心欢喜地修学。因此,世尊说断除嗔恚就像恢复健康。巴利
Yathā pana so pittarogāturo puriso bhesajjakiriyāya taṃ rogaṃ vūpasametvā tato paṭṭhāya madhusakkarādīnaṃ rasaṃ vindati. Evameva bhikkhu ‘‘ayaṃ byāpādo nāma mahā anatthakaro’’ti cha dhamme bhāvetvā byāpādanīvaraṇaṃ pajahati. Sabbanīvaraṇesu cha dhamme mahāsatipaṭṭhāneyeva vaṇṇayissāma. Na kevalañca teyeva, yepi thinamiddhādīnaṃ pahānāya bhāvetabbā, tepi sabbe tattheva vaṇṇayissāma. So evaṃ pahīnabyāpādo yathā pittarogavimutto puriso madhusakkarādīnaṃ rasaṃ sampiyāyamāno paṭisevati, evameva ācārapaṇṇattiādīni sikkhāpadāni sirasā sampaṭicchitvā sampiyāyamāno sikkhati. Tasmā bhagavā ārogyamiva byāpādappahānaṃ āha.
就像一个人在某個星宿日被关进监狱,到了另一个星宿日时,他心想:“以前我因为放逸的过失而被关押,所以没能好好享受星宿节。现在我要保持不放逸。”于是他不放逸,不让那些敌人有可乘之机,这样度过星宿节之后,发出感叹:“啊,星宿节!啊,星宿节!”同样地,比丘认识到“这个昏沉睡眠确实会带来大祸害”,修习六种法,就舍断了昏沉睡眠盖。他这样舍断了昏沉睡眠之后,就像从监狱里被释放的人,在七天里都能充分享受星宿节的开头、中间和结尾,同样地,他体验法星宿的开头、中间和结尾,连同无碍解一起证得阿拉汉果。因此,世尊说舍断昏沉睡眠就像脱离监狱。巴利
Yathā so nakkhattadivase bandhanāgāraṃ pavesito puriso aparasmiṃ nakkhattadivase – ‘‘pubbepi ahaṃ pamādadosena baddho, tena nakkhattaṃ nānubhaviṃ. Idāni appamatto bhavissāmī’’ti yathāssa paccatthikā okāsaṃ na labhanti, evaṃ appamatto hutvā nakkhattaṃ anubhavitvā – ‘aho nakkhattaṃ, aho nakkhatta’nti udānaṃ udānesi, evameva bhikkhu – ‘‘idaṃ thinamiddhaṃ nāma mahāanatthakara’’nti cha dhamme bhāvetvā thinamiddhanīvaraṇaṃ pajahati, so evaṃ pahīnathinamiddho yathā bandhanā mutto puriso sattāhampi nakkhattassa ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ anubhavati, evameva dhammanakkhattassa ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ anubhavanto saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Tasmā bhagavā bandhanā mokkhamiva thinamiddhappahānaṃ āha.
就像有个奴隶,依靠某个朋友,把钱财交给主人,为自己赎了身,从那时起,他想做什么就做什么。同样,比丘认识到“这掉举和追悔确实会带来大祸害”,修习六种法,就断除了掉举和追悔。这样断除了掉举和追悔的人,就像那个获得自由的人,想做什么就做什么,没有人能强行把他拉回来;同样,他能自在地走上出离之道,掉举和追悔再也无法强行把他从那条路上拉回来。因此,世尊说断除掉举和追悔就像获得自由的人一样。巴利
Yathā pana dāso kiñcideva mittaṃ upanissāya sāmikānaṃ dhanaṃ datvā attānaṃ bhujissaṃ katvā tato paṭṭhāya yaṃ icchati, taṃ karoti. Evameva bhikkhu – ‘‘idaṃ uddhaccakukkuccaṃ nāma mahā anatthakara’’nti cha dhamme bhāvetvā uddhaccakukkuccaṃ pajahati. So evaṃ pahīnauddhaccakukkucco yathā bhujisso puriso yaṃ icchati, taṃ karoti, na taṃ koci balakkārena tato nivatteti , evameva yathā sukhaṃ nekkhammapaṭipadaṃ paṭipajjati, na taṃ uddhaccakukkuccaṃ balakkārena tato nivatteti. Tasmā bhagavā bhujissaṃ viya uddhaccakukkuccappahānaṃ āha.
就像有个力气很大的人,手里拿着刀剑,装备齐全,还带着随从,走进一片荒无人烟、充满危险的旷野。盗贼们远远看见他,就都逃跑了。他平安穿过那片旷野,到达安全的地方,心里又高兴又欢喜。同样,比丘明白“这个疑真是会造成大祸害”,于是修习六法,断除了疑。这样断除了疑的比丘,就像那个力气很大、装备齐全、带着随从的人,毫无畏惧,把盗贼看成一根草一样,平安地走出来,到达安全的地方;同样,这位比丘穿过了恶行这片旷野,到达了最殊胜的安全之地——不死的涅槃。所以,世尊说断除疑就像到达安全之地。巴利
Yathā balavā puriso hatthasāraṃ gahetvā sajjāvudho saparivāro kantāraṃ paṭipajjeyya, taṃ corā dūratova disvā palāyeyyuṃ. So sotthinā taṃ kantāraṃ nittharitvā khemantaṃ patto haṭṭhatuṭṭho assa. Evameva bhikkhu ‘‘ayaṃ vicikicchā nāma mahā anatthakārikā’’ti cha dhamme bhāvetvā vicikicchaṃ pajahati . So evaṃ pahīnavicikiccho yathā balavā puriso sajjāvudho saparivāro nibbhayo core tiṇaṃ viya agaṇetvā sotthinā nikkhamitvā khemantabhūmiṃ pāpuṇāti, evameva bhikkhu duccaritakantāraṃ nittharitvā paramaṃ khemantabhūmiṃ amataṃ mahānibbānaṃ pāpuṇāti. Tasmā bhagavā khemantabhūmiṃ viya vicikicchāpahānaṃ āha.
225 欢悦生起:意思是满意的状态生起。喜悦的人,喜生起:意思是满意之人的全身生起了搅动全身的喜。心喜的人,身体轻安:意思是与喜相应的人,他的名身轻安,远离了躁动不安。感受乐:意思是他感受身体的乐和内心的乐。心得定:意思是借着这份出离之乐而得到安乐的人,他的心无论是依近行定的方式还是依安止定的方式,都得以等持。巴利
225.Pāmojjaṃ jāyatīti tuṭṭhākāro jāyati. Pamuditassa pīti jāyatīti tuṭṭhassa sakalasarīraṃ khobhayamānā pīti jāyati. Pītimanassa kāyo passambhatīti pītisampayuttacittassa puggalassa nāmakāyo passambhati, vigatadaratho hoti. Sukhaṃ vedetīti kāyikampi cetasikampi sukhaṃ vedayati. Cittaṃ samādhiyatīti iminā nekkhammasukhena sukhitassa upacāravasenapi appanāvasenapi cittaṃ samādhiyati.
226 关于“他远离诸欲……成就初禅而住”这一段,应当这样理解:这是为了在依靠近行定而专注的心上,显示更殊胜的境界;而在依靠安止定而专注的心上,则是为了显示那种定本身的种种差别。“此身”:就是指这个由业所生的身体。“令遍满”:意思是滋润它、使它湿润,让喜乐在全身各处生起。“令周遍流”:意思是从四面八方流遍。“令充满”:就像用风把皮囊吹满那样充满。“令遍触”:意思是从一切方面接触到。“全身一切处”:这位比丘的全身,凡有诸已执取相续存在的部分,乃至紧贴皮肤、肌肉、血液的任何微细之处,也无有一处不被初禅的喜乐所触及。意思是这巴利
226.So vivicceva kāmehi…pe… paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharatītiādi pana upacārasamādhinā samāhite citte uparivisesadassanatthaṃ appanāsamādhinā samāhite citte tassa samādhino pabhedadassanatthaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Imameva kāyanti imaṃ karajakāyaṃ. Abhisandetīti temeti sneheti, sabbattha pavattapītisukhaṃ karoti. Parisandetīti samantato sandeti. Paripūretīti vāyunā bhastaṃ viya pūreti. Parippharatīti samantato phusati. Sabbāvato kāyassāti assa bhikkhuno sabbakoṭṭhāsavato kāyassa kiñci upādinnakasantatipavattiṭṭhāne chavimaṃsalohitānugataṃ aṇumattampi ṭhānaṃ paṭhamajjhānasukhena aphuṭaṃ nāma na hoti.
227 “善巧”:指能干、有能力制作、调配和揉合沐浴粉。“铜盆”:指用任何一种金属做成的容器。陶器不结实,揉合时会破,所以不用它来比喻。“一再洒水”:就是一次又一次地洒水。“揉合”:指左手拿住铜盆,右手洒下适量的水,一边洒一边揉压,把它揉成一个粉团。“为润所随”:指被水的湿润所伴随。“为润所遍摄”:指被水的湿润所包住。“内外”:连同内部和外部,到处都是被水的湿润所触及的意思。“不滴漏”:指不会一滴一滴地漏,可以用手、用两根或三根手指拿起,也可将其捏出皱褶。巴利
227.Dakkhoti cheko paṭibalo nhānīyacuṇṇāni kātuñceva payojetuñca sannetuñca. Kaṃsathāleti yena kenaci lohena katabhājane. Mattikabhājanaṃ pana thiraṃ na hoti. Sannentassa bhijjati. Tasmā taṃ na dasseti. Paripphosakaṃparipphosakanti siñcitvā siñcitvā. Sanneyyāti vāmahatthena kaṃsathālaṃ gahetvā dakkhiṇahatthena pamāṇayuttaṃ udakaṃ siñcitvā siñcitvā parimaddanto piṇḍaṃ kareyya. Snehānugatāti udakasinehena anugatā. Snehaparetāti udakasinehena pariggahitā. Santarabāhirāti saddhiṃ antopadesena ceva bahipadesena ca sabbatthakameva udakasinehena phuṭāti attho. Na ca paggharaṇīti na ca bindu bindu udakaṃ paggharati, sakkā hoti hatthenapi dvīhipi tīhipi aṅgulīhi gahetuṃ ovaṭṭikāyapi kātunti attho.
228-229 228-229. 在第二禅那之乐的比喻中,“涌泉之水”是指向上涌出的水,不是从下面涌上来再冒出来的水。意思是说,水就在内部涌出。“入口”是指水来的通道。“云”就是雨云。“按时”是指在一定的时候,每隔半月或每隔十天,就是这个意思。“降雨”是指下雨。“不能注入”是指不能流入,也就是不下雨的意思。“清凉的水流涌出”是指清凉的水流涌上来,充满湖泊,是从内部涌出的。因为从下面涌上来的水,一再涌起又破开,会搅动水面;从四方流入的水,会以枯叶、杂草、木棍等搅动水面;雨水则会以雨柱落下时溅起的水泡搅动水面。只有那种安稳静止之后,像神通变化所生一样出现的水,才会遍满这个地方,不存在“遍满这里却不遍满那里”的情况,因此没有一处不被它触及。在这里,湖泊好比业所生的身体,水好比第二禅那的乐,其余部分按照前面的方式理解。巴利
228-229. Dutiyajjhānasukhūpamāyaṃ ubbhidodakoti ubbhinnaudako, na heṭṭhā ubbhijjitvā uggacchanakaudako. Antoyeva pana ubbhijjanakaudakoti attho. Āyamukhanti āgamanamaggo. Devoti megho. Kālena kālanti kāle kāle, anvaddhamāsaṃ vā anudasāhaṃ vāti attho. Dhāranti vuṭṭhiṃ. Na anuppaveccheyyāti na ca paveseyya, na vasseyyāti attho. Sītā vāridhārā ubbhijjitvāti sītaṃ dhāraṃ uggantvā rahadaṃ pūrayamānaṃ ubbhijjitvā. Heṭṭhā uggacchanaudakañhi uggantvā uggantvā bhijjantaṃ udakaṃ khobheti, catūhi disāhi pavisanaudakaṃ purāṇapaṇṇatiṇakaṭṭhadaṇḍakādīhi udakaṃ khobheti, vuṭṭhiudakaṃ dhārānipātapubbuḷakehi udakaṃ khobheti. Sannisinnameva pana hutvā iddhinimmitamiva uppajjamānaṃ udakaṃ imaṃ padesaṃ pharati, imaṃ padesaṃ na pharatīti natthi, tena aphuṭokāso nāma na hotīti. Tattha rahado viya karajakāyo. Udakaṃ viya dutiyajjhānasukhaṃ. Sesaṃ purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
关于第三禅那的讨论巴利
Tatiyajjhānakathā
230-231 230-231. 在第三禅那之乐的比喻中,这里因为有青莲花,所以叫青莲池。剩下两个词也按同样的方式理解。在这里,白、红、蓝三种当中,任何一种莲花都只是青莲花。花瓣不到一百片的叫白睡莲,有一百片花瓣的叫红莲花。或者不按花瓣来定:白色的叫红莲花,红色的叫白睡莲,这里是这样的判定。不超出水面的:没有从水里升出来。在水面之下沉没而生长:就是沉在水面之下生长,意思是增长。其余部分应当按前面的方式理解。巴利
230-231. Tatiyajjhānasukhūpamāyaṃ uppalāni ettha santīti uppalinī. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Ettha ca setarattanīlesu yaṃ kiñci uppalaṃ uppalameva. Ūnakasatapattaṃ puṇḍarīkaṃ, satapattaṃ padumaṃ. Pattaniyamaṃ vā vināpi setaṃ padumaṃ, rattaṃ puṇḍarīkanti ayamettha vinicchayo. Udakānuggatānīti udakato na uggatāni. Anto nimuggaposīnīti udakatalassa anto nimuggāniyeva hutvā posīni, vaḍḍhīnīti attho. Sesaṃ purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
第四禅那的讨论巴利
Catutthajjhānakathā
232-233 232-233. 在“以第四禅的乐作比喻”这一句里,“以清净、极清净的心”应当这样理解:没有烦恼,所以是清净;光明闪耀,所以是极清净。“以白色的布”这句话,是为了说明体温的遍满。因为布如果脏了,体温的遍满就不会发生;而在当时洗净、清净的布上,体温的遍满就强而有力。在这个比喻里,布好比业所生的身体,体温的遍满好比第四禅的乐。因此,就像沐浴干净的人用清净的布从头到脚盖住坐着,身体的热遍满整块布,布的任何一个地方都没有不被触及的;同样,比丘业所生的身体,也没有任何一个地方不被第四禅的乐所遍满。这里的意思应当这样理解。至于这四种禅那的逐句解释和修习方法,在《清净道论》中已经说过,所以这里不再详细展开。巴利
232-233. Catutthajjhānasukhūpamāyaṃ parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātenāti ettha nirupakkilesaṭṭhena parisuddhaṃ, pabhassaraṭṭhena pariyodātanti veditabbaṃ. Odātena vatthenāti idaṃ utupharaṇatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiliṭṭhavatthena hi utupharaṇaṃ na hoti, taṅkhaṇadhotaparisuddhena utupharaṇaṃ balavaṃ hoti. Imissāya hi upamāya vatthaṃ viya karajakāyo, utupharaṇaṃ viya catutthajjhānasukhaṃ. Tasmā yathā sunhātassa purisassa parisuddhaṃ vatthaṃ sasīsaṃ pārupitvā nisinnassa sarīrato utu sabbameva vatthaṃ pharati. Na koci vatthassa aphuṭokāso hoti. Evaṃ catutthajjhānasukhena bhikkhuno karajakāyassa na koci okāso aphuṭo hotīti. Evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Imesaṃ pana catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ anupadavaṇṇanā ca bhāvanānayo ca visuddhimagge vuttoti idha na vitthārito.
仅凭这一点,不能就认为他只是一个获得色界禅那的人,而不是一个获得无色界禅那的人。因为如果不曾在八种等至中以十四种方式修习到自在熟练,就不可能证得更高的神通。不过,在圣典中只提到了色界禅那,无色界禅那需要另外引出来说明。巴利
Ettāvatā cesa rūpajjhānalābhīyeva, na arūpajjhānalābhīti na veditabbo. Na hi aṭṭhasu samāpattīsu cuddasahākārehi ciṇṇavasībhāvaṃ vinā upari abhiññādhigamo hoti. Pāḷiyaṃ pana rūpajjhānāniyeva āgatāni. Arūpajjhānāni āharitvā kathetabbāni.
关于观智的讨论巴利
Vipassanāñāṇakathā
234 这位比丘就这样,当心已经安定下来……(中略)……达到不动之后,他以十四种方式在八种等至中修习自在,因此被称为比丘。这里其余的内容,应当依照《清净道论》所说来理解。“为了如实知见而引导心”:这里的“如实知见”,既指道智,也指果智、一切智、省察智和观智。因为在《大义释》中说:“贤友,是否为了如实知见清净,才在世尊座下修梵行?”这里说的“如实知见”就是道智。在《中部》中说:“我证得了这种超越常人的、圣者的如实知见殊胜,以及安住安乐。”这里说的是果智。在《大品》中说:“世尊也生起了如实知见:阿喇拉·迦罗摩已经命终七天。”这里说的是一切智。在《大品》中说:“我生起了智与见:我的解脱不动摇,这是最后一生。”这里说的是省察智。而在这里,“为了如实知见而引导心”这句中,所说的“如实知见”是指观智。巴利
234.So evaṃ samāhite citte…pe… āneñjappatteti so cuddasahākārehi aṭṭhasu samāpattīsu ciṇṇavasībhāvo bhikkhūti dasseti . Sesamettha visuddhimagge vuttanayena veditabbaṃ. Ñāṇadassanāya cittaṃ abhinīharatīti ettha ñāṇadassananti maggañāṇampi, vuccati phalañāṇampi, sabbaññutaññāṇampi, paccavekkhaṇañāṇampi, vipassanāñāṇampi. ‘‘Kiṃ nu kho, āvuso, ñāṇadassanavisuddhatthaṃ bhagavati brahmacariyaṃ vussatī’’ti (mahāni. 1.257) ettha hi maggañāṇaṃ ñāṇadassananti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ayamañño uttarimanussadhammo alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso adhigato phāsuvihāro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.328) ettha phalañāṇaṃ. ‘‘Bhagavatopi kho ñāṇadassanaṃ udapādi sattāhakālaṅkato āḷāro kālāmo’’ti (mahāva. 10) ettha sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. ‘‘Ñāṇañca pana me dassanaṃ udapādi akuppā me vimutti, ayamantimā jātī’’ti (mahāva. 16) ettha paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ idha pana ñāṇadassanāya cittanti idaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ ñāṇadassananti vuttanti.
“引导心趋向”的意思是:为了让观智生起,使心倾向于它、朝向它、偏向它。“有色”等词的意思前面已经说过。“米饭和豆羹的堆积”是指由米饭和豆羹滋养而长大。它是“无常、涂抹、揉捏、破坏、散坏之法”:从存在之后归于不存在的意义上说,它是无常之法。为了消除难闻的气味和不适,用薄薄的涂油来涂抹,所以是涂抹之法。为了消除身体各肢节的病痛,用轻柔的按摩来揉捏,所以是揉捏之法。或者在幼年时,把婴儿放在大腿上,为了让他那些在胎中发育得不端正的肢体变得端正,通过拉伸、按压等方式来揉捏,所以是揉捏之法。即使这样养护,它仍然是破坏、散坏之法——会破裂、会离散,这就是它的本性。其中,“有色、四大所造”等六句是从“集起”的角度说的。加上“无常”一句以及最后两句,是从“灭去”的角度说的。“在这里依止、在这里系著”:就是依止、系著于这四大所造的身体。巴利
Abhinīharatīti vipassanāñāṇassa nibbattanatthāya tanninnaṃ tappoṇaṃ tappabbhāraṃ karoti. Rūpīti ādīnamattho vuttoyeva. Odanakummāsūpacayoti odanena ceva kummāsena ca upacito vaḍḍhito. Aniccucchādanaparimaddanabhedanaviddhaṃsanadhammoti hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccadhammo. Duggandhavighātatthāya tanuvilepanena ucchādanadhammo. Aṅgapaccaṅgābādhavinodanatthāya khuddakasambāhanena parimaddanadhammo. Daharakāle vā ūrūsu sayāpetvā gabbhāvāsena dussaṇṭhitānaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ aṅgānaṃ saṇṭhānasampādanatthaṃ añchanapīḷanādivasena parimaddanadhammo. Evaṃ pariharitopi bhedanaviddhaṃsanadhammo bhijjati ceva vikirati ca, evaṃ sabhāvoti attho. Tattha rūpī cātumahābhūtikotiādīsu chahi padehi samudayo kathito. Aniccapadena saddhiṃ pacchimehi dvīhi atthaṅgamo. Ettha sitaṃ ettha paṭibaddhanti ettha cātumahābhūtike kāye nissitañca paṭibaddhañca.
235 善哉就是美好。有光泽,是指从极清净的矿源中产生。善加磨治,是指已经好好打磨过,除去了石头和砂砾。透明,是指皮肤薄。极明净,是指非常明净。具足一切特点,是指具备洗净、钻孔等一切特征。青等颜色,是显示色泽的圆满。因为那样的宝珠一旦穿上线,线就清晰可见。这里说的正是如此,应当理解为譬喻和法义的对应。宝珠好比这个业所生的身体,穿线的绳子好比观智,有眼睛的人好比获得观智的比丘。就像那人把宝珠拿在手里观察,心想这是宝珠,这时宝珠变得明显;同样,当观智变得明显时,就是那位端坐、将心转向内观的行者,他这四大所造的身体变得明显的时候。就像在那里,因为线已穿入,线变得明显;同样,当那位端坐、将心转向内观的行者,那时那些所缘——或者以触为第五的诸法,或者一切心与心所法,或者只是观智本身——变得明显的时候。巴利
235.Subhoti sundaro. Jātimāti parisuddhākarasamuṭṭhito. Suparikammakatoti suṭṭhu kataparikammo apanītapāsāṇasakkharo. Acchoti tanucchavi. Vippasannoti suṭṭhu pasanno. Sabbākārasampannoti dhovanavedhanādīhi sabbehi ākārehi sampanno. Nīlantiādīhi vaṇṇasampattiṃ dasseti. Tādisañhi āvutaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti. Evameva khoti ettha evaṃ upamāsaṃsandanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Maṇi viya hi karajakāyo. Āvutasuttaṃ viya vipassanāñāṇaṃ. Cakkhumā puriso viya vipassanālābhī bhikkhu, hatthe karitvā paccavekkhato ayaṃ kho maṇīti maṇino āvibhūtakālo viya vipassanāñāṇaṃ, abhinīharitvā nisinnassa bhikkhuno cātumahābhūtikakāyassa āvibhūtakālo, tatridaṃ suttaṃ āvutanti suttassāvibhūtakālo viya vipassanāñāṇaṃ, abhinīharitvā nisinnassa bhikkhuno tadārammaṇānaṃ phassapañcamakānaṃ vā sabbacittacetasikānaṃ vā vipassanāñāṇasseva vā āvibhūtakāloti.
这个观智之后无间紧接道智。虽然如此,但因为开始讲神通这部分时,中间并没有插入别的内容,所以就在这里说明了。又因为,对于还没有以无常等相作观照的人,当他用天耳界听到可怕的声音,用宿命随念回忆可怕的诸蕴,或者用天眼看到可怕的颜色时,恐惧和惊慌就会生起;而已经以无常等相作过观照的人就不会这样。所以,为了给已经证得神通的人提供消除恐惧的理由,也就在这里说明了这个观智。另外,因为这种观智的快乐并不是能带来道果快乐的,它本身就是一种独立、当下可见的沙门果,所以应当知道,也正因如此,从一开始就在这里说明了。巴利
Idañca vipassanāñāṇaṃ maggañāṇānantaraṃ. Evaṃ santepi yasmā abhiññāvāre āraddhe etassa antarāvāro natthi tasmā idheva dassitaṃ. Yasmā ca aniccādivasena akatasammasanassa dibbāya sotadhātuyā bheravaṃ saddaṃ suṇato, pubbenivāsānussatiyā bherave khandhe anussarato, dibbena cakkhunā bheravampi rūpaṃ passato bhayasantāso uppajjati, na aniccādivasena katasammasanassa tasmā abhiññaṃ pattassa bhayavinodanahetusampādanatthampi idaṃ idheva dassitaṃ. Api ca yasmā vipassanāsukhaṃ nāmetaṃ maggaphalasukhasampādakaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ sandiṭṭhikaṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ tasmāpi āditova idaṃ idha dassitanti veditabbaṃ.
意所成神变智的讨论巴利
Manomayiddhiñāṇakathā
236-237 “意所成”是指由心意所化生的。“具足一切肢节与细肢”是指具备所有粗大的肢节和细小的身体部分。“诸根无缺”是指在形态上诸根没有残缺。神通者所化现的色身,如果神通者本身是白色的,那所化之身也是白色的;如果神通者没有穿耳洞,那所化之身也没有耳洞。就这样,在一切方面都与他完全相同。从文阇草中取苇芯、从鞘中取剑、从蛇蜕中取蛇这三个譬喻,也确实只是为了显示两者体性相似。文阇草内部的苇芯与文阇草相似;剑与鞘相似,人们为圆形的鞘配入圆形的剑,为扁平的鞘配入扁平的剑。“蛇蜕”也是蛇皮的名字,不是藤筐。因为蛇皮与蛇本身相似。在这里,虽然描述成“好像有人用手从蛇蜕中把蛇抽出来”,但实际上应当理解为以心意将其抽出。因为所谓蛇,当它处在同类中,或者依附于木缝、树缝之间时,凭借一种可称为“舍皮精进”的力量,就像厌恶那正在吞噬自己身体的旧皮一样——由于这四种原因,它自己就会舍弃旧皮,不可能由其他任何人把它从那里抽出来。所以应当知道,这里说“抽出”,是针对以心意抽离而说的。因此,文阇草等所比喻的相似者,就是这位比丘的身体;苇芯、剑、蛇等所比喻的相似者,就是所化现的色身。这就是此处譬喻的对应配合。至于这里化现的方法,在后面的神变智等五种神通之论中,已在《清净道论》里以一切方式详细阐述,所以应依照那里所说的方式来理解。这里只是多了一个譬喻而已。巴利
236-237.Manomayanti manena nibbattitaṃ. Sabbaṅgapaccaṅginti sabbehi aṅgehi ca paccaṅgehi ca samannāgataṃ. Ahīnindriyanti saṇṭhānavasena avikalindriyaṃ. Iddhimatā nimmitarūpañhi sace iddhimā odāto tampi odātaṃ. Sace aviddhakaṇṇo tampi aviddhakaṇṇanti evaṃ sabbākārehi tena sadisameva hoti. Muñjamhā īsikantiādi upamāttayampi hi sadisabhāvadassanatthameva vuttaṃ. Muñjasadisā eva hi tassa anto īsikā hoti. Kosisadisoyeva asi, vaṭṭāya kosiyā vaṭṭaṃ asimeva pakkhipanti, patthaṭāya patthaṭaṃ . Karaṇḍāti idampi ahikañcukassa nāmaṃ, na vilīvakaraṇḍakassa. Ahikañcuko hi ahinā sadisova hoti. Tattha kiñcāpi ‘‘puriso ahiṃ karaṇḍā uddhareyyā’’ti hatthena uddharamāno viya dassito, atha kho cittenevassa uddharaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ayañhi ahi nāma sajātiyaṃ ṭhito, kaṭṭhantaraṃ vā rukkhantaraṃ vā nissāya, tacato sarīraṃ nikkaḍḍhanappayogasaṅkhātena thāmena, sarīraṃ khādayamānaṃ viya purāṇatacaṃ jigucchantoti imehi catūhi kāraṇehi sayameva kañcukaṃ pajahati, na sakkā tato aññena uddharituṃ, tasmā cittena uddharaṇaṃ sandhāya idaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Iti muñjādisadisaṃ imassa bhikkhuno sarīraṃ, īsikādisadisaṃ nimmitarūpanti. Idamettha opammasaṃsandanaṃ. Nimmānavidhānaṃ panettha parato ca iddhividhādipañcaabhiññākathā sabbākārena visuddhimagge vitthāritāti tattha vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Upamāmattameva hi idha adhikaṃ.
神变智等论巴利
Iddhividhañāṇādikathā
238-239 在这里,应该把获得神变智的比丘看作一位灵巧的陶工等人;应该把神变智本身看作经过精心处理的泥团等;应该把这位比丘施展种种神通变化,看作随心所欲地制造出各种器皿的形状变化等。巴利
238-239. Tattha chekakumbhakārādayo viya iddhividhañāṇalābhī bhikkhu daṭṭhabbo. Suparikammakatamattikādayo viya iddhividhañāṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Icchiticchitabhājanavikatiādikaraṇaṃ viya tassa bhikkhuno vikubbanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
240-241 240-241. 在天耳界的譬喻中,因为旷野长途有危险、有怖畏,在那里,一个心存疑虑和恐惧的人没法判断“这是大鼓声”“这是小鼓声”。所以,为了显示安稳的道路,不提旷野,而说“行于长途者”。一个人走在没有怖畏的安稳道路上,把布裹在头上慢慢前行,就能轻松地分辨上面说的那些声音。正如他通过听闻,那些声音各自清晰地显现出来;同样应当了知,修行者对于天界和人间种种或远或近的声音,也清晰地显现出来。巴利
240-241. Dibbasotadhātuupamāyaṃ yasmā kantāraddhānamaggo sāsaṅko hoti sappaṭibhayo. Tattha ussaṅkitaparisaṅkitena ‘ayaṃ bherisaddo’, ‘ayaṃ mudiṅgasaddo’ti na sakkā vavatthapetuṃ, tasmā kantāraggahaṇaṃ akatvā khemamaggaṃ dassento addhānamaggappaṭipannoti āha. Appaṭibhayañhi khemamaggaṃ sīse sāṭakaṃ katvā saṇikaṃ paṭipanno vuttappakāre sadde sukhaṃ vavatthapeti. Tassa savanena tesaṃ tesaṃ saddānaṃ āvibhūtakālo viya yogino dūrasantikabhedānaṃ dibbānañceva mānussakānañca saddānaṃ āvibhūtakālo veditabbo.
242-243 242-243. 在他心智的譬喻中,“年少者”指年轻。“青年”指正值青春。“性好装饰者”指虽然是青年,却不懒惰,衣服和身体也不肮脏,而是天性喜欢打扮,一天沐浴两三次,穿着干净衣服、喜欢装饰。这就是这里的含义。“有污点”指黑痣、胎记、面疱、雀斑等任何一种瑕疵。在那里,应当这样理解:正如他审视自己的面容时,脸上的污点清楚显现;同样,为了获得他心智而专注静坐的比丘,他人的十六种心也会清楚显现。巴利
242-243. Cetopariyañāṇūpamāyaṃ daharoti taruṇo. Yuvāti yobbannena samannāgato. Maṇḍanakajātikoti yuvāpi samāno na ālasiyo na kiliṭṭhavatthasarīro, atha kho maṇḍanapakatiko, divasassa dve tayo vāre nhāyitvā suddhavatthaparidahanaalaṅkārakaraṇasīloti attho. Sakaṇikanti kāḷatilakavaṅgamukhadūsipīḷakādīnaṃ aññatarena sadosaṃ. Tattha yathā tassa mukhanimittaṃ paccavekkhato mukhe doso pākaṭo hoti, evaṃ cetopariyañāṇāya cittaṃ abhinīharitvā nisinnassa bhikkhuno paresaṃ soḷasavidhaṃ cittaṃ pākaṭaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ.
244-245 244-245. 在宿住智的譬喻中,为了说明“那一天所做的事变得清楚”,只取了那一天去过的三个村庄。在这里应当如此看待:获得宿住智的人,就像那个去过三个村庄的人;三有,就像那三个村庄;而比丘将心导向宿住之后坐着时,三有中那些所作之事清楚显现的情形,就像那个人在三个村庄里那一天所作之事显现出来一样。巴利
244-245. Pubbenivāsañāṇūpamāyaṃ taṃ divasaṃ katakiriyā pākaṭā hotīti taṃ divasaṃ gatagāmattayameva gahitaṃ. Tattha gāmattayagatapuriso viya pubbenivāsañāṇalābhī daṭṭhabbo, tayo gāmā viya tayo bhavā daṭṭhabbā, tassa purisassa tīsu gāmesu taṃ divasaṃ katakiriyāya āvibhāvo viya pubbenivāsāya cittaṃ abhinīharitvā nisinnassa bhikkhuno tīsu bhavesu katakiriyāya pākaṭabhāvo daṭṭhabbo.
246-247 246-247. 在天眼智的譬喻中,“在街道上往来行走”是指不停地来回走动。也有写成“在街道上行走”的读法,意思是一样的。在这里,应该把这个比丘的业生身看作城中央十字路口的宫殿;把证得天眼之后安住下来的比丘,看作站在宫殿上的那个有眼睛的人;把以结生的方式进入母胎的,看作进入房屋的人;把从母胎出来的,看作从房屋走出来的人;把不断来来往往的众生,看作在车道上沿街来回行走的人;把在三有中到处投生的众生,看作坐在前方空地上、中央十字路口的人;而把比丘将心导向天眼智、安坐时三有中投生众生的清晰显现,看作站在宫殿顶层的人看见那些人的显现。这样说只是为了便于开示。不过,无色界并不是天眼智的所缘范围。巴利
246-247. Dibbacakkhūpamāyaṃ vīthiṃ sañcaranteti aparāparaṃ sañcarante. Vīthiṃ carantetipi pāṭho. Ayamevattho. Tattha nagaramajjhe siṅghāṭakamhi pāsādo viya imassa bhikkhuno karajakāyo daṭṭhabbo, pāsāde ṭhito cakkhumā puriso viya ayameva dibbacakkhuṃ patvā ṭhito bhikkhu, gehaṃ pavisantā viya paṭisandhivasena mātukucchiyaṃ pavisantā, gehā nikkhamantā viya mātukucchito nikkhamantā, rathikāya vīthiṃ sañcarantā viya aparāparaṃ sañcaraṇakasattā, purato abbhokāsaṭṭhāne majjhe siṅghāṭake nisinnā viya tīsu bhavesu tattha tattha nibbattasattā, pāsādatale ṭhitapurisassa tesaṃ manussānaṃ āvibhūtakālo viya dibbacakkhuñāṇāya cittaṃ abhinīharitvā nisinnassa bhikkhuno tīsu bhavesu nibbattasattānaṃ āvibhūtakālo daṭṭhabbo. Idañca desanāsukhatthameva vuttaṃ. Āruppe pana dibbacakkhussa gocaro natthīti.
关于漏尽智的讨论巴利
Āsavakkhayañāṇakathā
248 “他这样在等持的心里”这句话,在这里应当理解为作为观禅基础的第四禅心。“为了漏尽智”,意思是为了让漏尽智生起。在这里,“漏尽”这个词,既可以指道,也可以指果、涅槃,还可以指坏灭。因为在“于尽有智,于无生有智”这句话里,道被称为漏尽;而在“以漏尽故成为沙门”这句话里,果被称为漏尽。巴利
248.So evaṃ samāhite citteti idha vipassanāpādakaṃ catutthajjhānacittaṃ veditabbaṃ. Āsavānaṃ khayañāṇāyāti āsavānaṃ khayañāṇanibbattanatthāya. Ettha ca āsavānaṃ khayo nāma maggopi phalampi nibbānampi bhaṅgopi vuccati. ‘‘Khaye ñāṇaṃ, anuppāde ñāṇa’’nti ettha hi maggo āsavānaṃ khayoti vutto. ‘‘Āsavānaṃ khayā samaṇo hotī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.438) ettha phalaṃ.
“ 总是盯着别人的过错,一直怀着挑剔抱怨的心态;
他的诸漏不断增长,他离漏尽很远。”巴利
‘‘Paravajjānupassissa, niccaṃ ujjhānasaññino; Āsavā tassa vaḍḍhanti, ārā so āsavakkhayā’’ti. (dha. pa. 253);
这里指的是涅槃。在“诸漏的灭尽、衰灭、破坏、无常、消失”这一说法中,指的是坏灭。但在这里,所指的是涅槃。阿拉汉道也同样适用。巴利
Ettha nibbānaṃ. ‘‘Āsavānaṃ khayo vayo bhedo aniccatā antaradhāna’’nti ettha bhaṅgo. Idha pana nibbānaṃ adhippetaṃ. Arahattamaggopi vaṭṭatiyeva.
把心导向的意思是:让观的心朝向那里、倾向那里、把重心放在那里。在“这是苦”等说法里,意思是:他通过直接体证自相,如实了知整个苦谛——“苦只有这么多,不会比这更多”。而让这个苦生起的渴爱,就是“这是苦集”。当苦和苦集这两者到达某个地方就止息、不再生起,那个止息就是涅槃,也就是“这是苦灭”。能让人达到那个涅槃的圣道,就是“这是导向苦灭之道”。他同样通过直接体证自相,如实了知这些。巴利
Cittaṃabhinīharatīti vipassanā cittaṃ tanninnaṃ tappoṇaṃ tappabbhāraṃ karoti. So idaṃ dukkhantiādīsu ‘‘ettakaṃ dukkhaṃ, na ito bhiyyo’’ti sabbampi dukkhasaccaṃ sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhena yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti attho. Tassa ca dukkhassa nibbattikaṃ taṇhaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhasamudayo’’ti. Tadubhayampi yaṃ ṭhānaṃ patvā nirujjhati, taṃ tesaṃ appavattiṃ nibbānaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodho’’ti; tassa ca sampāpakaṃ ariyamaggaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’’ti sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhena yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti attho.
像这样,先从自性上把诸谛展示出来之后,又依烦恼、以间接的方式来说明,于是说了“这些是漏”等话。“他如此知、如此见”,是说当这位比丘如此知、如此见的时候,世尊就开示了与观一同达到顶点的道。“欲漏”是指从欲漏。“解脱”这句话显示的是道的刹那。“已解脱”这句话显示的是果的刹那。“‘已解脱’之智生起”这句话显示的是省察智。“生已尽”等语句,是在说明这位漏尽者所处的阶位。他以那种智,在省察时了知“生已尽”等。巴利
Evaṃ sarūpato saccāni dassetvā puna kilesavasena pariyāyato dassento ‘‘ime āsavā’’tiādimāha. Tassa evaṃ jānato evaṃ passatoti tassa bhikkhuno evaṃ jānantassa evaṃ passantassa, saha vipassanāya koṭippattaṃ maggaṃ kathesi. Kāmāsavāti kāmāsavato. Vimuccatīti iminā maggakkhaṇaṃ dasseti. Vimuttasminti iminā phalakkhaṇaṃ. Vimuttamiti ñāṇaṃ hotīti iminā paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. Khīṇā jātītiādīhi tassa bhūmiṃ. Tena hi ñāṇena khīṇāsavo paccavekkhanto khīṇā jātītiādīni pajānāti.
那么,他的哪一种“生”已经灭尽?他又怎么知道这一点呢?首先,他过去的“生”并没有灭尽,因为过去早已灭尽的缘故。未来的“生”也没有灭尽,因为未来还没有精进作用的缘故。现在的“生”也没有灭尽,因为现在正存在的缘故。然而,由于没有修习圣道,那种会在一蕴有、四蕴有、五蕴有中生起的“生”——也就是以一蕴、四蕴、五蕴的差别为形态的“生”——因为圣道已经修习,在未来就成为必定不再生起的法,因此说它已灭尽。他通过修习圣道,省察已被断除的烦恼,知道“烦恼既然不存在,即使还有业,未来也不会再结生”,就这样了知。巴利
Katamā panassa jāti khīṇā? Kathañca naṃ pajānātīti? Na tāvassa atītā jāti khīṇā, pubbeva khīṇattā. Na anāgatā, anāgate vāyāmābhāvato. Na paccuppannā, vijjamānattā. Yā pana maggassa abhāvitattā uppajjeyya ekacatupañcavokārabhavesu ekacatupañcakkhandhappabhedā jāti, sā maggassa bhāvitattā āyatiṃ anuppādadhammataṃ āpajjanena khīṇā. Taṃ so maggabhāvanāya pahīnakilese paccavekkhitvā ‘‘kilesābhāve vijjamānampi kammaṃ āyatiṃ appaṭisandhikaṃva hotī’’ti jānanto pajānāti.
“已住”是指已经住过、已经完全住过。“梵行”是指道的梵行。善凡夫和七有学圣者,可以说是在住于梵行;而漏已尽的人则是已经住过。因此,他在回顾自己的梵行生活时,清楚地知道“梵行已住”。
“应作已作”是指:对四圣谛,通过四种道,以遍知、断除、作证、修习的方式,十六种应做的事已经完成。每一种道所应断的烦恼都已断除,苦的根源已被彻底铲除。善凡夫等人还在做这些事,而漏已尽的人已经做完应做的事。因此,他在回顾自己应做的事时,清楚地知道“应作已作”。
“不复有此状态”是指:现在他知道,对我来说,不再有为了如此这般的十六种应作之事、为了如此这般的状态、或者为了灭尽烦恼而应修的道之修习。或者,“不复有此状态”是指从如此这般的状态、从这样的种类。现在,从当前五蕴相续来说,对我来说不再有另外的五蕴相续。然而,这五蕴已被遍知,如同根已被斩断的树一样安住,它们将因最后心的灭尽而像无执取的火焰一样熄灭,并将达到不可施设的状态,他如此了知。巴利
Vusitanti vutthaṃ parivutthaṃ. Brahmacariyanti maggabrahmacariyaṃ. Puthujjanakalyāṇakena hi saddhiṃ satta sekkhā brahmacariyavāsaṃ vasanti nāma, khīṇāsavo vutthavāso, tasmā so attano brahmacariyavāsaṃ paccavekkhanto vusitaṃ brahmacariyanti pajānāti. Kataṃkaraṇīyanti catūsu saccesu catūhi maggehi pariññāpahānasacchikiriyābhāvanāvasena soḷasavidhaṃ kiccaṃ niṭṭhāpitaṃ. Tena tena maggena pahātabbakilesā pahīnā, dukkhamūlaṃ samucchinnanti attho. Puthujjanakalyāṇakādayo hi taṃ kiccaṃ karonti, khīṇāsavo katakaraṇīyo. Tasmā so attano karaṇīyaṃ paccavekkhanto kataṃ karaṇīyanti pajānāti. Nāparaṃ itthattāyāti idāni puna itthabhāvāya evaṃ soḷasakiccabhāvāya kilesakkhayabhāvāya vā kattabbaṃ maggabhāvanākiccaṃ me natthīti pajānāti. Atha vā itthattāyāti itthabhāvato imasmā evaṃ pakārā. Idāni vattamānakhandhasantānā aparaṃ khandhasantānaṃ mayhaṃ natthi. Ime pana pañcakkhandhā pariññātā tiṭṭhanti chinnamūlakā rukkhā viya, te carimakacittanirodhena anupādāno viya jātavedo nibbāyissanti apaṇṇattikabhāvañca gamissantīti pajānāti.
249 “山略”就是山顶。“不浊”就是没有淤泥。“贝螺”就是贝类和螺类。“砂石碎瓦”就是砂石和碎瓦片。“鱼群”就是鱼的聚集。“或住或游”:在这里,砂石碎瓦只是停着不动,其余那些(贝螺和鱼)则有的在游、有的停着。不过,就像牛群中有一部分在走动时,即使其余的牛站着或卧着,人们也会因为它们中有牛在走动而说“这些牛在走动”;同样,这里以只是停着的砂石碎瓦为据,其余两类也被说成“停着”;又以正在游动的其余两类为据,砂石碎瓦也被说成“在游动”。在这里,有眼睛的人站在岸边观看时,贝螺等清清楚楚地显现出来;应当知道,比丘引导心朝向漏尽而坐时,就是四圣谛清清楚楚显现的时候。巴利
249.Pabbatasaṅkhepeti pabbatamatthake. Anāviloti nikkaddamo. Sippiyo ca sambukā ca sippisambukaṃ. Sakkharā ca kathalāni ca sakkharakathalaṃ. Macchānaṃ gumbā ghaṭāti macchagumbaṃ. Tiṭṭhantampi carantampīti ettha sakkharakathalaṃ tiṭṭhatiyeva, itarāni carantipi tiṭṭhantipi. Yathā pana antarantarā ṭhitāsupi nisinnāsupi vijjamānāsupi ‘‘etā gāvo carantī’’ti carantiyo upādāya itarāpi carantīti vuccanti. Evaṃ tiṭṭhantameva sakkharakathalaṃ upādāya itarampi dvayaṃ tiṭṭhantanti vuttaṃ. Itarañca dvayaṃ carantaṃ upādāya sakkharakathalampi carantanti vuttaṃ. Tattha cakkhumato purisassa tīre ṭhatvā passato sippikasambukādīnaṃ vibhūtakālo viya āsavānaṃ khayāya cittaṃ abhinīharitvā nisinnassa bhikkhuno catunnaṃ saccānaṃ vibhūtakālo daṭṭhabboti.
到这里,已经讲明了十种智:观智、意所成智、神变智、天耳智、他心智、宿住智、由天眼而成就的未来分智和随业趣智这两种、天眼智、漏尽智。应当知道它们的所缘差别:其中,观智以有限、广大、过去、未来、现在、内、外这七种作为所缘。意所成智只把应当化现的色处当作所缘,所以是以有限、现在、外为所缘。漏尽智以无量、外、不可说为所缘。其余诸智的所缘差别,在《清净道论》中已经说过。世尊以阿拉汉果为顶点,用“没有比这更高、更殊胜的沙门果”这样无论从哪方面说都最究竟的话,结束了这次开示。巴利
Ettāvatā vipassanāñāṇaṃ, manomayañāṇaṃ, iddhividhañāṇaṃ, dibbasotañāṇaṃ, cetopariyañāṇaṃ, pubbenivāsañāṇaṃ, dibbacakkhuvasena nipphannaṃ anāgataṃsañāṇayathākammūpagañāṇadvayaṃ, dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ, āsavakkhayañāṇanti dasa ñāṇāni niddiṭṭhāni honti. Tesaṃ ārammaṇavibhāgo jānitabbo – tattha vipassanāñāṇaṃ parittamahaggataatītānāgatapaccuppannaajjhattabahiddhāvasena sattavidhārammaṇaṃ. Manomayañāṇaṃ nimmitabbarūpāyatanamattameva ārammaṇaṃ karotīti parittapaccuppannabahiddhārammaṇaṃ. Āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ appamāṇabahiddhānavattabbārammaṇaṃ. Avasesānaṃ ārammaṇabhedo visuddhimagge vutto. Uttaritaraṃ vā paṇītataraṃ vāti yena kenaci pariyāyena ito seṭṭhataraṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ nāma natthīti bhagavā arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi.
阿阇世王证得近事男身份的谈论巴利
Ajātasattuupāsakattapaṭivedanākathā
250 国王在那里处处发出称赞随喜之声,恭敬地听完了初、中、后全部的法,心里想:“我长久以来向众多沙门、婆罗门询问这些问题,就像捣谷壳一样,什么实质都没得到。哎呀,世尊的功德真是圆满!他就像为我点亮千盏灯,放出大光明,解答了这些问题。我长久以来不知道十力世尊的功德威力,一直被蒙蔽欺骗。”他由忆念佛陀功德而生起五种喜,全身被喜悦充满,为了表明自己的净信,便表白了自己作为近事男的身份。为了说明这一点,开始说“当这样说时,王……”等。巴利
250. Rājā tattha tattha sādhukāraṃ pavattento ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ sakkaccaṃ sutvā ‘‘ciraṃ vatamhi ime pañhe puthū samaṇabrāhmaṇe pucchanto, thuse koṭṭento viya kiñci sāraṃ nālatthaṃ, aho vata bhagavato guṇasampadā, yo me dīpasahassaṃ jālento viya mahantaṃ ālokaṃ katvā ime pañhe vissajjesi. Suciraṃ vatamhi dasabalassa guṇānubhāvaṃ ajānanto vañcito’’ti cintetvā buddhaguṇānussaraṇasambhūtāya pañcavidhāya pītiyā phuṭasarīro attano pasādaṃ āvikaronto upāsakattaṃ paṭivedesi. Taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ vutte rājā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ.
在这里,“殊胜,尊者”中的“殊胜”一词,出现在“耗尽”“美妙”“端严”“随喜”等含义中。比如“尊者,夜已尽,初夜分已过,比丘僧团久坐”(增支部8.20)等句中,它指的是“耗尽”。又如“此人合我意,在这四种人当中,他更殊胜、更上妙”(增支部4.100)等句中,它指的是“美妙”。巴利
Tattha abhikkantaṃ, bhanteti ayaṃ abhikkantasaddo khayasundarābhirūpaabbhanumodanesu dissati. ‘‘Abhikkantā bhante, ratti, nikkhanto paṭhamo yāmo, ciranisinno bhikkhusaṅgho’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.20) hi khaye dissati. ‘‘Ayaṃ me puggalo khamati, imesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.100) sundare.
“ 是谁以神通与名声而闪耀,来礼敬我的双足?
以极其美妙的色泽,照亮了一切方向。”巴利
‘‘Ko me vandati pādāni, iddhiyā yasasā jalaṃ; Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, sabbā obhāsayaṃ disā’’ti. (vi. va. 857);
在“诸等”一类的词处,意思是“相貌端正”。在“乔达摩尊,真是殊胜啊”这类话中(律藏·巴拉基格15),意思是随喜赞叹。这里也仅是随喜赞叹。因为是随喜赞叹,所以应当理解为:这是在说“萨度,萨度,尊者”。巴利
Ādīsu abhirūpe. ‘‘Abhikkantaṃ bho, gotamā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 15) abbhanumodane. Idhāpi abbhanumodaneyeva. Yasmā ca abbhanumodane, tasmā ‘sādhu sādhu bhante’ti vuttaṃ hotīti veditabbo.
在恐惧、愤怒、称赞、匆忙和好奇兴奋的时候,
在欢笑、忧愁和净信之中,智者会使用重复语。巴利
Bhaye kodhe pasaṃsāyaṃ, turite kotūhalacchare; Hāse soke pasāde ca, kare āmeḍitaṃ budhoti.
通过这个特征,应当知道:在这里,它是从净信的角度和从赞叹的角度各说了一次。或者,“殊胜”是指极为可爱、极为可意、极为美好的意思。巴利
Iminā ca lakkhaṇena idha pasādavasena, pasaṃsāvasena cāyaṃ dvikkhattuṃ vuttoti veditabbo. Athavā abhikkantanti abhikantaṃ atiiṭṭhaṃ atimanāpaṃ atisundaranti vuttaṃ hoti.
在这里,他用一个“殊胜”来赞叹教法,用另一个来表达自己的净信。这里的意思是:尊者,世尊的说法实在殊胜;而正是依靠世尊的说法,我生起了净信,这也是殊胜的。或者说,他是在就世尊的言教,针对一对一对的义理来赞叹:世尊的言教殊胜,因为它断除过失;殊胜,因为它成就功德。同样,它殊胜,因为它能让人生起信心,能让人生起智慧;因为它有义利,有文采;因为字句浅显,而义理甚深;因为听起来悦耳,能深入人心;因为不抬高自己,不贬低他人;因为悲心带来的清凉,因为智慧带来的明净;因为初听就令人欢喜,因为经得起反复推敲;因为听闻时感到安乐,因为审察时获得利益。像这样,应当依照这些方面来综合理解。巴利
Ettha ekena abhikkantasaddena desanaṃ thometi, ekena attano pasādaṃ. Ayañhettha adhippāyo, abhikkantaṃ bhante, yadidaṃ bhagavato dhammadesanā, ‘abhikkantaṃ’ yadidaṃ bhagavato dhammadesanaṃ āgamma mama pasādoti. Bhagavatoyeva vā vacanaṃ dve dve atthe sandhāya thometi. Bhagavato vacanaṃ abhikkantaṃ dosanāsanato, abhikkantaṃ guṇādhigamanato. Tathā saddhājananato, paññājananato, sātthato, sabyañjanato, uttānapadato, gambhīratthato, kaṇṇasukhato, hadayaṅgamato, anattukkaṃsanato , aparavambhanato, karuṇāsītalato, paññāvadātato, āpātharamaṇīyato, vimaddakkhamato, suyyamānasukhato, vīmaṃsiyamānahitatoti evamādīhi yojetabbaṃ.
接着,他又用四个比喻来赞叹说法本身。其中,“倒扣的”指被翻倒放置的,或者面朝下放着的。“翻转过来”指让它面朝上。“遮盖的”指被草、树叶等盖住的。“揭开”指打开。“迷路的人”指分不清方向的人。“指示道路”指牵着他的手说“这就是路”。“黑暗中”指由四种情况造成的黑暗,也就是黑半月的第十四天、半夜、茂密的森林和浓云。以上是字面上还不明显的词义。下面则是带出意趣的连贯解释:就像有人把倒扣的东西翻转过来一样,他把背离正法、堕入非正法的我从非正法中扶拔出来;就像有人揭开遮盖之物一样,自从迦叶世尊的教法隐没以来,被邪见密林遮蔽的教法,由他重新揭开;就像有人为迷路的人指示道路一样,他为走上邪道、误入歧途的我开示了通往天界和解脱的道路;就像有人在黑暗中举着油灯一样,对沉没在愚痴黑暗中、看不见佛陀等宝相的我,他举起能摧毁那遮蔽的愚痴黑暗的说法之灯。世尊就是这样,通过这些方式加以阐明,所以说法以种种方式被阐明了。巴利
Tato parampi catūhi upamāhi desanaṃyeva thometi. Tattha nikkujjitanti adhomukhaṭhapitaṃ heṭṭhāmukhajātaṃ vā. Ukkujjeyyāti upari mukhaṃ kareyya. Paṭicchannanti tiṇapaṇṇādichāditaṃ. Vivareyyāti ugghāṭeyya. Mūḷhassa vāti disāmūḷhassa. Maggaṃ ācikkheyyāti hatthe gahetvā ‘‘esa maggo’’ti vadeyya, andhakāreti kāḷapakkhacātuddasī aḍḍharattaghanavanasaṇḍameghapaṭalehi caturaṅge tame. Ayaṃ tāva anuttānapadattho. Ayaṃ pana sādhippāyayojanā. Yathā koci nikkujjitaṃ ukkujjeyya, evaṃ saddhammavimukhaṃ asaddhamme patitaṃ maṃ asaddhammā vuṭṭhāpentana. Yathā paṭicchannaṃ vivareyya, evaṃ kassapassa bhagavato sāsanantaradhānā pabhuti micchādiṭṭhigahanapaṭicchannaṃ sāsanaṃ vivarantena, yathā mūḷhassa maggaṃ ācikkheyya, evaṃ kummaggamicchāmaggappaṭipannassa me saggamokkhamaggaṃ āvikarontena, yathā andhakāre telapajjotaṃ dhāreyya, evaṃ mohandhakāranimuggassa me buddhādiratanarūpāni apassato tappaṭicchādakamohandhakāraviddhaṃsakadesanāpajjotadhārakena mayhaṃ bhagavatā etehi pariyāyehi pakāsitattā anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsitoti.
这样赞叹了说法之后,他对三宝生起清净的信心,为了表达这份净信,便说出“esāhaṃ”等话。其中,“esāhaṃ”就是“此我”。“我皈依世尊”的意思是:世尊是我的皈依处、我的究竟归宿,是苦难的救护者,也是利益的赐予者。怀着这样的心意,我走向世尊、亲近世尊、侍奉世尊、承事世尊;也可以说,我因此了知、觉悟。因为那些词根既有“去”的含义,也有“了知”的含义,所以说“gacchāmi”也表达了“我了知、我觉悟”的意思。至于“法与比丘僧”,这里所说的法,能护持那些已证得圣道、现证涅槃、依照教导修行、不堕入四恶趣的人,所以称为法;从义理上说,就是圣道与涅槃。经中也这样说过:“诸比丘,在一切有为法中,八支圣道被称为最上”等等,广说可知。而且不只是圣道与涅槃,连同圣果以及教法之法也都包括在内。这在《伞盖年轻人天宫》中说过:巴利
Evaṃ desanaṃ thometvā imāya desanāya ratanattaye pasannacitto pasannākāraṃ karonto esāhantiādimāha. Tattha esāhanti eso ahaṃ . Bhagavantaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmīti bhagavā me saraṇaṃ, parāyanaṃ, aghassa tātā, hitassa ca vidhātāti. Iminā adhippāyena bhagavantaṃ gacchāmi bhajāmi sevāmi payirupāsāmi, evaṃ vā jānāmi bujjhāmīti. Yesañhi dhātūnaṃ gatiattho, buddhipi tesaṃ attho. Tasmā gacchāmīti imassa jānāmi bujjhāmīti ayampi attho vutto. Dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañcāti ettha pana adhigatamagge sacchikatanirodhe yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne catūsu apāyesu apatamāne dhāretīti dhammo, so atthato ariyamaggo ceva nibbānañca. Vuttañcetaṃ – ‘‘yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.34) vitthāro. Na kevalañca ariyamaggo ceva nibbānañca. Api ca kho ariyaphalehi saddhiṃ pariyattidhammopi . Vuttañhetaṃ chattamāṇavakavimāne –
“ 远离贪欲、无有动摇、没有忧悲,这是无为法、不违逆的。
这个甘甜、纯熟、善加分别的法,你应当为了皈依而亲近它。”巴利
‘‘Rāgavirāgamanejamasokaṃ, dhammamasaṅkhatamappaṭikūlaṃ; Madhuramimaṃ paguṇaṃ suvibhattaṃ, dhammamimaṃ saraṇatthamupehī’’ti. (vi. va. 887);
在这里,离贪被称为道,不动无忧被称为果,无为之法被称为涅槃。所谓不违逆、甘甜、熟悉、善分别,即是由三藏所分说的诸法蕴。由正见与戒行聚合而成者名为僧伽,从意义上说,就是八种圣者的群体。在同一座天宫里,也这样说道:巴利
Ettha hi rāgavirāgoti maggo kathito. Anejamasokanti phalaṃ. Dhammamasaṅkhatanti nibbānaṃ. Appaṭikūlaṃ madhuramimaṃ paguṇaṃ suvibhattanti piṭakattayena vibhattā dhammakkhandhāti. Diṭṭhisīlasaṃghātena saṃhatoti saṅgho, so atthato aṭṭha ariyapuggalasamūho. Vuttañhetaṃ tasmiññeva vimāne –
“ 在四对清净的修行人当中,布施被说成有大果报。
这八位见法者即是这样的僧团,你应当皈依。”巴利
‘‘Yattha ca dinnamahapphalamāhu, catūsu sucīsu purīsayugesu; Aṭṭha ca puggaladhammadasā te, saṅghamimaṃ saraṇatthamupehī’’ti. (vi. va. 888);
比丘们的僧团就是比丘僧团。到这里为止,国王已经宣说了三皈依。巴利
Bhikkhūnaṃ saṅgho bhikkhusaṅgho. Ettāvatā rājā tīṇi saraṇagamanāni paṭivedesi.
皈依受持的讨论巴利
Saraṇagamanakathā
现在,为了善巧理解这些皈依,应当了解以下内容:什么是皈依、什么是皈依的行为、谁在皈依、皈依行为的分类、皈依行为的果报、杂染和破坏。具体来说,先从皈依的含义说起:因为它杀害,所以叫皈依。对于已经皈依的人,正是通过这种皈依行为,能杀害、摧毁怖畏、惊恐、痛苦和恶趣的杂染——这就是它的含义,而这里指的就是三宝。巴利
Idāni tesu saraṇagamanesu kosallatthaṃ saraṇaṃ, saraṇagamanaṃ, yo ca saraṇaṃ gacchati, saraṇagamanappabhedo, saraṇagamanaphalaṃ, saṅkileso, bhedoti, ayaṃ vidhi veditabbo. Seyyathidaṃ – saraṇatthato tāva hiṃsatīti saraṇaṃ. Saraṇagatānaṃ teneva saraṇagamanena bhayaṃ santāsaṃ dukkhaṃ duggatiparikilesaṃ hanati vināsetīti attho, ratanattayassevetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
或者,佛陀通过让众生得到利益、停止损害,从而摧毁众生的恐惧;法通过帮助众生走出轮回的旷野、给予安稳,从而摧毁恐惧;僧伽通过让微小的善因获得广大的果报,从而摧毁恐惧。因此,从这个角度来说,三宝就是皈依。当对三宝生起净信与敬重,以此摧毁烦恼,心中生起以三宝为依怙的作意,这种心的生起就是皈依之行。具足这种心的众生,就是在皈依。也就是说,以这样的心生起的方式,心想:这三宝是我的皈依,是我的依怙,这样去投靠,这就是它的含义。以上先说明了皈依、皈依之行、以及谁在皈依这三项内容。巴利
Atha vā hite pavattanena ahitā ca nivattanena sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃsati buddho. Bhavakantārā uttāraṇena assāsadānena ca dhammo; appakānampi kārānaṃ vipulaphalapaṭilābhakaraṇena saṅgho . Tasmā imināpi pariyāyena ratanattayaṃ saraṇaṃ. Tappasādataggarutāhi vihatakileso tapparāyaṇatākārappavatto cittuppādo saraṇagamanaṃ. Taṃ samaṅgīsatto saraṇaṃ gacchati. Vuttappakārena cittuppādena etāni me tīṇi ratanāni saraṇaṃ, etāni parāyaṇanti evaṃ upetīti attho. Evaṃ tāva saraṇaṃ, saraṇagamanaṃ, yo ca saraṇaṃ gacchati, idaṃ tayaṃ veditabbaṃ.
皈依的类别有两种:出世间的皈依和世间的皈依。其中,出世间的皈依,是见谛的人在证得圣道的那一刹那,通过断除皈依的杂染,从所缘的角度来说,以涅槃为所缘;从作用的角度来说,能完成对全部三宝的皈依。世间的皈依,则是凡夫通过镇伏皈依的杂染,从所缘的角度来说,以佛陀等功德为所缘而得以成就。从意义上说,它就是对佛陀等对象获得信心,以及以信心为根本的正见——这在十种福业事中被称为“见正直业”。这个皈依以四种方式表现出来:奉献自己、以彼为归宿、成为弟子、顶礼。巴利
Saraṇagamanappabhede pana duvidhaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ – lokuttaraṃ lokiyañca. Tattha lokuttaraṃ diṭṭhasaccānaṃ maggakkhaṇe saraṇagamanupakkilesasamucchedena ārammaṇato nibbānārammaṇaṃ hutvā kiccato sakalepi ratanattaye ijjhati. Lokiyaṃ puthujjanānaṃ saraṇagamanupakkilesavikkhambhanena ārammaṇato buddhādiguṇārammaṇaṃ hutvā ijjhati. Taṃ atthato buddhādīsu vatthūsu saddhāpaṭilābho saddhāmūlikā ca sammādiṭṭhi dasasu puññakiriyavatthūsu diṭṭhijukammanti vuccati. Tayidaṃ catudhā vattati – attasanniyyātanena, tapparāyaṇatāya, sissabhāvūpagamanena, paṇipātenāti.
在这里,自我奉献是指这样把自身舍弃给佛陀等三宝:“从今天开始,我把自身奉献给佛陀、奉献给法、奉献给僧。”以彼为依怙是指这样的状态:“从今天开始,我以佛陀为依怙,以法为依怙,以僧为依怙。请你们护念我。”成为弟子是指这样进入弟子的身份:“从今天开始,我是佛陀的弟子,是法的弟子,是僧的弟子。请你们护念我。”礼敬是指对佛陀等作最高的恭敬:“从今天开始,我只对佛陀、法、僧这三宝,做问讯、起迎、合掌和恭敬的行为。请你们护念我。”这四种方式中,只要做到其中任何一种,就已经获得了皈依。巴利
Tattha attasanniyyātanaṃ nāma – ‘‘ajjādiṃ katvā ahaṃ attānaṃ buddhassa niyyātemi, dhammassa, saṅghassā’’ti evaṃ buddhādīnaṃ attapariccajanaṃ. Tapparāyaṇatā nāma ‘‘ajjādiṃ katvā ‘ahaṃ buddhaparāyaṇo, dhammaparāyaṇo, saṅghaparāyaṇo’ti. Maṃ dhārethā’’ti evaṃ tapparāyaṇabhāvo. Sissabhāvūpagamanaṃ nāma – ‘‘ajjādiṃ katvā – ‘ahaṃ buddhassa antevāsiko, dhammassa, saṅghassa antevāsiko’ti maṃ dhārethā’’ti evaṃ sissabhāvūpagamo. Paṇipāto nāma – ‘‘ajjādiṃ katvā ahaṃ abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānaañjalikammasāmīcikammaṃ buddhādīnaṃyeva tiṇṇaṃ vatthūnaṃ karomī’ti maṃ dhārethā’’ti evaṃ buddhādīsu paramanipaccākāro. Imesañhi catunnaṃ ākārānaṃ aññatarampi karontena gahitaṃyeva hoti saraṇaṃ.
另外,也可以这样理解“奉献自己”:我把自身奉献给世尊,奉献给法,奉献给僧;我把生命也奉献出去。我的自身已经完全奉献,我的生命已经完全奉献。我尽这一生皈依佛,佛是我的皈依、我的庇护、我的救护。应当这样理解“奉献自己”。
“我若能见到导师,就只愿见世尊;我若能见到善逝,就只愿见世尊;我若能见到正自觉者,就只愿见世尊。”像这样,也应当理解为如同大迦叶尊者皈依时那样,进入弟子的身份。巴利
Api ca bhagavato attānaṃ pariccajāmi, dhammassa, saṅghassa, attānaṃ pariccajāmi, jīvitaṃ pariccajāmi, pariccattoyeva me attā, pariccattaṃyeva jīvitaṃ, jīvitapariyantikaṃ buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmi, buddho me saraṇaṃ leṇaṃ tāṇanti ; evampi attasanniyyātanaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Satthārañca vatāhaṃ passeyyaṃ, bhagavantameva passeyyaṃ, sugatañca vatāhaṃ passeyyaṃ, bhagavantameva passeyyaṃ, sammāsambuddhañca vatāhaṃ passeyyaṃ, bhagavantameva passeyya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.154). Evampi mahākassapassa saraṇagamanaṃ viya sissabhāvūpagamanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
“ 我将从村到村、从城到城地游行。
我礼敬正自觉者,也礼敬法的善法性。”巴利
‘‘So ahaṃ vicarissāmi, gāmā gāmaṃ purā puraṃ; Namassamāno sambuddhaṃ, dhammassa ca sudhammata’’nti. (su. ni. 194);
同样,应当知道:就像阿拉瓦迦等夜叉的皈依一样,这是以对方为依靠的皈依。接着,布拉玛优婆罗门从座位上起身,把上衣披到一边肩上,用头礼拜世尊的双足,用嘴亲吻世尊的双足,又用双手抚摸,并报出自己的名字:“乔达摩尊者,我是布拉玛优婆罗门;乔达摩尊者,我是布拉玛优婆罗门!”(《中部》2.394)应当知道,这就是礼拜式的皈依。巴利
Evampi āḷavakādīnaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ viya tapparāyaṇatā veditabbā. Atha kho brahmāyu brāhmaṇo uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā bhagavato pādesu sirasā nipatitvā bhagavato pādāni mukhena ca paricumbati, pāṇīhi ca parisambāhati, nāmañca sāveti – ‘‘brahmāyu ahaṃ, bho gotama brāhmaṇo, brahmāyu ahaṃ, bho gotama brāhmaṇo’’ti (ma. ni. 2.394) evampi paṇipāto daṭṭhabbo.
这种皈依按亲戚、恐惧、老师、应受供养者来分,有四种。其中,只有向应受供养者合掌礼敬,才算皈依,其他几种不算。因为皈依只以最殊胜者为对象才成立,也只因最殊胜者才破裂。所以,如果有释迦族人或者拘利人,心想“佛陀是我们的亲戚”而礼敬,这皈依其实并没有成立。如果有人心想“沙门乔达摩受国王供养,有大威力,要是不礼敬,他可能会加害我们”,因为害怕而礼敬,这皈依也没有成立。又或者有人在菩萨时期曾从世尊那里受学持守些什么,到了佛陀时期仍忆持不忘……巴利
So panesa ñātibhayācariyadakkhiṇeyyavasena catubbidho hoti. Tattha dakkhiṇeyyapaṇipātena saraṇagamanaṃ hoti, na itarehi. Seṭṭhavaseneva hi saraṇaṃ gaṇhāti, seṭṭhavasena ca bhijjati. Tasmā yo sākiyo vā koliyo vā – ‘‘buddho amhākaṃ ñātako’’ti vandati, aggahitameva hoti saraṇaṃ. Yo vā – ‘‘samaṇo gotamo rājapūjito mahānubhāvo avandīyamāno anatthampi kareyyā’’ti bhayena vandati, aggahitameva hoti saraṇaṃ. Yo vā bodhisattakāle bhagavato santike kiñci uggahitaṃ saramāno buddhakāle vā –
“ 有智慧的人居家生活,应当把财富分成四份。
用一份来享用财富,用两份来经营事业;
第四份应该存起来,以备遇到灾难时用。”巴利
‘‘Catudhā vibhaje bhoge, paṇḍito gharamāvasaṃ; Ekena bhogaṃ bhuñjeyya, dvīhi kammaṃ payojaye; Catutthañca nidhāpeyya, āpadāsu bhavissatī’’ti. (dī. ni. 3.265);
接受了这样的教导之后,如果心想“这是我的老师”而向他行礼,那皈依其实并没有真正受持。但如果心想“这是世间最值得供养的人”而向他行礼,那皈依才算真正受持了。巴利
Evarūpaṃ anusāsaniṃ uggahetvā – ‘‘ācariyo me’’ti vandati, aggahitameva hoti saraṇaṃ. Yo pana – ‘‘ayaṃ loke aggadakkhiṇeyyo’’ti vandati, teneva gahitaṃ hoti saraṇaṃ.
已经以这种方式受持皈依的男居士或女居士,即使对出家加入外道的亲戚,因为想着“这是我的亲戚”而向他礼敬,皈依也不会破失,更何况对没有出家的亲戚。同样,因为害怕而向国王礼敬,也不会破失,因为国王受到全国尊崇,若不礼敬,他可能会加害。同样,向教导任何技艺的外道老师礼敬,因为想着“这是我的老师”,皈依也不会破失。应当这样理解皈依的种种区别。巴利
Evaṃ gahitasaraṇassa ca upāsakassa vā upāsikāya vā aññatitthiyesu pabbajitampi ñātiṃ – ‘‘ñātako me aya’’nti vandato saraṇagamanaṃ na bhijjati, pageva apabbajitaṃ. Tathā rājānaṃ bhayavasena vandato. So hi raṭṭhapūjitattā avandīyamāno anatthampi kareyyāti. Tathā yaṃ kiñci sippaṃ sikkhāpakaṃ titthiyampi – ‘‘ācariyo me aya’’nti vandatopi na bhijjati, evaṃ saraṇagamanappabhedo veditabbo.
在这里,对于出世间的皈依来说,四种沙门果是异熟果,一切苦的灭尽是功德利益果。因为这样说:巴利
Ettha ca lokuttarassa saraṇagamanassa cattāri sāmaññaphalāni vipākaphalaṃ, sabbadukkhakkhayo ānisaṃsaphalaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“ 凡是已经皈依佛、皈依法和皈依僧的人,
他以正慧如实照见四圣谛。
苦、苦的生起,以及超越苦。
导向苦的止息的圣八支道。
这个皈依处确实安稳,这个皈依处是最殊胜的。
依靠这个皈依,就能从一切苦中解脱出来。”巴利
‘‘Yo ca buddhañca dhammañca, saṅghañca saraṇaṃ gato; Cattāri ariyasaccāni, sammappaññāya passati. Dukkhaṃ dukkhasamuppādaṃ, dukkhassa ca atikkamaṃ; Ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ, dukkhūpasamagāminaṃ. Etaṃ kho saraṇaṃ khemaṃ, etaṃ saraṇamuttamaṃ; Etaṃ saraṇamāgamma, sabbadukkhā pamuccatī’’ti. (dha. pa. 192);
另外,还可以从“不趋近执取常”等方面,来了知对饿鬼的利益果报。经中这样说:无有此理,绝无可能——见具足的人会把任何行执为常……会把任何行执为乐……会把任何法执为我……会杀害母亲的生命……杀害父亲……杀害阿拉汉……以染污心使如来流血……分裂僧团……会认别的导师为导师。绝无此理。不过,对世俗层面的皈依来说,投生善趣和获得财富就是它的果报。经中这样说:巴利
Api ca niccādito anupagamanādivasena petassa ānisaṃsaphalaṃ veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ anavakāso, yaṃ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo kañci saṅkhāraṃ niccato upagaccheyya…pe… kañci saṅkhāraṃ sukhato…pe… kañci dhammaṃ attato upagaccheyya…pe… mātaraṃ jīvitā voropeyya…pe… pitaraṃ…pe… arahantaṃ…pe… paduṭṭhacitto tathāgatassa lohitaṃ uppādeyya…pe…. saṅghaṃ bhindeyya…pe… aññaṃ satthāraṃ uddiseyya, netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti (a. ni. 1.290). Lokiyassa pana saraṇagamanassa bhavasampadāpi bhogasampadāpi phalameva. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“ 凡是已经皈依佛陀的人,他们都不会堕入恶趣。
舍弃了人身之后,他们就会投生到天界,圆满成为天众之身。”巴利
‘‘Ye keci buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gatāse, na te gamissanti apāyabhūmiṃ; Pahāya mānusaṃ dehaṃ, devakāyaṃ paripūressantī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.37);
另外还有一段经文这样说:“那时,帝释天神带着八万天众,来到具寿大目犍连那里……帝释天神站在一边,具寿大目犍连对他说:‘帝释天神,皈依佛确实是好的。帝释天神,正是因为皈依佛,这里有些众生在身体坏灭、死后,投生到善趣、天界……他们在十个方面胜过其他天人:天人的寿命、天人的容貌、天人的快乐、天人的名声、天人的主宰权,以及天人的色、声、香、味、触。’”同样的道理也适用于法和僧。此外,依据《鞞罗摩经》等经典,也应当了解皈依有不同的果报差别。应当这样来理解皈依的果报。巴利
Aparampi vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho sakko devānamindo asītiyā devatāsahassehi saddhiṃ yenāyasmā mahāmoggallāno tenupasaṅkami…pe… ekamantaṃ ṭhitaṃ kho sakkaṃ devānamindaṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno etadavoca – ‘‘sādhu kho, devānaminda, buddhaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ hoti. Buddhaṃ saraṇagamanahetu kho, devānaminda, evamidhekacce sattā kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjanti…pe… te aññe deve dasahi ṭhānehi adhigaṇhanti – dibbena āyunā, dibbena vaṇṇena, dibbena sukhena, dibbena yasena, dibbena ādhipateyyena, dibbehi rūpehi saddehi gandhehi rasehi phoṭṭhabbehī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.341). Esa nayo dhamme ca saṅghe ca. Api ca velāmasuttādīnaṃ vasenāpi saraṇagamanassa phalaviseso veditabbo. Evaṃ saraṇagamanassa phalaṃ veditabbaṃ.
在这里,世间皈依会在三种事上被无知、怀疑、邪智等污染,不会有大光明,也不会有大影响。出世间的皈依则没有污染。世间皈依又有两种破失:有罪过的和无罪过的。其中,有罪过的破失是因为投靠其他导师等而发生的,它会带来不好的果报。无罪过的破失发生在临终时,由于没有异熟,所以没有结果。但出世间的皈依根本没有这种破失。因为即使转生到另一世,圣弟子也不会再认别的导师。应当这样理解皈依的污染和破失。巴利
Tattha ca lokiyasaraṇagamanaṃ tīsu vatthūsu aññāṇasaṃsayamicchāñāṇādīhi saṃkilissati, na mahājutikaṃ hoti, na mahāvipphāraṃ. Lokuttarassa natthi saṃkileso. Lokiyassa ca saraṇagamanassa duvidho bhedo – sāvajjo ca anavajjo ca. Tattha sāvajjo aññasatthārādīsu attasanniyyātanādīhi hoti, so ca aniṭṭhaphalo hoti. Anavajjo kālakiriyāya hoti, so avipākattā aphalo. Lokuttarassa pana nevatthi bhedo. Bhavantarepi hi ariyasāvako aññaṃ satthāraṃ na uddisatīti. Evaṃ saraṇagamanassa saṃkileso ca bhedo ca veditabboti.
“尊者,请世尊记着我为近事男。”意思是:请世尊这样记着我——“这是一位近事男”,也就是请世尊知道。不过,为了通达近事男的种种情况,这里还应了解这些附带问题:谁是近事男?为什么称为近事男?他的戒是什么?他的活命方式是什么?什么是他的失败?什么是他的成就?巴利
Upāsakaṃ maṃ bhante bhagavā dhāretūti maṃ bhagavā ‘‘upāsako aya’’nti evaṃ dhāretu, jānātūti attho. Upāsakavidhikosallatthaṃ panettha – ko upāsako? Kasmā upāsakoti vuccati ? Kimassa sīlaṃ? Ko ājīvo? Kā vipatti? Kā sampattīti? Idaṃ pakiṇṇakaṃ veditabbaṃ.
这里,“谁是近事男?”指的是任何一个已经皈依的在家人。经中就是这样说的:“玛哈那玛,当一个人已经皈依佛、已经皈依法、已经皈依僧,玛哈那玛,仅仅到这一步,他就是近事男。”巴利
Tattha ko upāsakoti yo koci saraṇagato gahaṭṭho. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘yato kho, mahānāma, buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gato hoti, dhammaṃ saraṇaṃ gato hoti, saṅghaṃ saraṇaṃ gato hoti. Ettāvatā kho, mahānāma, upāsako hotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1033).
为什么叫近事男?因为他亲近三宝。他亲近佛陀,所以是近事男;同样地,亲近法、亲近僧伽。巴利
Kasmā upāsakoti ratanattayaṃ upāsanato. So hi buddhaṃ upāsatīti upāsako, tathā dhammaṃ saṃghaṃ.
他的戒是什么?就是五种远离。正如经中所说:“玛哈那玛,当一位近事男远离杀生,远离不与取,远离欲邪行,远离妄语,远离诸酒放逸处,玛哈那玛,到这一步,这位近事男就是具戒者。”巴利
Kimassasīlanti pañca veramaṇiyo. Yathāha – ‘‘yato kho, mahānāma, upāsako pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, adinnādānā… kāmesumicchācārā… musāvādā… surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā paṭivirato hoti, ettāvatā kho, mahānāma, upāsako sīlavā hotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1033).
什么是活命?就是舍弃五种邪命买卖之后,如法、公平地维持生活。正如经中所说:比丘们,有五种买卖是近事男不应做的。是哪五种?武器买卖、人口买卖、肉类买卖、酒类买卖、毒药买卖。比丘们,这五种买卖是近事男不应做的。巴利
Koājīvoti pañca micchāvaṇijjā pahāya dhammena samena jīvitakappanaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘pañcimā, bhikkhave, vaṇijjā upāsakena akaraṇīyā. Katamā pañca? Satthavaṇijjā, sattavaṇijjā, maṃsavaṇijjā, majjavaṇijjā, visavaṇijjā. Imā kho, bhikkhave, pañca vaṇijjā upāsakena akaraṇīyā’’ti (a. ni. 5.177).
什么是他的败落?就是他自身在戒律和谋生方式上的败落,这就是他的败落。另外,凡是让他成为贱民、成为污垢、成为被嫌弃者的那些,也应当理解为他的败落。而这些从实质上说,就是不信等五种法。正如经中所说:“比丘们,具足五种法的在家男信徒,是在家男信徒中的贱民、在家男信徒中的污垢、在家男信徒中被嫌弃的人。是哪五种?不信、破戒、迷信吉兆、相信吉兆而不相信业、并且到外面其他地方去寻找应受供养的人,还在那里抢先礼敬。”(《增支部》5.175)巴利
Kā vipattīti yā tasseva sīlassa ca ājīvassa ca vipatti, ayamassa vipatti. Api ca yāya esa caṇḍālo ceva hoti, malañca patikuṭṭho ca, sāpissa vipattīti veditabbā. Te ca atthato assaddhiyādayo pañca dhammā honti. Yathāha – ‘‘pañcahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato upāsako upāsakacaṇḍālo ca hoti, upāsakamalañca, upāsakapatikuṭṭho ca. Katamehi pañcahi? Assaddho hoti, dussīlo hoti, kotūhalamaṅgaliko hoti, maṅgalaṃ pacceti, no kammaṃ, ito ca bahiddhā dakkhiṇeyyaṃ pariyesati, tattha ca pubbakāraṃ karotī’’ti (a. ni. 5.175).
什么是他的成就?就是他的戒成就和正命成就,这就是成就;还有那些能使他成为宝的信等五种法,也是成就。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,具足五法的近事男,是近事男宝、是近事男莲花、是近事男白莲花。哪五种呢?有信、具戒、不迷信祥瑞、信业而不信祥瑞、不在此之外寻求应供,而先在此处行恭敬。”巴利
Kā sampattīti yā cassa sīlasampadā ceva ājīvasampadā ca, sā sampatti; ye cassa ratanabhāvādikarā saddhādayo pañca dhammā. Yathāha – ‘‘pañcahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato upāsako upāsakaratanañca hoti, upāsakapadumañca, upāsakapuṇḍarīkañca. Katamehi pañcahi? Saddho hoti, sīlavā hoti, na kotūhalamaṅgaliko hoti, kammaṃ pacceti, no maṅgalaṃ, na ito bahiddhā dakkhiṇeyyaṃ gavesati, idha ca pubbakāraṃ karotī’’ti (a. ni. 5.175).
从今日起这个说法里,agga 这个词可以在“开始”“末端”“部分”“最上”这几种意思中出现。比如“朋友守门人,从今日起,我关闭尼干陀和尼干陀女的门”这类句子里,它是“开始”的意思。比如“用那个指尖去碰那个指尖”“甘蔗尖、竹尖”这类句子里,它是“末端”的意思。比如“酸的部分、甜的部分、苦的部分,按精舍的部分或按僧房的部分来分”这类句子里,它是“部分”的意思。比如“诸比丘,凡是无足的……乃至……如来于其中被称为最上”这类句子里,它是“最上”的意思。但在这里,它应当视为“开始”的意思。因此,“从今日起”是指以今日为开始,这里的意思应当这样理解。“今日”是指今日的状态。或者写作 ajjadagge,d 是连词音。意思是“今日 agga”。巴利
Ajjataggeti etthāyaṃ aggasaddo ādikoṭikoṭṭhāsaseṭṭhesu dissati. ‘‘Ajjatagge, samma dovārika, āvarāmi dvāraṃ nigaṇṭhānaṃ nigaṇṭhīna’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.70) hi ādimhi dissati. ‘‘Teneva aṅgulaggena taṃ aṅgulaggaṃ parāmaseyya . Ucchaggaṃ veḷagga’’ntiādīsu (kathā. 281) koṭiyaṃ. ‘‘Ambilaggaṃ vā madhuraggaṃ vā tittakaggaṃ vā vihāraggena vā pariveṇaggena vā bhājetu’’ntiādīsu (cūḷava. 317) koṭṭhāse. ‘‘Yāvatā, bhikkhave, sattā apadā vā…pe… tathāgato tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.34) seṭṭhe. Idha panāyaṃ ādimhi daṭṭhabbo. Tasmā ajjataggeti ajjataṃ ādiṃ katvāti evametthattho veditabbo. Ajjatanti ajjabhāvaṃ. Ajjadaggeti vā pāṭho, dakāro padasandhikaro. Ajja agganti attho.
“具生命者”是指被生命所伴随。只要我的生命还在延续,在这期间,我就以生命为伴随,不认其他人为老师。我已经通过三种皈依而皈依,是如法行事的近事男,愿世尊记住我、知道我。即使有人用锋利的剑砍断我的头,我也绝不会说“佛陀不是佛陀”,或者说“法不是法”,或者说“僧伽不是僧伽”。巴利
Pāṇupetanti pāṇehi upetaṃ. Yāva me jīvitaṃ pavattati, tāva upetaṃ anaññasatthukaṃ tīhi saraṇagamanehi saraṇaṃ gataṃ upāsakaṃ kappiyakārakaṃ maṃ bhagavā dhāretu jānātu. Ahañhi sacepi me tikhiṇena asinā sīsaṃ chindeyya, neva buddhaṃ ‘‘na buddho’’ti vā, dhammaṃ ‘‘na dhammo’’ti vā, saṅghaṃ ‘‘na saṅgho’’ti vā vadeyyanti.
他这样把自己奉献出去,皈依之后,又表白自己所犯的过失,说出“尊者,过失压倒了我”等话。其中,“过失”就是罪过。“压倒了我”是说越过我、制伏了我而发生的。“如法的法王”中,“如法的”指依法而行的人;“法王”指只凭法成为王,不是靠杀父等非法手段成为王。“我剥夺了生命”就是我夺走了命。“请接受”就是请原谅。“为了未来的防护”是为了将来能够防护,为了不再犯这样的过失、罪过和失误。巴利
Evaṃ attasanniyyātanena saraṇaṃ gantvā attanā kataṃ aparādhaṃ pakāsento accayo maṃ, bhantetiādimāha. Tattha accayoti aparādho. Maṃ accagamāti maṃ atikkamma abhibhavitvā pavatto. Dhammikaṃ dhammarājānanti ettha dhammaṃ caratīti dhammiko. Dhammeneva rājā jāto, na pitughātanādinā adhammenāti dhammarājā. Jīvitā voropesinti jīvitā viyojesiṃ. Paṭiggaṇhātūti khamatu. Āyatiṃ saṃvarāyāti anāgate saṃvaratthāya. Puna evarūpassa aparādhassa dosassa khalitassa akaraṇatthāya.
251 “实哉”是一个表示决定语气的助词。“你如法而行”的意思是:你按照法的安立而做,也就是你请求了原谅。“你的那过失,我们接受”是指:你的那个过失,我们予以原谅。“大王,这是圣者律中的增长”:大王,在圣者律中,在佛陀世尊的教法里,这称为增长。什么是增长?就是见过失为过失,如法地补救,并在未来加以防护。在宣说此告白时,他以个人为对象而说:“若人见过失为过失,如法而行补救,于未来成就防护。”巴利
251.Tagghāti ekaṃse nipāto. Yathā dhammaṃ paṭikarosīti yathā dhammo ṭhito tatheva karosi, khamāpesīti vuttaṃ hoti. Taṃ te mayaṃ paṭiggaṇhāmāti taṃ tava aparādhaṃ mayaṃ khamāma. Vuḍḍhihesā, mahārāja ariyassa vinayeti esā, mahārāja, ariyassa vinaye buddhassa bhagavato sāsane vuḍḍhi nāma. Katamā? Yāyaṃ accayaṃ accayato disvā yathādhammaṃ paṭikaritvā āyatiṃ saṃvarāpajjanā, desanaṃ pana puggalādhiṭṭhānaṃ karonto – ‘‘yo accayaṃ accayato disvā yathādhammaṃ paṭikaroti, āyatiṃ saṃvaraṃ āpajjatī’’ti āha.
252 世尊这样说之后,人们说:“那么,尊者,我们现在……”这里的“那么”是表示言语意义的助词。他其实是带着“我们该走了”的意思这样说的。“事务繁多”就是事情很多,“多有所作”是同一个意思的另一种说法。“现在你认为什么时候合适”,意思是:大王,现在出发的时机,如果你觉得合适、你清楚,那你自己知道什么时候该走。他向右绕行三圈,把十指并拢、光洁明亮的合掌举到头顶,在还能看见世尊的范围内,一直面朝世尊后退,到了看不见世尊的地方,五体投地礼拜之后才离开。巴利
252.Evaṃ vutteti evaṃ bhagavatā vutte. Handa ca dāni mayaṃ bhanteti ettha handāti vacasāyatthe nipāto. So hi gamanavacasāyaṃ katvā evamāha. Bahukiccāti balavakiccā. Bahukaraṇīyāti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Yassadāni tvanti yassa idāni tvaṃ mahārāja gamanassa kālaṃ maññasi jānāsi, tassa kālaṃ tvameva jānāsīti vuttaṃ hoti. Padakkhiṇaṃ katvā pakkāmīti tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā dasanakhasamodhānasamujjalaṃ añjaliṃ sirasi patiṭṭhapetvā yāva dassanavisayaṃ bhagavato abhimukhova paṭikkamitvā dassanavijahanaṭṭhānabhūmiyaṃ pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā pakkāmi.
253 比丘们,“这位王被摧毁了”意思是:比丘们,这位王被摧毁了。“被毁伤了”意思是:这位王被毁伤了。这里说的是:比丘们,这位王已被摧毁、已被毁伤,立足处已经破裂,他就这样自己把自己摧毁了,以至于没有了立足之处。“离尘”指远离贪等尘染。“离垢”是因为远离了贪等垢染,所以叫离垢。“法眼”,或者指对诸法的眼,或者指法所成的眼;在其他地方,这是对三道(入流道、一来道、不还道)的称呼,但在这里只指入流道。这里说的是:假如他没有杀害父亲,现在坐在这座上的他就能证得入流道,但因为与恶友交往,障难出现了。即便如此,由于他亲近如来、皈依了三宝,凭借我教法的广大威力,就像有人杀了一个男子后,只以一把花作为惩罚就能获释一样,他将在铁釜地狱中再生,向下沉没三万年到达最底层,再向上浮起三万年到达最上层表面后,得以解脱。据说这也是世尊所说,只是没有收录在经文中。巴利
253.Khatāyaṃ, bhikkhave, rājāti khato ayaṃ, bhikkhave, rājā. Upahatāyanti upahato ayaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ayaṃ, bhikkhave, rājā khato upahato bhinnapatiṭṭho jāto, tathānena attanāva attā khato, yathā attano patiṭṭhā na jātāti. Virajanti rāgarajādivirahitaṃ. Rāgamalādīnaṃyeva vigatattā vītamalaṃ. Dhammacakkhunti dhammesu vā cakkhuṃ, dhammamayaṃ vā cakkhuṃ, aññesu ṭhānesu tiṇṇaṃ maggānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Idha pana sotāpattimaggasseva. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – sace iminā pitā ghātito nābhavissa, idāni idhevāsane nisinno sotāpattimaggaṃ patto abhavissa, pāpamittasaṃsaggena panassa antarāyo jāto. Evaṃ santepi yasmā ayaṃ tathāgataṃ upasaṅkamitvā ratanattayaṃ saraṇaṃ gato, tasmā mama sāsanamahantatāya yathā nāma koci purisassa vadhaṃ katvā pupphamuṭṭhimattena daṇḍena mucceyya, evameva lohakumbhiyaṃ nibbattitvā tiṃsavassasahassāni adho patanto heṭṭhimatalaṃ patvā tiṃsavassasahassāni uddhaṃ gacchanto punapi uparimatalaṃ pāpuṇitvā muccissatīti idampi kira bhagavatā vuttameva, pāḷiyaṃ pana na ārūḷhaṃ.
国王听了这部经以后,得到了什么利益呢?他得到了很大的利益。因为从父亲被杀那时起,他白天黑夜都睡不着觉,直到亲近了导师、听了这场甘美又充满滋养的法义开示之后,他才终于能睡着了。他对三宝做了极大的恭敬。就一个凡夫所具有的信心来说,没有人能跟这位国王相比。将来他会成为一位名叫“胜者”的独觉佛,然后般涅槃。世尊这样说了。那些比丘满心欢喜,对世尊的教导欢喜信受。巴利
Idaṃ pana suttaṃ sutvā raññā koci ānisaṃso laddhoti? Mahāānisaṃso laddho. Ayañhi pitu māritakālato paṭṭhāya neva rattiṃ na divā niddaṃ labhati, satthāraṃ pana upasaṅkamitvā imāya madhurāya ojavantiyā dhammadesanāya sutakālato paṭṭhāya niddaṃ labhi. Tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ mahāsakkāraṃ akāsi. Pothujjanikāya saddhāya samannāgato nāma iminā raññā sadiso nāhosi. Anāgate pana vijitāvī nāma paccekabuddho hutvā parinibbāyissatīti . Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandunti.